correlating committee, december 13-14, 2012, quincy, ma

National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169‐7471 Phone: 617‐770‐3000 • Fax: 617‐770‐0700 • www.nfpa.org

AGENDA NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE CORRELATING COMMITTEE

DECEMBER 13-14, 2012 QUINCY, MA

1. Call to Order and Introduction of Members and Guests 2. Approval of the April 2012 ROP Meeting Minutes 3. Review of New Regs and Correlating Committee Actions (Attachments) 4. NFPA 70E First Draft Report a. Review of First Revisions and Final Ballot Results (Attachments) b. Develop Correlating Notes and Correlating First Revisions 5. NFPA 79 First Draft Report a. Review of First Revisions and Final Ballot Results (Attachments) b. Develop Correlating Notes and Correlating First Revisions 6. NFPA 790 First Draft Report a. Review of First Revisions and Final Ballot Results (Attachments) b. Develop Correlating Notes and Correlating First Revisions

7. Next Meeting - NEC Correlating Committee ROP Meeting, February 18-22, 2013 8. Adjournment

of 473

M I NUTES OF TH E NATI ONAL EL ECTRI CAL CODE CORREL ATI NG COM M I TTEE M EETI NG

APRI L 23-27, 2012 H I L TON OCEANPOI NT

SI NGER I SL AND, FL

I t em 12-4-1, Cal l t o Or der The Meet ing of the Nat ional Elect r ical Code Correlat ing Commit tee was cal led to order by the Chair , Michael J. Johnston, at 8:15 A.M. on Monday, Apr i l 23, 2012 at the Hi l ton Oceanpoint , Singer I sland, FL. I t em 12-4-2, Rol l Cal l I n addit ion to the Chair , the fol lowing Correlat ing Commit tee Pr incipal and Alternate members were present : Messrs. T.L . Adams (Al t . to N.F. LaBrake, Jr .), L .S. Ayer (Al t . to D.L . Hi t t inger), J.E. Brunssen, M.W. Bunker, Jr ., J.T. Dollard, Jr . (Al t . to P.L . Hickman), W.R. Drake, W.T. Fisk, S.J. Folz (Al t . to M.J. Johnston), E.J. Gallo (Al t . to J.E. Brunssen), P.L . Hickman, D.L . Hit t inger , D.J. K issane, J.R. Kovacik, N.F. LaBrake, Jr ., D. L igget t , R.A. McCul lough (Al t . to R.P. Owen), M.E. McNei l (Al t . to D. L igget t ), M.C. Ode (Al t . to J.R. Kovacik), R.P. Owen, T.J. Pope (Nonvot ing), and V.J. Sapor i ta (Al t . to D.J. K issane). NFPA staff in at tendance were M.W. Ear ley (Secretary), J.A. O'Connor (Recording Secretary), W.M. Burke (Manager, Elect r ical Engineer ing), and K.L . Shea (Technical Projects Administ rator). Guests in at tendance dur ing al l or par t of the meet ing were Leonard Devine, IAEI -ret i red; Vince Del lacroce, City of Por t Lucie, FL; Paul Dobrowsky, I nnovat ive Technology Services; Br ian Lydie, Fronus USA; Dick Loyd, Steel Tube Inst i tute; Alan Manche, Schneider Elect r ic; and Br ian Rock, Hubbel l I ncorporated. The Chair opened the meet ing with welcoming remarks. I n addit ion, sel f-int roduct ions of meet ing at tendees and guests were conducted. I t em 12-4-3, Appr oval of t he M i nu t es of t he November 8, 2011 M eet i ng I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t hat t he M i nu t es of t he November 8, 2011 M eet i ng of t he NEC Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee be appr oved, as submi t t ed. I t em 12-4-4, Repor t s 1. St andar ds Counci l Updat e (R.P. Ow en) R.P. Owen provided an update on recent Standards Counci l act ivi t ies with the fol lowing highl ights:

• The request to the Standards Counci l by NJATC and NECA to change the NEC to a 5 year revision cycle was denied.

of 473

• When the new standards development system is in place, the NEC ROP, ROC, and Correlat ing Commit tee Meet ing dates wi l l be similar to those in past cycles. The Closing Date for receipt of Public I nputs for the A2017 Cycle wil l be November 7, 2014 and the First Draft Meet ings wil l be held January 12-29, 2015.

• The Proposed NFPA 70E Declared st ructure was returned to the Correlat ing Commit tee by the Standards Counci l wi th suggest ions for fur ther revisions. The Counci l directed that the Correlat ing Commit tee provide the revised St ructure to them for their review and decision at their August 2012 Meet ing.

2. Secr et ar y t o t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee (M .W. Ear ley)

• St at us of NFPA 70B, 70E, 73, 79, 110/111, & 790/791

M.W. Ear ley advised that NFPA 70B held their F2012 ROC Meet ing in March in Tampa, FL. The ROC bal lot has been completed and the Correlat ing Commit tee ballot wi l l be sent shor t ly.

M.W. Ear ley advised that NFPA 70E, NFPA 79, and NFPA 790/791 are al l in the new process A2014 Cycle with a Publ ic I nput Closing Date of June 22, 2012. NFPA 70 and 79 wi l l be conduct ing their PI Meet ings back-to-back in Denver, CO in August as there are members who are on both technical commit tees. The NFPA 790/791 Technical Commit tee wil l conduct a L ive Meet ing/Teleconference in August rather than holding a face-to-face meet ing. M.W. Ear ley advised that NFPA 73 wil l enter the A2015 cycle with a Public I nput Closing Date of July 8, 2013. M.W. Ear ley advised that NFPA 110/111 has completed their ROC. The NITMAM Closing Date was Apr i l 5, 2012 and there were no Cert i fied Amending Mot ions for this document .

• St at us of t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee on Elect r i cal I nst al lat i on Codes of Nor t h Amer i ca and t he NEC/CEC Task Gr oup on Ampaci t i es M.W. Ear ley advised that there is nothing new to repor t at this t ime.

• Updat e on t he F i r e Pr ot ect i on Resear ch Foundat i on ’s Elect r i cal Pr oject s M.W. Ear ley provided an update on the fol lowing Foundat ion project :

• Gr oundi ng CSST Gas Pi p i ng Fundraising cont inues for the second phase of the project .

• Updat e on t he Ar c F lash /Blast Pr oject

of 473

M.W. Ear ley advised that work is cont inuing on the project . A prel iminary mathemat ical model has been developed, which is being circulated to the steer ing commit tee and the technical advisory commit tee for review. Following this review, i t wi l l be sent to a Task Group of the IEEE 1584 commit tee to see i f they agree with the approach. The hear t of the “model” wi l l be in the form of an est imat ion software program which wi l l be provided to the users of IEEE 1584 with a l icense. Del ivery of the model in this manner was unanimously supported by the IEEE/NFPA Col laborat ion Steer ing Commit tee. Work has not yet begun on dc arc flash research.

3. Pr ocedu r es Task Gr oup (W.R. Dr ak e)

• Updat e on t he St at us of t he I ssues/H i st or i cal Wor k Documen t W.R. Drake advised that he wil l update the document after this meet ing, i f necessary, and i t was agreed that staff wi l l dist r ibute i t to the ent i re Correlat ing Commit tee and the Code-Making Panel Chairs. He asked that i f any Correlat ing Commit tee members care to provide input to him regarding potent ial updates i t would be appreciated.

4. Repor t of t he Task Gr oup on NEC Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee SOPs/M ember sh i p(W.R. Dr ak e) I t was noted that recommendat ions regarding the Membership Processing por t ions of the Correlat ing Commit tee SOPs are due to Standards Administ rat ion for placement on the Standards Counci l Agenda for their August 6-9, 2012 Meet ing. The cutoff date for submit t ing agenda i tems for this meet ing is the fi rst week of June. W.R Drake advised that the SOPs have been revised per the request of the Standards Counci l and also include some edi tor ial updates to the document , such as the change to the name of the NFPA Regulat ions Governing Commit tee Projects. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o appr ove t he r ev i sed NEC Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee Supplemen t al Oper at i ng Pr ocedu r es, and t hat t he document w i l l be for w ar ded by St af f t o t he St andar ds Counci l for i nclusi on on t hei r August 2012 meet i ng agenda.

5. M ember sh i p Task Gr oup (M .W. Bunk er , J r .)

• St at us of Revi si ons t o t he NFPA 70E Declar ed St r uct u r e

M.W. Bunker, Jr . advised that the proposed NFPA 70E Declared St ructure that was submit ted to the Standards Counci l for approval at their March 2012 Meet ing was returned to the Correlat ing Commit tee with fur ther direct ion from the Standards Counci l for addi t ional revisions. I t was noted that the Standards Counci l requested to receive input from the Correlat ing Commit tee regarding the NFPA 70E Declared St ructure

of 473

for considerat ion at their August 6-9, 2012 Meet ing. The cutoff date for submit t ing agenda i tems for this meet ing is the fi rst week of June. A revised NFPA 70E Declared St ructure, incorporat ing the requests of the Standards Counci l , was developed by the Task Group. R.P Owen opened a discussion of the revised Declared St ructure and fur ther discussion took place regarding the speci fics of the changes. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o appr ove t he r ev i sed 70E Declar ed St r uct u r e, and t hat t he documen t w i l l be for w ar ded by St af f t o t he St andar ds Counci l for i nclusi on on t hei r August 2012 meet i ng agenda.

• St at us of possi ble r ev i si ons t o w or d i ng r elat ed t o t he lengt h of ser v i ce of Code-M ak i ng Panel Chai r s M.W. Bunker, Jr . advised this issue has been par t ial ly addressed through the use of the Chair Evaluat ion Forms used dur ing the NEC ROP Meet ing. M.W. Ear ley provided an overview of the resul ts of the NEC Code-Making Panel Chair Evaluat ion Forms. He advised that there was overal l sat isfact ion with the meet ing faci l i ty and with the per formance of the Chairs. I t was agreed that the Evaluat ion Forms wi l l cont inue to be used dur ing the ROC stage of the cycle. A discussion took place regarding var ious points of view regarding the use of the Evaluat ion Forms, and i t was agreed that no formal term l imits would be imposed on Code-Making Panel Chairs at this t ime, beyond the l imits prescr ibed by the NFPA Regs. I t was also agreed that the meet ing evaluat ion forms and input from Code-Making Panel Members wi l l suffice as a means for terminat ion of a Chair , i f deemed necessary.

6. Usabi l i t y Task Gr oup (S.J . Folz) S.J. Folz advised that the Usabi l i ty Task Group has completed al l of their assignments. M.W. Ear ley advised that the Task Group may want to reconsider the rules on the use of the word “sect ion” the next t ime revisions are made to the NEC Style Manual. I n addit ion, a discussion took place relat ive to the wording in the NEC Style Manual per taining to I nformat ional Notes and referenced documents. 7. Repor t of t he Task Gr oup on DC Requ i r emen t s i n t he NEC (J .R. K ovaci k ) J.R. Kovacik provided a br ief background regarding the work of this Task Group, and advised that the Task Group plans to cont inue their work dur ing the ROC stage of the cycle. He also advised that i f any members of the Correlat ing Commit tee would l ike to par t icipate they are welcome to contact him. I t em 12-4-5, New Busi ness, Act i on on 2014 NEC Pr oposals

of 473

A. Di scussi on of Panel Revi ew Assi gnment s

M.W. Ear ley, M.J. Johnston and W.R. Drake opened a discussion relat ive to reviewing the NEC Proposals, i .e., global issues that have ar isen dur ing the cycle, compl iance with the NEC Style Manual, etc. James T. Dollard, Jr . provided an update on the status of the work of the High Voltage Task Group. He offered suggested wording for Cor relat ing Commit tee Notes that should be added to proposals acted on by Code-Making Panels 1 and 8 per taining to this issue.

B. Revi ew of For m Chai r Repor t s/M inu t es

M.W. Ear ley and W.R. Drake reminded the Task Group Members to review the Form Chair Reports/Minutes for issues that may need at tent ion by the Correlat ing Commit tee.

C. Act i on on t he 2014 NEC Pr oposals Act ion was taken on the 2014 NEC Proposals as fol lows:

Code-M ak i ng Panel 1 M.W. Bunker, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 1. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 1 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 2 P.L . Hickman presented the repor t of CMP 2. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 2 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 3 M.W. Bunker, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 3. CM P 3 M I NUTE I TEM : The Chair of the Correlat ing Commit tee wi l l advise the Chairs of Code-Making Panels 3 and 16 to form a Task Group, consist ing of members from both panels, to correlate l ist ing requirements for cable rout ing assembl ies relat ive to Proposals 3-118 and 16-140, and related proposals (such as Proposals 3-171 and 16-23 which dealt wi th the defini t ion of “Cable Rout ing Assembly”) and submit comments, i f deemed appropr iate. The Correlat ing Commit tee suggests that 800.2 may be the most appropr iate locat ion for the defini t ion. This Task Group wi l l operate independent ly from the Correlat ing Commit tee.

of 473

I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 3 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 4 W.R. Drake presented the repor t of CMP 4. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 4 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 5 W.R. Drake presented the repor t of CMP 5. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 5 as amended by t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 6 N.F. LaBrake, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 6. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 6 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 7 N.F. LaBrake, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 7. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 7 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 8 N.F. LaBrake, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 8. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 8 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 9 W.R. Drake presented the repor t of CMP 9. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 9 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 10

of 473

R.P. Owen presented the repor t of CMP 10. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 10 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 11 R.P. Owen presented the repor t of CMP 11. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 11 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 12 P.L . Hickman presented the repor t of CMP 12. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 12 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 13 P.L . Hickman presented the repor t of CMP 13. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 13 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 14 R.P. Owen presented the repor t of CMP 14. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 14 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 15 CM P 15 M i nu t e I t em: I t was agreed that the Chair of the Correlat ing Commit tee wi l l appoint a Task Group to review correlat ion, conformance with the Standards Counci l direct ion regarding instal lat ion vs. per formance, and the technical substant iat ion for changes in Ar t icle 517 unrelated to the per formance vs. instal lat ion issues with NFPA 99 and the NEC purview. This Task Group wi l l include members from the NFPA 99 Technical Commit tee on Elect r ical Systems, the Health Care Faci l i t ies Correlat ing Commit tee, CMP-15, and the NEC Correlat ing Commit tee. R.P. Owen presented the repor t of CMP 15.

of 473

I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 15 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 16 M.W. Bunker, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 16. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 16 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 17 N.F. LaBrake, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 17. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 17 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 18 N.F. LaBrake, Jr . presented the repor t of CMP 18. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 18 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. Code-M ak i ng Panel 19 R.P. Owen presented the repor t of CMP 19. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t o accept t he Repor t of Code-M ak i ng Panel 19 as amended by t he i den t i f i ed er r at a and t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee's Not es con t ai ned i n At t achmen t A. I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t hat t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee appr oved t he Release of t he Repor t on Pr oposals for t he 2014 NEC.

D. Di scussi on as t o w het her a change i s needed t o Sect i on 4.0, I t em 3 of t he SOPs r elat i ve t o al l ow i ng Publ i c I npu t s (for mer l y Commi t t ee Pr oposals/Commen t s) M.W. Ear ley opened a discussion relat ive to a possible revision to Sect ion 4.0, I tem 3 of the SOPs. M.W. Ear ley advised that the current SOPs do not al low the issuance of a commit tee proposal/comment with any act ion other than “Accept”. Under the new Codes and Standards Processing System, the Correlat ing Commit tee wi l l need to reconsider this pol icy because the new regulat ions al low technical commit tees to float commit tee inputs for publ ic review.

of 473

I t w as moved, seconded, and vot ed unan i mously af f i r mat i ve t hat t he NEC Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee r eaf f i r ms i t posi t i on r elat i ve t o Sect i on 4.0, I t em 3 of t he NEC Supplemen t al Oper at i ng Pr ocedu r es.

I t em 12-4-6, Old Busi ness None at this t ime. I t em 12-4-7, Good of t he Or der

• St at us of Task Gr oup Wor k (J .A. O'Connor )

J.A. O'Connor advised that the Task Group Chart has been updated and that al l of the Task Groups have completed their work up to this point . She wil l update the char t to reflect any Task Group assignments resul t ing from act ions taken dur ing this meet ing.

• Di scussi on of M at t er s for t he Good of t he Code

J.R. Kovacik raised the subject of a somewhat threatening e-mail that was received by a member of the NFPA Elect r ical Department Staff per taining to a Code-Making Panel 2 Proposal. The e-mai l was forwarded to Code-Making Panel 2 shor t ly after the ROP bal lots were sent out . M.W. Ear ley advised that the e-mai l was forwarded to the panel in error .

• Di scussi on of L ocat i ons of Fu t u r e Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee M eet i ngs

The NEC ROC Meet ings wi l l be held at the Crowne Plaza Hotel , Redondo Beach, CA November 28 – December 8, 2012. The NEC Correlat ing Commit tee ROC Meet ing wi l l be held February 18-22, 2013. A discussion took place as to possible locat ions and i t was agreed that Staff wi l l research the fol lowing areas: Long Boat Key, FL; the Beau Rivage Hotel , Bi loxi , MS; Savannah, GA; San Diego, CA; and Scot tsdale, AZ.

• Di scussi on of a Possi ble Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee F i r st Dr af t M eet i ng (for mer l y t he ROP M eet i ng) for NFPA 70E t hat cou ld al so i nclude NFPA 79 and 790/791 t hat ar e i n t he same pr ocessi ng cycle. A t en t at i ve t i mefr ame for t h i s pot en t i al meet i ng i s t he w eek of Oct ober 29, 2012.

A discussion took place relat ive to a possible Correlat ing Commit tee First Draft Meet ing of the Correlat ing Commit tee for NFPA 70E, 79, and 790/791 October 31-November 1, 2012. After discussion, i t was agreed that this meet ing should be held, and that i t could possibly be held in Albuquerque, NM after the October 29-30, 2012 Standards Counci l Meet ing that is being held in Santa Fe, NM. This would ensure that one or more staff members from NFPA Standards Administ rat ion would be there to provide t raining and guidance on the Correlat ing Commit tee por t ion of the new system.

of 473

M.W. Ear ley advised that i t may be more beneficial to hold the meet ing at NFPA Headquarters in Quincy, MA and that dates could be discussed at a future t ime.

• Revi ew and Di scussi on on Pr ocessi ng t he ROP and ROC M at er i al by

t he Cor r elat i ng Commi t t ee

A discussion took place regarding the way in which the Correlat ing Commit tee processes mater ial dur ing their ROP/ROC meet ings. D. L igget t pointed out that i t may be helpful to receive the Review Task Group work pr ior to the meet ing for purposes of individual review. A discussion took place relat ive to providing al l of the work of the Review Task Groups and the members elect ronical ly, i .e., google.doc.

I t em 12-4-8, Ad jou r nmen t The meet ing was adjourned by the Chair , Michael J. Johnston, at 10:40 A.M. on Fr iday, Apr i l 27, 2012.

of 473

Regulations Governing the Development of NFPA Standards – Fall 2013 and all subsequent revision cycles (excerpts pertaining to Correlating Committee and First Draft actions) 3.4 Organization and Responsibilities of Correlating Committees. 3.4.1 Organization. If the Standards Council determines that a standards development activity is of such magnitude or breadth, or for other appropriate reasons requires that a group manage and coordinate the activities of a number of Technical Committees, the Standards Council may appoint a Correlating Committee. The number of Members and the interests from which they are selected shall be determined by the Standards Council. 3.4.2 Authority. A Correlating Committee shall direct the activities of the Technical Committees that have primary responsibility for the development and revision of NFPA Standards assigned to them. The Correlating Committee shall be responsible for resolving conflicts, achieving correlation among the recommendations of the Technical Committees, correcting errors and omissions, and ensuring that the Committee activities have been conducted in accordance with these Regulations and any approved Supplemental Operating Procedures (see 3.3.8). The Correlating Committee shall have the authority to choose between alternatives presented by the Technical Committees and to write text, but only as necessary for correlation, consistency, and the correction of errors and omissions. 3.4.3 Responsibilities. The responsibilities of a Correlating Committee are: (a) Resolving conflicts within or between NFPA Standards (b) Recommending the resolution of conflicts between overlapping functions in Technical Committee Scopes (c) Recommending the establishment of new or the discharging of existing Technical Committees and proposing new Scopes or changes to existing Scopes of Technical Committees (d) Recommending changes in membership to obtain or improve representation on a Technical Committee (e) Correlating the scheduling of the Reports from the Technical Committees operating under its responsibility (f) Notifying a Technical Committee of its failure to comply with these Regulations or the Manual of Style for NFPA Technical Committee Documents (g) Determining whether the Technical Committee has given due consideration to all evidence presented to it in connection with the preparation of its Report, including all comments relating to negative votes (h) Establishing Supplemental Operating Procedures, if desired (see 3.3.8) (i) Performing such other or different duties as the Standards Council may from time to time assign 4.3.11 Correlating Committee Review and Action on Public Input and the First Draft. 4.3.11.1 Review and Permitted Activity. Where Technical Committee activities are managed and coordinated by a Correlating Committee, the Correlating Committee shall review the First Draft as Balloted by the Technical Committees under its responsibility and take appropriate action within the limits of its authority and responsibility as set forth in 3.4.2 and 3.4.3, in the form of Correlating Notes and Correlating Revisions. 4.3.11.2 Correlating Notes. In reviewing the First Draft, Correlating Committee action shall generally take the form of Correlating Notes that provide clarification and other appropriate information or that direct the responsible Technical Committee(s) to reconsider Public Input, Committee Input, or Correlating Input, conduct further review, or take further action during the

of 473

preparation of the Second Draft. 4.3.11.2.1 Correlating Notes that pass Ballot shall be published in the First Draft Report and shall be linked to the part of the First Draft to which it relates. Correlating Notes shall be processed in accordance with 4.4.7 during the Comment Stage. Correlating Notes shall be supported by at least a simple majority of the Meeting Vote for preliminary approval and shall be subject to final approval through a Ballot (see 4.3.11.3). 4.3.11.3 Correlating Revisions. Where early action to promote correlation and consistency of the NFPA Standard is warranted, the Correlating Committee may also revise the First Draft by creating First Correlating Revisions, with associated Correlating Statements that delete or modify First Revisions or other text in the First Draft. To the extent that a First Correlating Revision modifies or deletes a First Revision or any portion of the First Revision, the original text of the First Revision, or affected portion thereof, shall be redesignated as a Committee Input and shall be published in the Input section of the First Draft Report along with a note indicating that the text contained in the Committee Input has been modified or deleted from the First Draft as a result of First Correlating Revision. 4.3.11.3.1 Size and Content of First Correlating Revisions. (a) An individual Correlating Revision can contain multiple changes to the Standard text, provided that these changes are contained within a contiguous portion of the Standard that is no smaller than an individual numbered or lettered section or larger than a chapter. (b) Exception for Global Revisions. Where the Correlating Committee wishes to revise a term or phrase throughout an NFPA Standard so as to achieve editorial consistency or correlation, the Committee may do so through a single Global Revision that applies the change throughout the NFPA Standard. 4.3.11.3.2 First Correlating Revisions shall be supported by at least a simple majority of the Meeting Vote for preliminary approval and shall be subject to final approval through a Ballot (see 4.3.11.3). 4.3.11.4 Preparation of First Draft for Balloting. 4.3.11.4.1 When the Correlating Committee has completed its work, NFPA Staff shall prepare the complete First Draft showing individual First Correlating Revisions and their associated Committee Statements for Balloting. 4.3.11.4.2 Prior to the Ballot, the First Draft and individual First Correlating Revisions shall be reviewed by NFPA Staff for editorial consistency and conformance with the Manual of Style for NFPA Technical Committee Documents and any required editorial changes shall be incorporated into the text of the First Draft and individual First Correlating Revisions Prior to Balloting. 4.3.11.4.3 If, in the course of editorial review, NFPA Staff make an editorial change to text that is not part of a First Correlating Revision, Staff may, if Correlating Committee review is deemed advisable, designate the affected text as a First Correlating Revision. A notice shall be attached to such a Revision indicating that it was developed by Staff for editorial purposes. 4.3.11.5 Correlating Committee Ballot on First Draft. 4.3.11.5.1 Balloting on Correlating Notes. (a) Any proposed Correlating Notes on the First Draft shall be submitted to a Ballot of the Correlating Committee. Approval of Correlating Notes shall be established by a three-fourths affirmative vote of the Correlating Committee. Negative votes or abstentions on specific Correlating Notes shall include the reasons for such votes. (b) Only proposed Correlating Notes that are approved by the Correlating Committee Ballot shall become Correlating Notes and be published in the First Draft Report. Correlating Notes that fail Ballot shall not be published. (c) For approved Correlating Notes, a ballot statement as indicated in 3.3.4.3(d) shall be published with its associated Correlating Notes in the First Draft Report.

of 473

4.3.11.5.2 Balloting on First Correlating Revisions. (a) Any proposed First Correlating Revisions taken on the First Draft shall be submitted to a Ballot of the Correlating Committee. Approval of First Correlating Revisions shall be established by a three-fourths affirmative vote of the Correlating Committee. Negative votes or abstentions on specific First Correlating Revisions shall include the reasons for such votes. (b) Only proposed First Correlating Revisions that are approved by the Correlating Committee Ballot shall become First Correlating Revisions and be published in the First Draft Report. First Correlating Revisions that fail Ballot shall not be published. (c) For approved First Correlating Revisions, a ballot statement as indicated in 3.3.4.3(d) shall be published with their associated First Correlating Revisions in the First Draft Report. (d) Treatment of Global Revisions. Global Revisions are balloted in the same manner as other Revisions, and a Global Revision that passes Ballot is applied, as directed, throughout the Standard, independently of the results of balloting on other Revisions. 4.4.7 Technical Consideration and Action on Correlating Notes. The Technical Committee shall consider all Correlating Notes and develop a Committee Statement that provides a response. Where the Technical Committee wishes to address the Correlating Note through a change to the text, it shall develop corresponding Second Revisions. Committee Statements, in response to Correlating Notes, shall be supported by at least a simple majority of the Meeting Vote and shall not be subject to Ballot.

of 473

NFPA CORRELATING COMMITTEE

FIRST DRAFT ACTIONS

All Correlating Committee (CC) actions must comply with the Regulations Governing the Development of NFPA Standards (3.4). During the First Draft stage, the following Correlating Committee Actions are permitted:

Correlating Committee Input (CCI): Similar to a Public Input (PI), CCI must be submitted prior to the PI closing date. Not applicable at First Draft (FD) or Second Draft (SD) meetings. (Regs 4.3.3.1.)

Correlating Note (CN): Direction to a Technical Committee (TC) to reconsider a FR, PI, CI or CCI. (See Regs 4.3.11.2). CNs are balloted and appear in the FD Report if they pass ballot.

First Correlating Revision (FCR): Used to delete or modify FRs or to generate the equivalent of a new FR. FCRs must include a statement to support the change. An FR from the TC that is affected by a FCR converts to a CI. (Regs 4.3.11.3) FCRs are balloted and appear in the FD Report if they pass ballot.

Sample Correlating Committee Notes and Revisions:

CODE SECTION CORRELATING COMMITTEE (CC) ACTION AFFECTS

Entire Document Add FCR as follows: Globally replace the word “rubbish” with the word “waste”. CCS: Various First Revisions make the change only in certain locations within the Code. The word change needs to be made globally for consistency.

2.3.6 ASTM Standards

Add CN as follows: The committee is directed to delete reference to ASTM E 2074 as the standard has been withdrawn and NFPA 252 is an equivalent test method.

FR105

3.3.21.2.2 Net Floor Area

Add CN as follows: The committee is directed to review the text and clarify the meaning. The proposed definition is confusing and should be more clearly worded.

FR108

of 473

12.1.4.2 3.3.263.1

1. Add CN as follows (changing a FR to CI): FR1023 has been changed to a Committee Input (CI) because FCR1 adds the definition in Chapter 3. FCR2 places a reference to the Chapter 3 definition in 12.1.4.2.

. 2. Add FCR1 as follows:

. 3.3.263.1 Aisle Stair. A stair within a seating area of an assembly occupancy that directly serves rows of seats to the side of the stair, including transition stairs that connect to an aisle or a landing. CCS: The definition is consistent with related changes made in Chapter12. The definition belongs in Chapter 3 because it is used throughout the code and has been removed from Chapter 12 via FCR2.

. 3. Add FCR2 as follows:

. 12.1.4.2* Special Definitions. A The following is a list of special terms used in this chapter follows: (1) Aisle Accessway. See 3.3.11. (2) Aisle Stair. See 3.3.263.1. CCS: FCR1 added the definition in Chapter 3.

FR1023

of 473

Chairman’s Report for the TC on Electrical Safety in the Workplace,

70E, First Draft Meeting

Signature

1) Date(s) and location of meeting: August 20 – 24, 2012, Denver, CO.

2) List names of guests in attendance: See attached.

3) List names of guests addressing the Panel/TC, the subject of their address, and the length of time they spoke: Daniel Roberts, speaking on behalf of the Hazard/Risk Terminology Task Group, 15 minutes. Steve McClur, speaking on behalf of the IEEE Battery Committee, 5 minutes.

4) Number of Pubic Inputs acted upon: About 450

5) Number of First Revisions created: About 150

6) List any Task Groups appointed to work subsequent to the First Draft Meeting, along with the names of members of the Task Group(s): none

7) List any request contained in a Responses or Statement that require NEC Correlating Committee attention: FR-14 involves the document scope (Sec. 90.2), and needs to be addressed by the NEC Correlating Committee. FR-24 involves definition of “Qualified Person,” and the committee requests reconsidering the committee jurisdiction for this definition.

of 473

8) List any Public Inputs or First Revisions, in your opinion that needs to be referred to another TC for information or correlation: none

9) List any Public Inputs or First Revisions that should be referred to the Toxicity Advisory Committee: none

10) List all Public Inputs or First Revisions related to combustibles in plenums or other air handling spaces: none

11) Identify any issues that should be brought to the attention of the NFPA Research Foundation for their input and assistance: none

12) List any general requests for information or assistance from the NEC Correlating Committee: It is recommended that the TC for Electrical Safety in the Workplace have responsibility for the term “exposed”. There are presently two definitions of “exposed” in both NFPA 70 and 70E. Exposed (as applied to wiring methods) is extracted from NFPA 70 for use in 70E. Exposed (as applied to energized electrical conductors or circuit parts) is modified in 70E to include reference to “electrical conductors or circuit parts.” The phrase “electrical conductors or circuit parts” is used throughout 70E to provide additional clarity, especially when needing to describe approach boundaries for protection against electric shock and incident energy.

13) Provide any additional information that you feel would be helpful to the NEC Correlating Committee, staff, or to the process in general: The 70E technical committee has provided NFPA with suggestions for TerraView software from our experiences with first using this software at our First Draft Meeting. See Appendix B.

of 473

Appendix A

Guests in Attendance

of 473

of 473

Appendix B

Suggestions for TerraView from the 70E First Draft Meeting

1) Larger font would be very helpful. Having the screen available on Live Meeting helped, but the refresh rate was rather slow.

2) A simple search tool on each Terra page that could search quickly for a PI number or FR number at any time would be good to have available. Also, perhaps the software could provide instant access to statements for FR’s and PI’s that have been resolved.

3) Many PIs were not properly associated with the section or section sub-division that they applied to. This was probably a result of the submitter not using the on-line submission process, and not properly identifying where the recommendation was to fit-in. With this new process it is important that PIs be properly associated with the section they apply to, and separate PIs should be made where recommended changes affect more than one section or non-contiguous parts of very long sections. Global revisions should be limited to truly “global changes.” If possible we should move to only permit online submissions to eliminate this problem, or have staff review and relocate paper PI’s to their correct section.

4) It would be helpful if more than one PI could be merged into an FR (e.g. accepting two or more PIs for one FR). One method might be to highlight at the meeting the part(s) of each PI that is being accepted, and then have only that part of the PI merged into the FR revision. Another approach might be to have Terra identify were multiple PIs try to revise or add some wording in different manners. For example, Terra could highlight those conflicting changes in a different color (e.g. red versus yellow). It would also be extremely helpful to have immediately access “associated” PI’s. We found that in many cases there were four or five PI’s that each had desired revisions, but we could only start with one and then watch as the chair read to staff the additional changes to be included.

5) It would be nice to have the on-line submission for a submitter’s substantiation formatted in a consistent way that it could easily be constructed into a Committee Statement should the committee choose to accept the FR recommendation. For example, the submitter could have a required check list of required substantiation information; e.g. a) what is being revised, b) why is this revision needed, c) is the revision editorial or technical in nature, d) does the revision involve just clarity and usability, or is there an important safety feature that needs to be addressed, e) if the recommend revision is for clarity, what is not clear or confusing with the present language? From this, Terra may be able to suggest a well-

of 473

constructed and uniform Committee Statement for the committee to start with. (Currently, using the submitter’s substantiation to start with was not much help in most cases, or very cumbersome at best).

6) A library of “standard Committee Statements”, plus the ability to add additional statements to this library by the Committee would be very useful to have. These statements could then be simply copied and pasted into the PI or FR as needed. (At our meeting we called this concept our “crash cart”). This could also help in consistent wording between Committee Statements.

7) A form Word Document that committee members and task groups could use whereby revisions and committee statements could easily be copied into an FR or Committee Statement would be nice to have. This would also be helpful to staff in that they would have a uniform Word Document to work from. Another option might be to have an “unofficial” version of TerraView that mimics the version that NFPA staff edit. The task groups could use the unofficial version to input the work of the task group, and then the staff member inputting the committee actions could pull the task group’s draft work into the official TerraView version.

8) It would be nice to have an on-the-fly version of the First Draft revisions as they are being created available for the Committee to see on their own. That way errors or omissions could be noted by members to the entire Committee and staff in real time.

9) Our Committee had several task groups, and all individual work was done in Word documents. The committee relied heavily on this work. Switching from Terra to Word and back again was time consuming. Perhaps the staff liaison could have an additional monitor and work from two screens. A simple move of the mouse would go from Terra to Word and back again.

10) The Terra system does work well when there is a need to restructure sections or subdivisions. We are forced in some cases to put multiple significant revisions in a single FR.

11) When a vote is taken, the committee cannot see all the important information at the same time on the screen. The screen should contain the section number, The FR number, the PI upon which it is based (if there is one) and all associated PI’s. When in this screen, staff should be able to click on any associated PI for committee review before the vote is taken.

12) We need to add other options to the menu for PI’s: a) we should be able to simply develop a committee FR independent

of all PI’s, b) we should have a button to develop an FR, based on a given PI, c) we should have an “associate” button for PI’s (clarity),

of 473

d) we should keep the “resolve” button for only those PI’s that are essentially rejected.

of 473

First Revision No. 10-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Global Input ]

Change "harm" to "injury or damage to health" throughout Informative Annex F.

Submitter Information Verification

Submitter Full Name: [ Not Specified ]

Organization: [ Not Specified ]

Submittal Date: Mon Aug 20 13:24:54 EDT 2012

Committee Statement and Meeting Notes

CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “harm” to “injury or damage to health” throughout Informative Annex F to provide clarityto users of the document and to ensure a consistent use of the term throughout Informative Annex F.

ResponseMessage:

FR-10-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 153-NFPA 70E-2012 [Global Input]


Change "work shoes" to "footwear"






CommitteeStatement:

Consistent use of terminology within the document and with other referenced standards that address safetyfootwear such as the ASTM family of standards.

ResponseMessage:

FR-11-NFPA 70E-2012. The change meets the intent of the submitter.


of 473

11/9/12 TerraView™

2/170submittals.nfpa.org/TerraViewWeb/ViewerPage.jsp


The title of ASTM F1506 was changed in the last 70E revision in table 130.7(C)14 to add the words "and ArcRated" to be as shown below:

Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel for Use byElectrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards

Change title in Chapter 1 and Annexes whereever this standard is listed as a reference.

Submitted on behalf of ASTM F18






CommitteeStatement:

The committee agrees that the title to ASTM F1506 title was changed in Table 130.7(C) 14 but not carriedthroughout the document. The phrase “Flame Resistant and Arc Rated” will be added in the two places noted.

ResponseMessage:

FR-12-NFPA 70E-2012



Revise the title in 110.4 to read as follows "Use of Electrical Equipment".




Submittal Date: Tue Aug 21 17:17:52 EDT 2012


Committee Statement: This first revision to the title of 110.4 provides clarity to the section.

Response Message: FR-48-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 336-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.4]

of 473




Change "arc flash hazard analysis" to "arc flash risk assessment" throughout this Standard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “arc flash hazard analysis” to “arc flash risk assessment” throughout the document toprovide clarity to users of the document, to ensure consistent use of the term throughout the document, and toprovide consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazards and risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-5-NFPA 70E-2012


Public Input No. 81-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.5(B)]


Move existing 110.1 to 110.3 and move existing 110.3 to 110.1.






Committee Statement: This change will improve the usability of the article.


of 473




Change "shock hazard analysis" to "shock risk assessment"throughout this Standard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “shock hazard analysis” to “shock risk assessment” throughout the document toprovide clarity to users of the document, to ensure consistent use of the term throughout the document, and toprovide consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazards and risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-6-NFPA 70E-2012



Modify title of 120.2 to read:

De-energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts Electrical Equipment That Has Lockout/Tagout DevicesApplied




Submittal Date: Wed Aug 22 09:57:16 EDT 2012


Committee Statement: The change in title clarifies the intent of the section.



of 473




Change "electrical hazard analysis" to "electrical hazard risk assessment" throughout the Standard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “electrical hazard analysis” to “electrical hazard risk assessment” throughout thedocument to provide clarity to users of the document, to ensure consistent use of the term throughout thedocument, and to provide consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazards and risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-7-NFPA 70E-2012



Change "hazard/risk category" to "arc flash PPE category" throughout the Standard.

Change "hazard/risk categories" to "arc flash PPE categories" throughout the Standard.

Delete all references to "HRC" throughout the Standard.






CommitteeStatement:

The intent of this revision is to provide consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazardsand risk, and with the proposed definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessment. As defined in most standards,hazard identification is a component of risk assessment. This revision will also provide guidance for future revisionsof the Standard. This revision reflects what the category number relates to: a list of arc flash PPE. Many users ofthe document currently refer to a “hazard/risk category number” as a “category number.” This revision will permitthe continuance of this practice.

ResponseMessage:

FR-70-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




Change "hazard identification and risk assessment" to "risk assessment" throughout the Standard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “hazard identification and risk assessment” to “risk assessment” throughout thedocument to provide clarity to users of the document, to ensure consistent use of the term throughout thedocument, and to provide consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazards and risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-8-NFPA 70E-2012



Revise the title to 130.4 as follows:

130.4 Approach Boundaries to Energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts for Shock Protection.




Submittal Date: Thu Aug 23 12:39:46 EDT 2012


Committee Statement: This enhances the clarity and usability of the section by adding “shock” to the title.




of 473




Change "probability" to "likelihood" throughout Annex F except in the second sentence of F.2.4.2 were theword "probability" has been changed to the word "possibility" as part of FR-140-NFPA 70E-2012.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has changed “probability” to “likelihood” throughout Informative Annex F to provide clarity to users ofthe document and to ensure a consistent use of the term throughout Informative Annex F. The term “probability” isoften narrowly interpreted as a mathematical term, therefore, in risk terminology; “likelihood” should be used.Likelihood can refer to the chance of something happening, whether defined, measured or determined objectively orsubjectively, qualitatively or quantitatively, and described using general terms or mathematically. Likelihoodincludes a probability or a frequency over a given time period.

ResponseMessage:

FR-9-NFPA 70E-2012


First Revision No. 14-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 90.2 ]

90.2 Scope.

(A) Covered.

This standard addresses electrical safety-related work practices, safety-related maintenance requirements, andother administrative controls for employee workplaces that are necessary for the practical safeguarding ofemployees relative to the hazards associated with electrical energy during activities such as the installation,inspection, operation, maintenance, and demolition of electric conductors, electric equipment, signaling andcommunications conductors and equipment, and raceways. This standard also includes safe work practices foremployees performing other work activities that can expose them to electrical hazards as well as safe workpractices for the following:

(1) Installation of conductors and equipment that connect to the supply of electricity

(2) Installations used by the electric utility, such as office buildings, warehouses, garages, machine shops,and recreational buildings, that are not an integral part of a generating plant, substation, or control center

of 473



Informational Note: This standard addresses safety of workers whose job responsibilities entailinteraction with electrical equipment and systems with potentional exposure to energized electricalequipment and circuit parts. Concepts in this standard are often adapted to other workers whoseexposure to electrical hazards is unintentional or not recognized as part of their job responsibilities. The highest risk for injury from electrical hazards for other workers involve unintentional contact withoverhead power lines and electric shock from machines, tools, and appliances.

(B) Not Covered.

This standard does not cover safety-related work practices for the following:

(1) Installations in ships, watercraft other than floating buildings, railway rolling stock, aircraft, or automotivevehicles other than mobile homes and recreational vehicles

(2) Installations

underground in mines and self-propelled mobile surface mining machinery and its attendant electrical trailingcable

(3) Installations of railways for generation, transformation, transmission, or distribution of power usedexclusively for operation of rolling stock or installations used exclusively for signaling and communicationspurposes

(4) Installations of communications equipment under the exclusive control of communications utilities locatedoutdoors or in building spaces used exclusively for such installations

(5) Installations under the exclusive control of an electric utility where such installations:

(6) (a) Consist of service drops or service laterals, and associated metering, or

(7) Are located in legally established easements or rights-of-way designated by or recognized by publicservice commissions, utility commissions, or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for suchinstallations, or

(8) Are on property owned or leased by the electric utility for the purpose of communications, metering,generation, control, transformation, transmission, or distribution of electric energy, or

(9) Are located by other written agreements either designated by or recognized by public servicecommissions, utility commission, or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for suchinstallations. These written agreements shall be limited to installations for the purpose ofcommunications, metering, generation, control, transformation, transmission, or distribution ofelectric energy where legally established easements or rights-of-way cannot be obtained. Theseinstallations shall be limited to federal lands, Native American reservations through the U.S.Department of the Interior Bureau of Indian Affairs, military bases, lands controlled by port authoritiesand state agencies and departments, and lands owned by railroads.

(10) Are located by other written agreements either designated by or recognized by public servicecommissions, utility commission, or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction for suchinstallations. These written agreements shall be limited to installations for the purpose ofcommunications, metering, generation, control, transformation, transmission, or distribution ofelectric energy where legally established easements or rights-of-way cannot be obtained. Theseinstallations shall be limited to federal lands, Native American reservations through the U.S.Department of the Interior Bureau of Indian Affairs, military bases, lands controlled by port authoritiesand state agencies and departments, and lands owned by railroads.






The intent of this revision is to clarify the intent of placing safety related maintenance requirements and otheradministrative controls including training and auditing on par with safety–related work practices. Based on analysisof OSHA and workers’ compensation claim data, approximately one half of electrical fatalities and injuries involveelectrical workers. The new informational note is intended to alert employers that the electrical safety program must

also address other workers. The intent of this revision is to provide awareness that strict application of this standard of 473



CommitteeStatement:

also address other workers. The intent of this revision is to provide awareness that strict application of this standard

within the existing scope may overlook risk to other workers in the covered installations. The committeeunderstands that the Mine Safety and Health Administration has informally endorsed the application of NFPA 70Eas “Arc Flash Accident Prevention Best Practices.” The committee understands that the correlating committee haspurview over scope statements.

ResponseMessage:

FR-14-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 354-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 90.2(A)]


First Revision No. 132-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Sections 90.3, 90.4 ]

Sections 90.3, 90.4

90.3 Standard Arrangement.

This standard is divided into the introduction and three chapters, as shown in Figure 90.3 . Chapter 1 appliesgenerally for safety-related work practices; Chapter 3 supplements or modifies Chapter 1 with safetyrequirements for special equipment.

Chapter 2 applies to safety-related maintenance requirements for electrical equipment and installations inworkplaces; and Chapter 3 supplements or modifies Chapter 1 with safety requirements for special equipment .

Annexes Informative annexes are not part of the requirements of this standard but are included for informationalpurposes only.

Figure 90.3 Standard Arrangement.

of 473



90.4 Organization.

This standard is divided into the following 3 chapters and 16 annexes:

(1) Chapter 1, Safety-Related Work Practices

(2) Chapter 2, Safety-Related Maintenance Requirements

(3) Chapter 3, Safety Requirements for Special Equipment

(4) Informative Annex A, Referenced Publications

(5) Informative Annex B, Informational References

(6) Informative Annex C, Limits of Approach

(7) Informative Annex D, Incident Energy and Arc Flash Boundary Calculation Methods

(8) Informative Annex E, Electrical Safety Program

(9) Informative Annex F, Hazard Analysis, Risk Estimation, and Risk Evaluation Risk Assessment Procedure

(10) Informative Annex G, Sample Lockout/Tagout Procedure

(11) Informative Annex H, Guidance on Selection of Protective Clothing and Other Personal ProtectiveEquipment

(12) Informative Annex I, Job Briefing and Planning Checklist

(13) Informative Annex J, Energized Electrical Work Permit

(14) Informative Annex K, General Categories of Electrical Hazards

(15) Informative Annex L, Typical Application of Safeguards in the Cell Line Working Zone

(16) Informative Annex M, Layering of Protective Clothing and Total System Arc Rating

(17) Informative Annex N, Example Industrial Procedures and Policies for Working Near Overhead ElectricalLines and Equipment

(18) Informative Annex O, Safety-Related Design Requirements

(19) Informative Annex P, Aligning Implementation of This Standard with Occupational Health and SafetyManagement Standards




Submittal Date: Fri Aug 24 13:42:24 EDT 2012


CommitteeStatement:

The revision is made to clarify that Annex A is an Informative Annex and the revision is made to beconsistent with FR-131 NFPA 70E-2012.

ResponseMessage:

FR-132-NFPA 70E-2012

Committee Notes:

Date Submitted By

Aug 24,2012

[ Not Specified ] The committee intends Annex A to be an Informative Annex.

of 473



First Revision No. 23-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Incident Energy Analysis. ]

Incident Energy Analysis.

A component of an arc flash hazard analysis risk assessment used to predict the incident energy of an arc flashfor a specified set of conditions.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee replaces the phrase "hazard analysis" with "risk assessment" to provide clarity to the user of thedocument and to maintain consistency between NFPA 70E and other standards that address hazards and risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-23-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 145-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Incident Energy Analysis.]

First Revision No. 15-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. ]

Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

A study investigating a worker’s potential exposure to arc flash energy, conducted for the purpose of injuryprevention and the determination of safe work practices, arc flash boundary, and the appropriate levels of personalprotective equipment (PPE).






CommitteeStatement:

The term no longer exists in the standard. The committee deleted the definition as it will no longer be required dueto a global replacement of "hazard analysis" with "risk assessment”. The substance and intent of the definition willbe captured by the definitions of two terms: • Arc Flash Hazard (currently defined) • Risk Assessment (new termand definition) A separate First Revision replaced the term “arc flash hazard analysis” with “arc flash riskassessment”. See FR-5-NFPA 70E-2012.

ResponseMessage:

FR-15-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 140-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.]

of 473



First Revision No. 16-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Arc Rating. ]

Arc Rating.

The value attributed to materials that describes their performance to exposure to an electrical arc discharge. The

arc rating is expressed in cal/cm2 and is derived from the determined value of the arc thermal performance value(ATPV) or energy of breakopen threshold (EBT) (should a material system exhibit a breakopen response below

the ATPV value). Arc rating is reported as either ATPV or EBT, whichever is the lower value.

Informational Note No. 1: Arc-rated clothing or equipment indicates that it has been tested for exposureto an electric arc. Flame-Resistant (FR) resistant clothing without an arc rating has not been tested forexposure to an electric arc. All arc-rated clothing is also flame-resistant.

Informational Note No. 2: Breakopen is a material response evidenced by the formation of one or moreholes in the innermost layer of arc-rated material that would allow flame to pass through the material.

Informational Note No. 3: ATPV is defined in ASTM F 1959-06 , Standard Test Method for Determining

the Arc Thermal Performance Value of Material for Clothing as the incident energy (cal/cm 2 ) on amaterial or a multi-layer system of materials that results in a 50 percent probability that sufficient heattransfer through the tested specimen is predicted to cause the onset of a second degree skin burn injury

based on the Stoll curve, cal/cm 2 .

Informational Note No. 4: EBT is defined in ASTM F 1959-06 , Standard Test Method for Determining the

Arc Thermal Performance Value of Material for Clothing as the incident energy (cal/cm 2 ) on a materialor a material system that results in a 50 percent probability of breakopen. Breakopen is defined as a hole

with an area of 1.6 cm2 (0.5 in2) or an opening of 2.5 cm (1.0 in.) in any dimension.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity to users of the document and will ensure a consistent use of the termthroughout the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-16-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 454-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Arc Rating.]

of 473



First Revision No. 17-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Balaclava (Sock Hood). ]

Balaclava (Sock Hood).

An arc-rated hood that protects the neck and head except for the facial area of the eyes and nose .






CommitteeStatement:

The committee deletes the phrase “and nose” at the end of the definition. There is no reason to leave the noseexposed. The eyes are protected by safety glasses or goggles.

ResponseMessage:

FR-17-NFPA 70E-2012


Public Input No. 59-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Balaclava (Sock Hood).]

First Revision No. 168-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Bare-Hand Work. ]

Bare-Hand Work.

A technique of performing work on energized electrical conductors or circuit parts, after the employee has beenraised to the potential of the conductor or circuit part.






Committee Statement: Bare-hand work is utility type system type line work and is more appropriate in other standards.


of 473



First Revision No. 18-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Barricade. ]

Barricade.

A physical obstruction such as tapes, cones, or A-frame-type wood or metal structures intended to provide awarning about and to limit access to a hazardous area .






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and accuracy. A barricade limits access to more than just ahazardous area.


Public Input No. 141-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Barricade.]

First Revision No. 121-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Boundary, Prohibited Approach. ]

Boundary, Prohibited Approach.

An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which workis considered the same as making contact with the electrical conductor or circuit part.






CommitteeStatement:

The requirement for using shock protective equipment typically begins at the restricted approach boundary. Noadditional protective equipment is required when crossing the prohibited approach boundary. Previous changes thatused the limited approach boundary or arc flash boundary for "triggering" requirements have made the use of thisterm unnecessary.

ResponseMessage:

FR-121-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473

First Revision No. 19-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Boundary, Restricted Approach. ]

Boundary, Restricted Approach.

An approach limit at a distance from an exposed energized electrical conductor or circuit part within which thereis an increased risk increased likelihood of shock electric shock , due to electrical arc-over combined withinadvertent movement, for personnel working in close proximity to the energized electrical conductor or circuitpart.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity: the context indicates that what is referred to is likelihood of an electricshock, which is just one component of risk.

ResponseMessage:

FR-19-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 142-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Boundary, Restricted Approach.]

First Revision No. 26-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Device. ]

Device.

A unit of an electrical system, other than a conductor, that carries or controls electric energy as its principalfunction. [70, 2011 2014 ]






CommitteeStatement:

The committee makes this first revision to correlate this standard with proposed changes in the 2014NEC ROP.


of 473

First Revision No. 20-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Enclosure. ]

Enclosure.

The case or housing of apparatus , or the fence or walls surrounding an installation to prevent personnel fromaccidentally contacting energized electrical conductors or circuit parts or to protect the equipment from physicaldamage. [ 70, 2011]






CommitteeStatement:

The revision improves usability, clarity, and consistency. Throughout the standard, the correct term is"energized conductors or circuit parts" and not "energized parts".

ResponseMessage:

FR-20-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 285-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Enclosure.]

First Revision No. 21-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Energized. ]

Energized Electrical Work Permit. Authorization to perform work on equipment that has not been placed in anelectrically safe work condition.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee adds definition for the term “energized electrical work permit” to provide clarity to users of thedocument. It helps to differentiate an “energized electrical work permit” from other types of permits.

ResponseMessage:

FR-21-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 35-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Energized.]

of 473



First Revision No. 27-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Equipment. ]

Equipment.

A general term, including material, fittings, devices, appliances, luminaires, apparatus, machinery, and the like,used as a part of, or in connection with, an electrical installation. [ 70, 2011 2014 ]






CommitteeStatement:



First Revision No. 28-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Grounding Conductor, Equipment

(EGC). ]

Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC).

The conductive path installed to connect (s) that provides a ground-fault current path and connects normallynon–current-carrying metal parts of equipment together and to the system grounded conductor or to thegrounding electrode conductor, or both. [ 70, 2011 2014 ]

Informational Note No. 1: It is recognized that the equipment grounding conductor also performs bonding.

Informational Note No. 2: See NFPA 70, 250.118, for a list of acceptable equipment groundingconductors.






CommitteeStatement:



of 473



First Revision No. 1-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Guarded. ]

Hazard.

A source of possible injury or damage to health.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee adds definition for the term “hazard” to provide clarity to users of the document. Adding of adefinition also enables a comparison of the use of the term to ensure consistent use of terminology throughout thedocument, and for future revisions of the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-1-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 143-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Guarded.]

First Revision No. 2-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Guarded. ]

Hazardous.

Involving exposure to at least one hazard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee adds definition for the term “hazardous” to provide clarity to users of the document. Adding of adefinition also enables a comparison of the use of the term to ensure consistent use of terminology throughout thedocument, and for future revisions of the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-2-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 144-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Guarded.]

of 473



First Revision No. 22-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Incident Energy. ]

Incident Energy.

The amount of thermal energy impressed on a surface, a certain distance from the source, generated during anelectrical arc event. One of the units used to measure incident Incident energy is typically expressed in calories

per centimeter squared square centimeters (cal/cm2).






CommitteeStatement:

Incident energy calculations are based on thermal energy only and are typically expressed in calories percentimeter squared. Adding this word will provide clarity that the incident energy calculation is only based on thethermal energy.

ResponseMessage:

FR-22-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 377-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Incident Energy.]

First Revision No. 29-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Luminaire. ]

Luminaire.

A complete lighting unit consisting of a light source such as a lamp or lamps, together with the parts designed todistribute position the light source , to position and protect the lamps and ballast (where applicable), and toconnect the lamps connect it to the power supply. It may also include parts to protect the light source or theballast or to distribute the light. A lampholder is not a luminaire. [70, 2011 2014 ]






CommitteeStatement:



of 473



First Revision No. 24-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Qualified Person. ]

Qualified Person.

One who has demonstrated skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of the electricalequipment and installations and has received safety training to recognize identify and avoid the hazards involved.[ 70, 2011]






CommitteeStatement:

The committee makes this first revision to the definition of "Qualified Person" to clarify and promote the consistentuse throughout the document of terminology associated with hazard and risk. The committee asks the NECcorrelating committee to reconsider the committee jurisdiction for this definition.

ResponseMessage:

FR-24-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 154-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Qualified Person.]

Public Input No. 339-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Qualified Person.]

First Revision No. 30-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Raceway. ]

Raceway.

An enclosed channel of metal or nonmetallic materials designed expressly for holding wires, cables, or busbars,with additional functions as permitted in this standard. Raceways include, but are not limited to, rigid metalconduit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, intermediate metal conduit, liquidtight flexible conduit, flexible metallic tubing,flexible metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, electrical nonmetallic tubing, underfloor raceways, cellularconcrete floor raceways, cellular metal floor raceways, surface raceways, wireways, and busways. [70, 20112014 ]






CommitteeStatement:



of 473



First Revision No. 3-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Receptacle. ]

Risk.

A combination of the likelihood of occurrence of injury or damage to health and the severity of injury or damage to healththat results from a hazard.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee adds definition for the term “risk” to provide clarity to users of the document. Adding of a definitionalso enables a comparison of the use of the term to ensure consistent use of terminology throughout thedocument, and for future revisions of the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-3-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 155-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Receptacle.]

First Revision No. 4-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Receptacle. ]

Risk Assessment.

An overall process that identifies hazards, estimates the potential severity of injury or damage to health, estimates thelikelihood of occurrence of injury or damage to health, and determines if protective measures are required.

Informational Note: As used in this standard, arc flash risk assessment and shock risk assessment are types of riskassessments.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee adds definition for the term “risk assessment” to provide clarity to users of the document. Adding ofa definition also enables a comparison of the use of the term to ensure consistent use of terminology throughoutthe document, and for future revisions of the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-4-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 156-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Receptacle.]

of 473



First Revision No. 31-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Service Point. ]

Service Point.

The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring. [70, 2011] 2014]

Informational Note: The service point can be described as the point of demarcation between where the servingutility ends and the premises wiring begins. The serving utility generally specifies the location of the service pointbased on the conditions of service.






CommitteeStatement:



First Revision No. 25-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Ventilated. ]

Ventilated.

Provided with a means to permit circulation of air sufficient to remove an excess of heat, fumes, or vapors. [ 70,2011]






CommitteeStatement:

The term "Ventilated" no longer appears in the 2012 edition of NFPA 70E. The committee deletes this termbecause its inclusion violates section 2.2.2.1 of the NEC Style Manual (2011).

ResponseMessage:

FR-25-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 458-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (100): Ventilated.]

of 473



First Revision No. 32-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (100): Voltage, Nominal. ]

Voltage, Nominal.

A nominal value assigned to a circuit or system for the purpose of conveniently designating its voltage class (e.g.,120/240 volts, 480Y/277 volts, 600 volts). [ 70, 2014]

Informational Note No. 1: The actual voltage at which a circuit operates can vary from the nominal within arange that permits satisfactory operation of equipment.

[ 70, 2011]

Informational Note No. 2 : See ANSI/IEEE C84.1

-2006, Electric Power Systems and Equipment — Voltage Ratings (60 Hz) .






CommitteeStatement:



of 473




(F) Risk Assessment Procedure. An electrical safety program shall include a risk assessment procedurethat addressesemployee exposure to electrical hazards. The procedure shall identify the process to be used by the employee beforework is started to carry out the following:

(1) Identify hazards

(2) Assess risks

(3) Implement risk control according to a hierarchy of methods

Informational Note No.1: The hierarchy of risk control methods specified in ANSI/AIHA Z10, American National Standardfor Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems is as follows:

(1) Elimination

(2) Substitution

(3) Engineering controls

(4) Awareness

(5) Administrative controls

(6) Personal protective equipment

Informational Note No. 2: The risk assessment procedure includes identifying when a second person could be requiredand the training and equipment that person should have.

Informational Note No. 3: For an example of a risk assessment procedure flow chart, see Informative Annex F.


Submitter Full Name:Michael Fontaine

Organization: National Fire Protection Assoc

Submittal Date: Wed Oct 03 12:46:16 EDT 2012


CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The revised wording of this first revisionpromotes consistency throughout the document with respect to hazard/risk usage. The revision improves workersafety by emphasizing the requirement to establish an electrically safe work condition as a priority through thehierarchy of risk control.

ResponseMessage:

FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 11-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.3(F)]





of 473




(G) Job Briefing.

(1) General.

Before starting each job, the employee in charge shall conduct a job briefing with the employees involved. The briefingshall cover such subjects as hazards associated with the job, work procedures involved, special precautions, energysource controls, personal protective equipment requirements, and the information on the energized electrical workpermit, if required. Additional job briefings shall be held if changes that might affect the safety of employees occur duringthe course of the work.

(2) Routine Work.

Prior to starting work, a brief discussion shall be satisfactory if the work involved is routine and if the employee isqualified for the task. If either of the following conditions exist refer to 110.3(G)(1):

(1) The work is complicated or involves increased risk.

(2) The employee cannot be expected to identify the hazards, assess the risk, or avoid exposure to the hazardsinvolved in the job.

Informational Note: For an example of a job briefing form and planning checklist, see Figure I.1.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. If job briefings are not performed on aregular basis, it is likely that personnel will lose the perspective of the hazards involved and consequences.Additional changes improve clarity and usability and further clarify the use of the term risk. The committee hasclarified by creating a job briefing requirement for the tasks that are complicated, hazardous and where employeescannot recognize the hazards involved.

ResponseMessage:

FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012. The committee concludes that there are some tasks that could be addressed through ashort discussion and removing this option could result in a pre-job briefing not being conducted.

Public Input No. 163-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.3(G)(3)]

Public Input No. 308-NFPA 70E-2012 [Sections 110.3(G)(2), 110.3(G)(3)]

of 473




(H) Electrical Safety Auditing.

(1) Electrical Safety Program. The electrical safety program shall be audited to verify the principles andprocedures of the electrical safety program are in compliance with this standard. The frequency of the auditshall not exceed 3 years.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The wording of this first revisionimproves clarity and useability and simplifies the current text by using the term "electrical hazards".

ResponseMessage:

FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012


(2) Field Work.

Field work shall be audited to verify that the requirements contained in the procedures of the electricalsafety program are being followed. When the auditing determines that the principles and procedures of theelectrical safety program are not being followed, the appropriate revisions to the training program orrevisions to the procedures shall be made. The frequency of the audit shall not exceed 1 year.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The wording of this revision isnecessary to mandate that field work auditing is performed at a minimum of once a year.

ResponseMessage:

FR-181-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473




(3) Documentation.

The audits shall be documented.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. Section110.3(H)(3) discusses morethan one audit, both of which should be documented.

ResponseMessage:

FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 476-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.3(H)(3)]


110.1 Relationships with Contractors (Outside Service Personnel, and So Forth).

(A) Host Employer Responsibilities.

(1) The host employer shall inform contract employers of the following:

(2) Known hazards that are covered by this standard, that are related to the contract employer’s work,and that might not be recognized by the contract employer or its employees

(3) Information about the employer’s installation that the contract employer needs to make theassessments required by Chapter 1

(4) The host employer shall report observed contract employer–related violations of this standard to the contractemployer.

of 473



(B) Contract Employer Responsibilities.

(1) The contract employer shall ensure that each of his or her employees is instructed in the hazardscommunicated to the contract employer by the host employer. This instruction shall be in addition to thebasic training required by this standard.

(2) The contract employer shall ensure that each of his or her employees follows the work practices required bythis standard and safety-related work rules required by the host employer.

(3) The contract employer shall advise the host employer of the following:

(4) Any unique hazards presented by the contract employer’s work

(5) Any unanticipated hazards found during the contract employer’s work that the host employer did notmention

(6) The measures the contractor took to correct any violations reported by the host employer under110.1(A)(2) and to prevent such violation from recurring in the future

(C) Documentation.

There shall be a documented meeting between the host employer and the contract employer.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3.

ResponseMessage:

FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 132-NFPA 70E-2012 [Article 110]


of 473



First Revision No. 178-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.1(C) ]

110.1 Electrical Safety Program.

(A) General.

The employer shall implement and document an overall electrical safety program that directs activityappropriate to the risk associated with electrical hazards.

Informational Note No. 1: Safety-related work practices, maintenance requirements, warningpractices, auditing requirements, and traning requirements provided in this standard areadministrative controls and part of an overall electrical safety program.

Informational Note No. 2: ANSI/AIHA Z10, American National Standard for Occupational Health andSafety Management Systems, provides a framework for establishing a comprehensive electricalsafety program as a component of an employer’s occupational safety and health program.

Informational Note No. 3: IEEE 3007.1, Recommended Practice for the Operation and Management ofIndustrial and Commercial Power Systems, provides additional guidance for the implementation ofthe electrical safety program.

Informational Note No. 4: IEEE 3007.3, Recommended Practice for Electrical Safety in Industrial andCommercial Power Systems, provides additional guidance for electrical safety in the workplace.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The revised wording of this first revisionimproves clarity with text edits and promotes consistency throughout the document with respect to hazard/riskusage. The revision also emphasizes that administrative controls are just one aspect of an overall electrical safetyprogram. Two new Informational Notes are added to provide the user of this standard with valuable information onsafety in the workplace and the implementation of and electrical safety program.

ResponseMessage:

FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012




of 473




(B) Awareness and Self-Discipline. The electrical safety program shall be designed to provide anawareness of the potential electrical hazards to employees who work in an environment with the presenceof electrical hazards. The program shall be developed to provide the required self-discipline for allemployees who must perform work that may involve electrical hazards. The program shall instill safetyprinciples and controls.

(C) Electrical Safety Program Principles. The electrical safety program shall identify the principles uponwhich it is based.

Informational Note: For examples of typical electrical safety program principles, see Annex E.

(D) Electrical Safety Program Controls. An electrical safety program shall identify the controls by which it ismeasured and monitored.

Informational Note: For examples of typical electrical safety program controls, see Annex E.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473

http://submittals.nfpa.org/TerraViewWeb/CommentDisplay?commentId=/TerraView/Content/70E-2012.ditamap/2/C1349283290403.xml&xsl-RenderAs=ContentPopup&css=true&orig=orig&new=source#nfc_70E_2012_ID0070e101773





(E) Electrical Safety Program Procedures.

Before work is started, an electrical safety program shall identify the procedures for employees exposedto an electrical hazard.

Informational Note: For an example of a typical electrical safety program procedure, see Annex E.






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The revised wording of this first revisionimproves clarity and useability and simplifies the current text by using the term "electrical hazards".

ResponseMessage:

FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 334-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.3(E)]

First Revision No. 37-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.2(A) ]

(A) Safety Training.

The training requirements contained in this section shall apply to employees who face a risk of exposed to anelectrical hazard that is not reduced to a safe level by the applicable electrical installation requirements. Suchemployees shall be trained to understand the specific hazards associated with electrical energy. They shall betrained in safety-related work practices and procedural requirements, as necessary, to provide protection from theelectrical hazards associated with their respective job or task assignments. Employees shall be trained toidentify and understand the relationship between electrical hazards and possible injury.

Informational Note: For further information concerning installation requirements, see NFPA 70 ®, National

Electrical Code ®.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision correlates with the new definition of "risk,” which is a combination of likelihood and severity. Thecontext indicates that what is being referred to is the exposure to an electric shock.

ResponseMessage:

FR-37-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 38-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.2(B) ]

(B) Type of Training.

The training required by this section shall be classroom or , on-the-job type , or a combination of the two. Thedegree type and extent of the training provided shall be determined by the risk to the employee.






Committee Statement: The type of training provided and the extent of the training shall be based on the risk to the worker.




of 473




(C) Emergency ProceduresResponse .

Employers shall document that employees required to respond to emergencies have received training in thefollowing:

(1) Contact Release. Employees exposed to shock hazards

and those employees responsible for taking action in case of emergency

shall be trained in methods of safe release of victims from contact with exposed energized electrical conductorsor circuit parts.

(2) Resucitation. Employees shall be regularly instructed in methods of first aid and emergency procedures,such as approved methods of resuscitation, if their duties warrant such training. Training of employees inapproved methods of resuscitation, including cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) and

automatic

automated external defibrillator (AED) use, shall be

certified by the employer

verified annually.






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision enhances clarity with editorial changes and by explaining that while many organizationscertification is good for two years, it is the responsibility of the employer to annually verify that the training iscurrent.

ResponseMessage:

FR-34-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 40-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.2(C)]











First Revision No. 39-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.2(D)(1) ]

(1)

QualifiedQualified Person .

A qualified person shall be trained and knowledgeable

of

of 473



in the construction and operation of equipment or a specific work method and be trained to

recognize, identify and avoid the electrical hazards that might be present with respect to that equipment or work method.

(a) Such persons shall also be familiar with the proper use of the special precautionary techniques

;, applicable electrical policies and procedures, personal protective equipment

including arc flash suit;, insulating and shielding materials

;, and insulated tools and test

equipmentinstruments . A person can be considered qualified with respect to certain equipment and methods but still be unqualifiedfor others.

(b) Such persons permitted to work within the limited approach boundary

of exposed energized electrical conductors and circuit parts operating at 50 volts or moreshall, at a minimum, be additionally trained in all of the following:

(1) Skills and techniques necessary to distinguish exposed energized electrical conductors and circuit parts from otherparts of electrical equipment

(2) Skills and techniques necessary to determine the nominal voltage of exposed energized electrical conductors andcircuit parts

(3) Approach distances specified in Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b) and the corresponding voltages to whichthe qualified person will be exposed

(4) Decision-making process necessary to

determine the degree and extent of the hazard and the personal protective equipment and job planning necessary

(1) be able to do the following:

i) Perform the job planning required to perform the

taskjob safely

ii) Identify electrical hazards

iii) Assess the associated risks

iv) Select the personal protective equipment required by this standard

(c) An employee who is undergoing on-the-job training for the purpose of obtaining the skills and knowledgenecessary to be considered a qualified person

and, who

,in the course of such training

, has demonstrateddemonstrates an ability to perform specific duties safely at his or her level of training, and who is under the directsupervision of a qualified person

,shall be considered to be a qualified person for the performance of those specific duties.

(d) Tasks that are performed less often than once per year shall require retraining before the performance of the workpractices involved.

(e) Employees shall be trained to select an appropriate

voltage detectortest instrument and shall demonstrate how to use a device to verify the absence of voltage, including interpretingindications provided by the device. The training shall include information that enables the employee to understand alllimitations of each specific

voltage detectortest instrument that might be used.

(f) The employer shall determine, through regular supervision or through inspections conducted on at least an annualbasis, that each employee is complying with the safety-related work practices required by this standard.


of 473







CommitteeStatement:

This first revision clarifies this section by removing the reference to “50 volts or more”, replacing “recognize andavoid” with “identify and avoid” and replaces “voltage detector” with “test instrument”. The first revision also improvesworker safety by adding knowledge of applicable policies and procedures. The committee concludes the term “testinstrument” includes both contact and noncontact instruments.

ResponseMessage:

FR-39-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 159-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.2(D)(1)]






(3) Retraining.

Retraining in safety-related work practices and applicable changes in this standard shall be performed at intervalsnot to exceed three years. An employee shall receive additional training (or retraining) under if any of thefollowing conditions exists :

(1) If the The supervision or annual inspections indicate that the employee is not complying with the safety-related work practices.

(2) If new New technology, new types of equipment, or changes in procedures necessitate the use of safety-related work practices that are different from those that the employee would normally use

If he or she

(3) .

(4) The employee must employ safety-related work practices that are not normally used during his or herregular job duties

Retraining shall be performed at intervals not to exceed 3 years

(1) .






Committee Statement: This reformatting and re-wording improves readability and strengthens retraining requirements.






of 473



First Revision No. 42-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.2(E) ]

(E) Training Documentation.

The employer shall document that each employee has received the training required by 110.2 (D). Thisdocumentation shall be made when the employee demonstrates proficiency in the work practices involved andshall be maintained for the duration of the employee’s employment. The documentation shall contain the contentof the training, each employee’s name, and dates of training.

Informational Note 1 : Content of the training could include one or more of the following: course syllabus,course curriculum, outline, table of contents or training objectives.

Informational Note 2: Employment records that indicate that an employee has received the requiredtraining are an acceptable means of meeting this requirement.






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision provides clarity to the section by explaining options for documenting training“content”.



of 473




(B) Contract Employer Responsibilities.

(1) The contract employer shall ensure that each of his or her employees is instructed in the hazardscommunicated to the contract employer by the host employer. This instruction shall be in addition tothe basic training required by this standard.

(2) The contract employer shall ensure that each of his or her employees follows the work practicesrequired by this standard and safety-related work rules required by the host employer.

(3) The contract employer shall advise the host employer of the following:

a. Any unique hazards presented by the contract employer’s work

b. Any unanticipated hazards found Hazards identified during the contract employer’s workthat course of work by the contract employer that were not communicated by the hostemployerdid not mention

c. The measures the contractor took to correct any violations reported by the host employer under110.1(A)(2) and to prevent such violation from recurring in the future






CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. The wording of this proposed change isconsistent with revisions made in 2009. Hazards are "identified" vs. "found." The editorial revision to the structure ofthe sentence provides clarity to the user of the document. This change is also part of the relocation of 110.1 to110.3 to improve the usability of the article.

ResponseMessage:

FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(C) Documentation. There shall be a documented meeting between the host employer and the contractemployer.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-186-NFPA 70E-2012


110.

3 Electrical Safety Program. 3 Host and Contractors' Responsibilities.

(A)

GeneralHost Employer Responsibilities .

(1) The host employer shall

implement and document an overall electrical safety program that directs activity appropriate for the electrical hazards,voltage, energy level, and circuit conditions.

Informational Note No. 1: Safety-related work practices are just one component of an overall electrical safetyprogram.

Informational Note No. 2: ANSI/AIHA Z10-2005, American National Standard for Occupational Safety and HealthManagement Systems , provides a framework for establishing a comprehensive electrical safety program as acomponent of an employer’s occupational safety and health program.

(B) Awareness and Self-Discipline.

The electrical safety program shall be designed to provide an awareness of the potential electrical hazards toemployees who work in an environment with the presence of electrical hazards. The program shall be developedto provide the required self-discipline for all employees who must perform work that may involve electricalhazards. The program shall instill safety principles and controls.

(C) Electrical Safety Program Principles.

The electrical safety program shall identify the principles upon which it is based.

Informational Note: For examples of typical electrical safety program principles, see Annex E.

(D) Electrical Safety Program Controls.

An electrical safety program shall identify the controls by which it is measured and monitored.

Informational Note: For examples of typical electrical safety program controls, see Annex E.

of 473



(E) Electrical Safety Program Procedures.

An electrical safety program shall identify the procedures for working within the limited approach boundary and forworking within the arc flash boundary before work is started.

Informational Note: For an example of a typical electrical safety program procedure, see Annex E.

(F) Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment Procedure.

An electrical safety program shall include a hazard identification and a risk assessment procedure to be usedbefore work is started within the limited approach boundary or within the arc flash boundary of energized electricalconductors and circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more or where an electrical hazard exists. The procedureshall identify the process to be used by the employee before work is started to identify hazards and assess risks,including potential risk mitigation strategies.

Informational Note No. 1: The hazard identification and risk assessment procedure may include identifyingwhen a second person could be required and the training and equipment that person should have.

Informational Note No. 2: For an example of a hazard identification and risk assessment procedure flowchart, see Annex F.

Informational Note No. 3: For an example of a hazard identification and risk assessment procedure, seeAnnex F.

(G) Job Briefing.

(1) General.

Before starting each job, the employee in charge shall conduct a job briefing with the employees involved. Thebriefing shall cover such subjects as hazards associated with the job, work procedures involved, specialprecautions, energy source controls, personal protective equipment requirements, and the information on theenergized electrical work permit, if required. Additional job briefings shall be held if changes that might affect thesafety of employees occur during the course of the work.

(2) Repetitive or Similar Tasks.

If the work or operations to be performed during the work day or shift are repetitive and similar, at least one jobbriefing shall be conducted before the start of the first job of the day or shift.

(3) Routine Work.

Prior to starting work, a brief discussion shall be satisfactory if the work involved is routine and if the employee isqualified for the task. A more extensive discussion shall be conducted if either of the following apply:

(1) The work is complicated or particularly hazardous.

(2) The employee cannot be expected to recognize and avoid the hazards involved in the job.

Informational Note: For an example of a job briefing form and planning checklist, see Figure I.1 .

(H) Electrical Safety Auditing.

(1) Electrical Safety Program.

The electrical safety program shall be audited to verify the principles and procedures of the electrical safetyprogram are in compliance with this standard. The frequency of the audit shall not exceed 3 years.

(2) Field Work.

Field work shall be audited to verify the requirements contained in the procedures of the electrical safety programare being followed. When the auditing determines that the principles and procedures of the electrical safetyprogram are not being followed, the appropriate revisions to the training program or revisions to the proceduresshall be made.

(3) Documentation.

The audit shall be documented.

inform contract employers of the following:

a. Known hazards that are covered by this standard, that are related to the contract employer’s work, and that mightnot be recognized by the contract employer or its employees

b. Information about the employer’s installation that the contract employer needs to make the assessments requiredby Chapter 1

(2) The host employer shall report observed contract employer–related violations of this standard to the contractemployer.





of 473





CommitteeStatement:

This change is part of the move of 110.3 as revised to 110.1 and improves the usability of Article 110. FirstRevisions -- FR-184-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-178-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-179-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-180-NFPA 70E-2012,FR-175-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-176-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-177-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-182-NFPA 70E-2012 --accomplish the relocation of revised 110.3 to 110.1. First Revisions -- FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012, FR-185-NFPA 70E-2012 and FR-186-NFPA 70E -- accomplish the relocation of 110.1 to 110.3. Revising the wording of the title of thissection increases clarity and usability of the standard; and accurately reflects the content of the section.

ResponseMessage:

FR-187-NFPA 70E-2012



First Revision No. 49-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.4(A)(2) ]

(2) Rating.

Test instruments, equipment, and their accessories shall be rated for circuits and equipment to which they will beconnected where they are utilitzed .

Informational Note: See ANSI/ISA-61010-1 (82.02.01)/UL 61010-1, Safety Requirements for ElectricalEquipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements, for rating anddesign requirements for voltage measurement and test instruments intended for use on electrical systems1000 V volts and below.






Committee Statement: This change improves grammar and clarity.


Public Input No. 337-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.4(A)(2)]

of 473




(3) Design.

Test instruments, equipment, and their accessories shall be designed for the environment to which they will beexposed and for the manner in which they will be used utilized .






Committee Statement: This change improves grammar and clarity.




(4) Visual Inspection and Repair .

Test instruments and equipment and all associated test leads, cables, power cords, probes, and connectorsshall be visually inspected for external defects and damage before each use. If there is a defect or evidence ofdamage that might expose an employee to injury , the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service,and no employee shall use it until repairs a qualified person performs the repairs and tests necessary to renderthe equipment safe have been made .






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision emphasizes that repairs should be included in the title of the section as repair is a substantialpart of the section. The requirements for repairs should be limited to qualified workers.

ResponseMessage:

FR-51-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(5) Operation Verification.

When test instruments are used for testing the absence of voltage on conductors or circuit parts operating at 50volts or more, the operation of the test instrument shall be verified on a known voltage source before and after anabsence of voltage test is performed.






Committee Statement: This addition would provide guidance and clarification.




(5) Manufacturer's Instructions.Portable equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and safety warnings.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision will require that portable equipment be used in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.



of 473



First Revision No. 53-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.4(B)(1) ]

(1) Handling and Storage .

Portable equipment shall be handled and stored in a manner that will not cause damage. Flexible electric cordsconnected to equipment shall not be used for raising or lowering the equipment. Flexible cords shall not befastened with staples or hung in such a fashion as could damage the outer jacket or insulation.






CommitteeStatement:

Portable equipment and cords sets need to be handled and stored in a way that will not cause a potentiallydangerous condition.

ResponseMessage:

FR-53-NFPA 70E-2012.

Public Input No. 315-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.4(B)(1)]

of 473




(3) Visual Inspection and Repair of Portable Cord- and Plug-Connected Equipment and Flexible CordSets.

(a) Frequency of Inspection. Before each use, portable cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be visuallyinspected for external defects (such as loose parts or deformed and missing pins) and for evidence ofpossible internal damage (such as a pinched or crushed outer jacket).

Exception: Cord- and plug-connected equipment and flexible cord sets (extension cords) that remainconnected once they are put in place and are not exposed to damage shall not be required to be visuallyinspected until they are relocated.

(b) Defective Equipment. If there is a defect or evidence of damage that might expose an employee to injury ,the defective or damaged item shall be removed from service, and no employee shall use it until a qualifedperson performs the repairs and tests necessary to render the equipment safe have been made .

(c) Proper Mating. When an attachment plug is to be connected to a receptacle, the relationship of the plug andreceptacle contacts shall first be checked to ensure that they are of mating configurations.

(d) Conductive Work Locations . Portable electric equipment used in highly conductive work locations (suchas those inundated with water or other conductive liquids)

,

(e) or in job locations where employees are likely to contact water or conductive liquids

,

(f) shall be approved for those locations. In job locations where employees are likely to contact or bedrenched with water or conductive liquids, ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection for personnel shall alsobe used.

Informational Note: The hazard/ risk evaluation assessment procedure could can also includeidentifying when the use of portable tools and equipment powered by sources other than 120 volts ac,such as batteries, air, and hydraulics, should be used to minimize the potential for injury from electricalhazards for tasks performed in conductive or wet locations.






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision improves clarity by editing the title to include “repair” as this comprises a significant portion of thissection. The revision also provides consistency with respect to hazard/risk references. The revision also improvesworker safety by requiring a qualified worker to perform reparations on defective or damaged equipment. Lastly,110.4(B)(3)(d) has been relocated to a new section 110.4(B)(4) as conductive work locations does not belong under"Visual Inspection of portable cord and plug connected equipment and cord sets, but is a better fit under PortableElectrical equipment.

ResponseMessage:

FR-59-NFPA 70E-2012

Committee Notes:

Date Submitted By

Aug 21,2012

[Michael D.Fontaine

Editorial, please note that section (d) becomes new section (4) with bold title.





of 473




(4 5 ) Connecting Attachment Plugs.

(a) Employees’ hands shall not be wet when plugging and unplugging flexible cords and cord- and plug-connected equipment if energized equipment is involved.

(b) Energized plug and receptacle connections shall be handled only with insulating protective equipment if thecondition of the connection could provide a conductive path to the employee’s hand (for example e.g. , if acord connector is wet from being immersed in water).

(c) Locking-type connectors shall be secured after connection.






Committee Statement: The first revision is intended to make numbering consistent.



of 473

First Revision No. 58-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Sections 110.4(C), 110.4(1), 110.4(2) ]

Sections 110.4(C), 110.4(1), 110.4(2)

(C) Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Protection.

(1) General

General .

Employees shall be provided with ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI) protection where required by applicablestate, federal, or local codes and standards. Listed cord sets or devices incorporating listed GFCI protection forpersonnel identified for portable use shall be permitted.

(2)

Outdoors.

Maintenance and Construction . GFCI protection shall be provided where an employee is operating or usingcord- and-plug-connected tools related to maintenance and construction activity supplied by 125-volt, 15-, 20-, or30-ampere circuits. Where employees operate or use equipment supplied by greater than 125-volt, 15-, 20-, or30-ampere circuits, GFCI protection or an assured equipment grounding conductor program shall beimplemented.

(3) Outdoors . GFCI protection shall be provided when an employee is outdoors and operating or using cord-and plug-connected equipment supplied by greater than 125-volt, 15-, 20-, or 30-ampere circuits. Whereemployees working outdoors operate or use equipment supplied by other than 125-volt, 15-, 20-, or 30-amperecircuits, GFCI protection or an assured equipment grounding conductor program shall be implemented.






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision improves worker safety by requiring GFCI protection when using cord and plug connected tools formaintenance and construction. The revision also improves usability by allowing the choice of GFCI protection or anassured equipment grounding conductor program for circuits greater than 125 volts.

ResponseMessage:

FR-58-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 456-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 110.4(2)]




of 473



First Revision No. 56-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 110.4(E) ]

(E) Overcurrent

Overcurrent Protection Modification .

Overcurrent protection of circuits and conductors shall not be modified, even on a temporary basis, beyond

that

what is permitted by applicable portions of electrical codes and standards dealing with overcurrent protection.

Informational Note: For further information concerning electrical codes and standards dealing withovercurrent protection, refer to Article 240 of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.






Committee Statement: This revision improves grammar of the section.




110.5 Underground Electrical Lines and Equipment.

Before excavation starts, and where there exists a reasonable possibility of contacting electrical lines orequipment, the employer shall take the necessary steps to contact the appropriate owners or authorities toidentify and mark the location of the electrical lines or equipment. When it has been determined that a reasonablepossibility for contacting electrical lines or equipment exists, a hazard analysis shall be performed to identify theappropriate safe work practices that shall be used during the excavation.






CommitteeStatement:

Section 110.5 has been relocated to dedicated section 130.9 in Article 130 for underground electrical lines and thisrelocation of the section as revised in FR-130-NFPA 70E-2012 increases the useability of the document.

ResponseMessage:

FR-109-NFPA 70E-2012





of 473




120.1 Process of Achieving an Electrically Safe Work Condition.

An electrically safe work condition shall be achieved when performed in accordance with the procedures of 120.2and verified by the following process:

(1) Determine all possible sources of electrical supply to the specific equipment. Check applicable up-to-datedrawings, diagrams, and identification tags.

(2) After properly interrupting the load current, open the disconnecting device(s) for each source.

(3) Wherever possible, visually verify that all blades of the disconnecting devices are fully open or that drawout-type circuit breakers are withdrawn to the fully disconnected position.

(4) Apply lockout/tagout devices in accordance with a documented and established policy.

(5) Use an adequately rated voltage detector test instrument to test each phase conductor or circuit part toverify they are it is de-energized. Test each phase conductor or circuit part both phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. Before and after each test, determine that the voltage detector test instrument is operatingsatisfactorily through verfication on a known voltage source .

Informational Note: See ANSI/ISA-61010-1 (82.02.01)/ UL 61010-1, Safety Requirements forElectrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use – Part 1: General Requirements,for rating and design requirements for voltage measurement and test instruments intended for use onelectrical systems 1000 V volts and below.

(6) Where the possibility of induced voltages or stored electrical energy exists, ground the phase conductors orcircuit parts before touching them. Where it could be reasonably anticipated that the conductors or circuitparts being de-energized could contact other exposed energized conductors or circuit parts, apply groundconnecting devices rated for the available fault duty.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision adds clarification to test instruments verification requirements. "Voltage Detector" is changed to"test instrument" for consistent use of the term in the standard.

ResponseMessage:

FR-61-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(2) Training and Retraining .

All persons who could be exposed shall be trained to understand the established procedure to control the energyand their responsibility in executing the procedure. New (or reassigned) employees shall be trained (or retrained)to understand the lockout/tagout procedure as it relates to their new assignment. assignments. The employershall document that each employee has received the training required by this section. This documentation shallbe made when the employee demostrates proficiency in the work pratices involved. The documentation shallcontain the content of the training, each employee's name, and the dates of the training. Retraining shall berequired as the established procedure is revised. Retraining shall be performed at intervals not to exceed 3 years.

Informational Note: Content of the training could include one or more of the following: course syllabus, coursecurriculum, outline, table of contents, or training objectives.






CommitteeStatement:

“Retraining” is added to the title to better clarify the content of this section. Documentation requirements are addedfor consistency in the standard. Retraining are added for consistency in the standard. A new informational note wasadded to provide clarity with respect to "content of training."

ResponseMessage:

FR-60-NFPA 70E-2012




of 473




(3) Coordination.

(a) The established electrical lockout/tagout procedure shall be coordinated with all other employer’sprocedures for control of exposure to electrical energy sources such that all employer’s proceduralrequirements are adequately addressed on a site basis.

(b) The procedure for control of exposure to electrical hazards shall be coordinated with other procedures forcontrol of other hazardous energy sources such that they are based on similar/identical concepts.

(c) The electrical lockout/tagout procedure shall always include voltage testing requirements where there mightbe direct exposure to electrical energy hazards.

(d) Electrical lockout/tagout devices shall be permitted to be similar to lockout/tagout devices for control ofother hazardous energy sources, such as pneumatic, hydraulic, thermal, and mechanical, if such devicesare used only for control of hazardous energy and for no other purpose.






Committee Statement: The change provides clarity and consistency in the use of the term "electrical hazards".




(4) Training and Retraining.

Each employer shall provide training as required to ensure employees’ understanding of the lockout/tagoutprocedure content and their duty in executing such procedures.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has deleted this section because this requirement is already covered in Section 120.2(B)(2).Section 120.2(B)(2) has been revised to include the requirements in this section.

ResponseMessage:

FR-63-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 65-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 120.2(E)(2) ]

(2) Lockout

Lockout /Tagout Device .

Each employer shall supply, and employees shall use, lockout/tagout devices and equipment necessary toexecute the requirements of 120.2(E). Locks and tags used for control of exposure to electrical

energy

hazards shall be unique, shall be readily identifiable as lockout/tagout devices, and shall be used for no otherpurpose.






Committee Statement: The change provides clarity and consistency in the use of the term "electrical hazards".


Public Input No. 167-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 120.2(E)(2)]

of 473




(4) Tagout Device.

(a) A tagout device shall include a tag together with an attachment means.

(b) The tagout device shall be readily identifiable as a tagout device and suitable for the environment andduration of the tagout.

(c) A tagout device attachment means shall be capable of withstanding at least 224.4 N (50 lb) of force exertedat a right angle to the disconnecting means surface. The tag attachment means shall be nonreusable,attachable by hand, self-locking, nonreleasable, and equal to an all-environmental tolerant nylon cable tie.

(d) Tags shall contain a statement prohibiting unauthorized operation of the disconnecting means or removal ofthe tag.

(e) A hold card tagging tool on an overhead conductor in conjunction with a hotline tool to install the tagoutdevice safely on a disconnect that is isolated from the work(s) shall be permitted. Where a hold card isused, the tagout procedure shall include the method of accounting for personnel who are working under theprotection of the hold card.






CommitteeStatement:

The change as necessary requirements to account for personnel working under the protection of a hold cardlockout/tagout system.

ResponseMessage:

FR-66-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(A) Placement

Placement .

Temporary protective grounding equipment shall be placed at such locations and arranged in such a manner as toprevent each employee from being exposed to a shock hazard ( hazardous differences in electrical potential ) . The location, sizing, and application of temporary protective grounding equipment shall be identified as part of theemployer's job planning.






CommitteeStatement:

The change provides clarity and consistency in use of the terms "hazardous" and "hazards". Placement oftemporary protective grounding equipment should be part of job planning.

ResponseMessage:

FR-67-NFPA 70E-2012



130.1 General.

Article 130 provides requirements for establishing an electrically safe work condition and electrical safety-relatedwork practices when an electrically safe work condition cannot be established. All requirements of this articleshall apply whether an incident energy analysis is completed or if Table 130.7(C)(15)(a), Table 130.7(C)(15)(b),and Table 130.7(C)(16) are used in lieu of an incident energy analysis in accordance with 130.5, Exception.






Committee Statement: This revision clarifies the application of Article 130.


of 473



First Revision No. 72-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.2 [Excluding any Sub-Sections] ]

Energized electrical conductors and circuit parts to which an employee might be exposed shall be put into anelectrically safe work condition before an employee performs work if either any of the following conditions exist:

(1) The employee is within the limited approach boundary.

(2) The employee interacts with equipment where conductors or circuit parts are not exposed, but an increasedrisk likelihood of injury from an exposure to an arc flash hazard exists.

(3) The employee is within the arc flash boundary of exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts.

Exception: Where a disconnecting means or isolating element that has been properly installed and maintainedis operated, opened, closed, removed, or inserted to achieve an electrically safe work condition for connectedequipment or to return connected equipment to service that has been placed in an electrically safe workcondition, the equipment supplying the disconnecting means or isolating element shall not be required to beplaced in an electrically safe work condition provided a risk assessment is performed and does not identifyunacceptable risks for the task .






CommitteeStatement:

This revision adds a new list item (3) t o include "the arc flash boundary" in 130.2 for clarity. This concept was notaddressed in the original text and was added for consistency throughout the document. The term risk was changedto likelihood because it provides clarity.

ResponseMessage:

FR-72-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 63-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.2 [Excluding any Sub-Sections]]



(1) Greater Hazard Additional Hazards or Increased Risk .

Energized work shall be permitted where the employer can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces additionalhazards or increased risk.






Committee Statement: This revision makes the text consistent with the requirements under this new title.



of 473




(4) Normal Operation. Normal operation of electric equipment shall be permitted where all of the following conditionsare satisfied:

(1) The equipment is properly installed

(1) The equipment is properly maintained

(1) The equipment doors are closed and secured

(1) All equipment covers are in place and secured

(1) There is no evidence of impending failure

Informational Note: The phrase properly installed means that the equipment is installed in accordance with applicableindustry codes and standards and the manufacturer's recommendations. The phrase properly maintained means that theequipment has been maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and applicable industry codesand standards. The phrase evidence of impending failure means that there is evidence such as arcing, overheating,loose or bound equipment parts, visible damage, or deterioration.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision to 130.2(A) provides requirements where normal operation of electric equipment ispermitted.


of 473




(1) When

When Required .

When working within the

limited

restricted approach boundary

or the arc flash boundary

of exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts that are not placed in an electrically safe workcondition [

that is,

for the reasons of

increased or

additional hazards or

infeasibility per

increased risk or infeasibility in accordance with 130.2(A)

],

(1), 130.2(A)(2) and 130.2(A)(3)] or where the employee interacts with the equipment where conductors or circuitparts are not exposed but an increased risk of injury from an exposure to an arc flash hazard exists work to beperformed shall be considered energized electrical work and shall be performed by written permit only.






CommitteeStatement:

The conditions for issuing and Energized Work Permit should be the same as those required for establishing anelectrically safe work condition (130.2). This revision will provide additional document clarity. For PI 64 – The term“other electrical hazards have not been defined and may create confusion for the users of the standard. The FirstRevision captures the concept of “other electrical hazards”.

ResponseMessage:

FR-75-NFPA 70E-2012








of 473



(2)

ElementsElements of Work Permit .

The energized electrical work permit shall include, but not be limited to, the following items:

(1) Description of the task, circuit and equipment to be worked on and their location

(2) Justification for why the work must be performed in an energized condition [see 130.2(A) ]

(3) Description of the safe work practices to be employed [see 130.3(B) ]

(4) Results of the shock hazard analysis [see 130.4(A) ]

a. Limited approach boundary [see 130.4(B)

and, Table 130.4(C)(a) , and Table 130.4(C)(b) ]

b. Restricted approach boundary [see 130.4(B)

and, Table 130.4(C)(a) , and Table 130.4(C)(b) ]

Prohibited approach boundary [see 130.4(B) and Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b) ]

c. Necessary shock personal and other protective equipment to safely perform the assigned task toprotect against the hazard [see 130.4(C) , 130.7(C) (1) through (C)(16), Table 130.7(C)(15)(

ab ) , Table 130.7(C)(15)(

bd ) ,

andTable 130.7(C)(16) , and 130.7(D) ]

(5) Results of the arc flash hazard analysis [see 130.5 ]

a. Available incident energy at a specified working distance or hazard/risk category [see 130.5 ]

b. Necessary personal protective equipment to safely perform the assigned task

.to protect against the hazard [see 130.5(B) , 130.7(C) (1) through (C)(16), Table 130.7(C)(15)(

ab ) , Table 130.7(C)(15)(

bd ) ,

andTable 130.7(C)(16) , and 130.7(D) ]

c. Arc flash boundary [see 130.5(A) ]

(6) Means employed to restrict the access of unqualified persons from the work area [see 130.3(A) ]

(7) Evidence of completion of a job briefing, including a discussion of any job-specific electrical hazards[see 110.3(G) ]

(8) Energized work approval (authorizing or responsible management, safety officer, or owner, etc.)signature(s)

Informational Note: For an example of an acceptable energized electrical work permit, see Figure J.1.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision now requires that the task to be performed must be listed on the permit. Multiple editorial revisions areincluded for clarity. List item 130.2(B)(4)(c) is deleted because the term "prohibited approach boundary" is deletedthrough out this standard.

ResponseMessage:

FR-76-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473

http://submittals.nfpa.org/TerraViewWeb/ContentFetcher?commentParams=%28CommentType%3D%22FR%22%29&path=/TerraView/Content/70E-2012.ditamap/2&xsl-RenderAs=CommentSearchResults&displayOptions=1:100000:LABEL&commentXslt=nfpa/xslt/nfpaviewmode.xsl#nfc_70E_2012_ID0070e1003012





































(3)

ExemptionsExemptions to Work Permit.

Work performed within the limited approach boundary of energized electrical conductors or circuit parts by qualifiedpersons related to tasks such as testing, troubleshooting, and voltage measuring shall be permitted to be performedwithout an energized electrical work permit, if appropriate safe work practices and personal protective equipment inaccordance with Chapter 1 are provided and used. If the purpose of crossing the limited approach boundary is only forvisual inspection and the restricted approach boundary will not be crossed, then an energized electrical work permit shallnot be required.

Informational Note: For an example of an acceptable energized electrical work permit, see Figure J.1 .

130.2(B)(3) Exemptions to Work Permit. An energized electrical work permit shall not be required if a qualified personis provided with and uses appropriate safe work practices and personal protective equipment (PPE) in accordance withChapter 1 under any of the following conditions:

(1) Testing, troubleshooting, and voltage measuring

(2) Thermography and visual inspections if the restricted approach boundary is not crossed

(3) Access to and egress from an area with energized electrical equipment if no electrical work is performed and therestricted approach boundary is not crossed

(4) General housekeeping and miscellaneous non-electrical tasks if the restricted approach boundary is not crossed

(5) Where the employer’s arc flash risk assessment required by 130.5 identifies no arc flash hazards

Informational Note No. 1: See Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) for more examples of tasks for which there are no arc flash hazards.

Informational Note No. 2: Where the risk assessment identifies no arc flash hazards, there is no arc flash boundary.






CommitteeStatement:

This first revision adds clarity to when an energized electrical work permit is not required, and increases thereadability and usability of this section.

ResponseMessage:

FR-77-NFPA 70E-2012









of 473





(A) General.

Safety-related work practices shall be used to safeguard employees from injury while they are exposed to electricalhazards from electrical conductors or circuit parts that are or can become energized. The specific safety-related workpractices shall be consistent with the nature electrical hazards and extent of the associated electrical hazards.

(1) Energized Electrical Conductors and Circuit Parts — Safe Work Condition.

Before an employee works within the limited approach boundary, energized electrical conductors and circuit partsto which an employee might be exposed shall be put into an electrically safe work condition, unless work onenergized components can be justified according to 130.2(A).

(2) Energized Electrical Conductors and Circuit Parts — Unsafe Work Condition.

risk. Appropriate safety-related work practices shall be determined before any person is exposed to the electrical hazardsinvolved by using both shock hazard analysis and arc flash hazard analysis. Only qualified persons shall be permitted towork on electrical conductors or circuit parts that have not been put into an electrically safe work condition.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and consistency with the proposed definitions of hazard and risk. Thechange also removes redundant language and provides document clarity.

ResponseMessage:

FR-80-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 175-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.3(A) [Excluding any Sub-Sections]]



of 473




(B) Working Within the Limited Approach Boundary of Exposed Electrical Conductors or Circuit PartsThat Are or Might Become Energized.

(1) Electrical Hazard Analysis.

If the energized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more are not placed in an electricallysafe work condition, other safety-related work practices shall be used to protect employees who might beexposed to the electrical hazards involved. Such work practices shall protect each employee from arc flash andfrom contact with energized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more directly with anypart of the body or indirectly through some other conductive object. Work practices that are used shall besuitable for the conditions under which the work is to be performed and for the voltage level of the energizedelectrical conductors or circuit parts. Appropriate safety-related work practices shall be determined before anyperson is exposed to the electrical hazards involved by using both shock hazard analysis and arc flash hazardanalysis.

(2) Safety Interlocks.

Only qualified persons following the requirements for working inside the restricted approach boundary as coveredby 130.4(C) shall be permitted to defeat or bypass an electrical safety interlock over which the person has solecontrol, and then only temporarily while the qualified person is working on the equipment. The safety interlocksystem shall be returned to its operable condition when the work is completed.






CommitteeStatement:

This section has been deleted as most of this information is duplicated elsewhere. The remaining information hasbeen rearranged. Safety interlocks have been relocated after 130.6(L) as a new section 130.6(M).

ResponseMessage:

FR-78-NFPA 70E-2012



of 473




(B) Shock Protection Boundaries.

The shock protection boundaries identified as limited approach , boundary and restricted approach , andprohibited approach boundaries boundary shall be applicable where approaching personnel are exposed toenergized electrical conductors or circuit parts. Table 130.4(C)(a) shall be used for the distances associated withvarious ac system voltages. Table 130.4(C)(b) shall be used for the distances associated with various dc systemvoltages.

Informational Note: In certain instances, the arc flash boundary might be a greater distance from theenergized electrical conductors or circuit parts than the limited approach boundary. The shock protectionboundaries and the arc flash boundary are independent of each other.






Committee Statement: The term "Prohibited Approach Boundary" was deleted to correlate with FR-121 NFPA 70E-2012.



(C) Approach to Exposed Energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts Operating at 50 Volts orMore.

of 473



No qualified person shall approach or take any conductive object closer to exposed energized electricalconductors or circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more than the restricted approach boundary set forth in Table130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b), unless any one of the following apply conditions applies :

(1) The qualified person is insulated or guarded from the energized electrical conductors or circuit partsoperating at 50 volts or more. Insulating gloves or insulating gloves and sleeves are considered insulationonly with regard to the energized parts upon which work is being performed. If there is a need for anuninsulated part of the qualified person’s body to cross the prohibited approach boundary contact exposedenergized conductors or circuit parts , a combination of 130.4(C)(1), 130.4(C)(2), and 130.4(C)(3) shall beused to protect the uninsulated body parts.

(2) The energized electrical conductors or circuit part operating at 50 volts or more are insulated from thequalified person and from any other conductive object at a different potential.

(3) The qualified person is insulated from any other conductive object as during live-line bare-hand work .

Table 130

(1) The restricted approach boundary in Table 130 .4(C)(a)

Approach Boundaries to Energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts for Shock Protection for Alternating-Current Systems (All dimensions are distance from energized electrical conductor or circuit part to

employee.) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Limited Approach Boundary b Restricted Approach Boundary b ; Includes Inadvertent

Movement Adder Nominal System Voltage Range, Phase to Phase a Exposed Movable Conductor c Exposed

Fixed Circuit Part Prohibited Approach Boundary b <50 V Not specified Not specified Not specified Notspecified 50 V–300 V 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 6 in.) Avoid contact Avoid contact 301 V–750 V 3.0 m (10 ft 0in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 6 in.) 0.3 m (1 ft 0 in.) 25 mm (0 ft 1 in.) 751 V–15 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.5 m (5 ft 0 in.) 0.7 m (2 ft2 in.) 0.2 m (0 ft 7 in.) 15.1 kV–36 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.8 m (6 ft 0 in.) 0.8 m (2 ft 7 in.) 0.3 m (0 ft 10 in.) 36.1kV–46 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 2.5 m (8 ft 0 in.) 0.8 m (2 ft 9 in.) 0.4 m (1 ft 5 in.) 46.1 kV–72.5 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0in.) 2.5 m (8 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 3 in.) 0.1 m (2 ft 2 in.) 72.6 kV–121 kV 3.3 m (10 ft 8 in.) 2.5 m (8 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3ft 4 in.) 0.8 m (2 ft 9 in.) 138 kV–145 kV 3.4 m (11 ft 0 in.) 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.2 m (3 ft 10 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.) 161kV–169 kV 3.6 m (11 ft 8 in.) 3.6 m (11 ft 8 in.) 1.3 m (4 ft 3 in.) 1.1 m (3 ft 9 in.) 230 kV–242 kV 4.0 m (13 ft 0in.) 4.0 m (13 ft 0 in.) 1.7 m (5 ft 8 in.) 1.6 m (5 ft 2 in.) 345 kV–362 kV 4.7 m (15 ft 4 in.) 4.7 m (15 ft 4 in.) 2.8 m(9 ft 2 in.) 2.6 m (8 ft 8 in.) 500 kV–550 kV 5.8 m (19 ft 0 in.) 5.8 m (19 ft 0 in.) 3.6 m (11 ft 10 in.) 3.5 m (11 ft 4in.) 765 kV–800 kV 7.2 m (23 ft 9 in.) 7.2 m (23 ft 9 in.) 4.9 m (15 ft 11 in.) 4.7 m (15 ft 5 in.)

Note: For arc flash boundary, see 130.5(A).

a For single-phase systems, select the range that is equal to the system’s maximum phase-to-ground voltagemultiplied by 1.732.

b See definition in Article 100 and text in 130.4(D)(2) and Annex C for elaboration.

c This term describes a condition in which the distance between the conductor and a person is not under thecontrol of the person. The term is normally applied to overhead line conductors supported by poles.

Table 130.4(C)(b) Approach Boundaries a to Energized Electrical Conductors or Circuit Parts for ShockProtection, Direct-Current Voltage Systems

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Nominal Potential Difference Limited Approach Boundary Restricted Approach Boundary;

Includes Inadvertent Movement Adder Prohibited Approach Boundary Exposed Movable Conductor b ExposedFixed Circuit Part <100 V Not specified Not specified Not specified Not specified 100 V–300 V 3.0 m (10 ft 0in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 6 in.) Avoid contact Avoid contact 301 V–1 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 6 in.) 0.3 m (1 ft 0in.) 25 mm (0 ft 1 in.) 1.1 kV–5 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.5 m (5 ft 0 in.) 0.5 m (1 ft 5 in.) 0.1 m (0 ft 4 in.) 5 kV–15kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.5 m (5 ft 0 in.) 0.7 m (2 ft 2 in.) 0.2 m (0 ft 7 in.) 15.1 kV–45 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 2.5 m (8ft 0 in.) 0.8 m (2 ft 9 in.) 0.4 m (1 ft 5 in.) 45.1 kV– 75 kV 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 2.5 m (8 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 2 in.) 0.7 m(2 ft 1 in.) 75.1 kV–150 kV 3.3 m (10 ft 8 in.) 3.0 m (10 ft 0 in.) 1.2 m (4 ft 0 in.) 1.0 m (3 ft 2 in.) 150.1 kV–250kV 3.6 m (11 ft 8 in.) 3.6 m (11 ft 8 in.) 1.6 m (5 ft 3 in.) 1.5 m (5 ft 0 in.) 250.1 kV–500 kV 6.0 m (20 ft 0 in.) 6.0 m(20 ft 0 in.) 3.5 m (11 ft 6 in.) 3.3 m (10 ft 10 in.) 500.1 kV–800 kV 8.0 m (26 ft 0 in.) 8.0 m (26 ft 0 in.) 5.0 m (16 ft5 in.) 5.0 m (16 ft 5 in.)

a All dimensions are distance from exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts to worker.

b This terms describes a condition in which the distance between the conductor and a person is not under thecontrol of the person. The term is normally applied to overhead line conductors supported by poles.

(1) and Table 130.4(C)(b) is “not specified.”

Replace Table 130.4(C)(a) and associate notes and Table 130.4(C)(b) and associated notes with thoseshown in FR82.

Supplemental Information

of 473



File Name Description

FR82.docx These are the replacement tables and associated notes.






CommitteeStatement:

The revision enhances the understanding and application of the standard. Additionally this revision addressespossible confusion posed by systems covered by the 250 volt threshold. The change from 100 volts to 50 volts inTable 130.4(C)(b) aligns with OSHA's requirements. Dc voltages for special applications between 50 volts and 100volts may be more appropriately addressed in Chapter 3. The term "Prohibited Approach Boundary" in 130.4(C)(1)and columns 5 in Tables 130.4(C)(a) and (b) are removed because the term has been deleted through out thisstandard. The definition of "bare-hand work" was deleted.

ResponseMessage:

FR-82-NFPA 70E-2012






130.

5 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

An arc flash hazard analysis shall determine the arc flash boundary, the incident energy at the working distance, and thepersonal protective equipment that people within the arc flash boundary shall use.

The arc flash hazard analysis5 Arc Flash Risk Assessment. The arc flash risk assessment shall be updated when a major modification or renovationtakes place. It shall be reviewed periodically, not to exceed 5 years, to account for changes in the electrical distributionsystem that could affect the results of the arc flash

hazard analysisrisk assessment .

The arc flash

hazard analysisrisk assessment shall take into consideration the design of the overcurrent protective device and its opening time,including its condition of maintenance.

.

Exception: The requirements of 130.7(C)(15) and 130.7(C)(16) shall be permitted to be used in lieu of determining theincident energy at the work ing distance.

Informational Note No. 1:

Improper Improper or inadequate maintenance can result in increased opening time of the overcurrent protective device, thusincreasing the incident energy.


Both larger and smaller available short-circuit currents could result in higher available arc flash energies. If theavailable short-circuit current increases without a decrease in the opening time of the overcurrent protective device,the arc flash energy will increase. If the available short-circuit current decreases, resulting in a longer opening time forthe overcurrent protective device, arc flash energies could also increase.


of 473



The occurrence of an arcing fault inside an enclosure produces a variety of physical phenomena very different froma bolted fault. For example, the arc energy resulting from an arc developed in the air will cause a sudden pressureincrease and localized overheating. Equipment and design practices are available to minimize the energy levels andthe number of

at-riskprocedures that

requirecould expose an employee to

be exposed to high-level energy sourceshigh levels of incident energy . Proven designs such as arc-resistant switchgear, remote racking (insertion orremoval), remote opening and closing of switching devices, high-resistance grounding of low-voltage and 5

-kV,000 volts (nominal) systems, current limitation, and specification of covered bus or covered conductors withinequipment are techniques available to reduce the

hazard of the system.risk associated with an arc flash incident. See Informative Annex O for Safety-Related Design Requirements.


For For additional direction for performing maintenance on overcurrent protective devices, see Chapter 2 , Safety-Related Maintenance Requirements.


See IEEE 1584 , Guide for Performing Arc Flash Calculation for more information regarding arc flash hazards forthree-phase systems

rated less than 240 volts.

(A)

ArcArc Flash Boundary

. and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). One of the following methods shall be used for the determination of the arcflash boundary and the selection of personal protective equipment (PPE). Either, but not both, methods shall be permittedto be used on the same piece of equipment.

(1) Incident Energy Analysis. The arc flash boundary for systems 50 volts and greater shall be the distance at whichthe incident energy equals 5 J/

cm 2

cm2 (1.2 cal/

cm 2 ).

Informational Note: For information on estimating the arc flash boundary, see Annex D.

(B) Protective Clothing and Other Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for Application with an Arc Flash HazardAnalysis.

Where it has been determined that work will be performed within the arc flash boundary, one of the following methodsshall be used for the selection of protective clothing and other personal protective equipment (PPE): Incident EnergyAnalysis.cm2). The incident energy analysis shall determine, and the employer shall document, the incident energy exposure ofthe worker (in calories per square centimeter). The incident energy exposure level shall be based on the working distanceof the employee’s face and chest areas from a prospective arc source for the specific task to be performed. Arc-ratedclothing and other PPE shall be used by the employee based on the incident energy exposure associated with thespecific task. Recognizing that incident energy increases as the distance from the arc flash decreases, additional PPEshall be used for any parts of the body that are closer than the distance at which the incident energy was determined.

Informational Note:

For For information on estimating the incident energy, see Annex D . For information on selection of arc-rated clothingand other PPE, see Table H.3(b) in Annex H .

Hazard/Risk(2) PPE Categories. The requirements of 130.7(C) (15) and 130.7(C) (16) shall be

permitted to be usedused to determine the arc flash boundary and for the selection and use of personal and other protective equipment.

(

of 473








CB )

EquipmentEquipment Labeling.

Electrical equipment such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motorcontrol centers that are in other than dwelling units

,and that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized

,shall be field - marked with a label containing all the following information:

(1) Nominal system voltage

(2) Arc flash boundary

(3) At least one of the following:

a. Available incident energy and the corresponding working distance

b. Minimum arc rating of clothing

Requiredc. Site-specific level of PPE

Highest Hazard/Risk Category (HRC)d. PPE category in 130.7(C)(15)(b) or 130.7(C)(15)(d) for the equipment

Nominal system voltage

Arc flash boundary

Exception:

Labels applied prior to September 30, 2011, are acceptable if they contain the available incident energy or required levelof PPE.

The method of calculating and the data to support the information for the label shall be documented. Where the reviewof the arc flash hazard risk assessment identifies a change that renders the label inaccurate, the label shall be updated.

The owner of the electrical equipment shall be responsible for the documentation, installation, and maintenance of thefield-marked label.






CommitteeStatement:

The first paragraph of 130.5 is deleted because it is redundant with the existing definition of Arc Flash Analysis and130.7(C)(1). Terminology throughout was revised to correlate with other global revisions. The Exception was deletedbecause it exists in the present text of 130.5(B)(2). A new sentence has been added to Informational Note 3 toprovide a link to Informative Annex O. The existing requirements in 130.5(A) have been relocated to 130.5(B)(1) forclarity. The Information Note in 130.5(A) is deleted because it exists in the present 130.5(B). Text has been addedto the new 130.5(A) to clarify that both methods of selection of PPE are permitted but not on the same piece ofequipment. The order of the label was changed to place the nondiscretionary items to the top of the list. Thepresent list item 130.5(C)(1)c is revised for clarity. Additional text has been added to clarify that the label beupdated when conditions warrant and to identify who is responsible for the label.

ResponseMessage:

FR-110-NFPA 70E-2012







of 473




(1) When HazardousElectrical Hazards Might Exist .

Employees shall be instructed to be alert at all times when they are working within the limited approach boundaryof energized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more and in work situations where whenelectrical hazards might exist.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision to the title provides clarity and consistency with the text that follows. “Electrical hazard” is adefined term.



First Revision No. 117-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.6(C)(1) ]

(1) General

General .

Employees shall not enter spaces

containing

where electrical hazards exist unless illumination is provided that enables the employees to perform the worksafely.






CommitteeStatement:

The editorial revision provides clarity and consistency with the rest of the document (e.g. see 130.6(A)(1)).


Public Input No. 178-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.6(C)(1)]

of 473



First Revision No. 118-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.6(D) ]

(D) Conductive

Conductive Articles Being Worn .

Conductive articles of jewelry and clothing (such as watchbands, bracelets, rings, key chains, necklaces,metalized aprons, cloth with conductive thread, metal headgear, or metal frame glasses) shall not be worn withinthe restricted approach boundary or where they present an electrical contact hazard with exposed energizedelectrical conductors or circuit parts.






Committee Statement: This revision provides the user with a boundary that clarifies the existing requirements.


Public Input No. 46-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.6(D)]

First Revision No. 188-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.6(G) ]

(H) Clear Spaces.

Working space in front of electrical equipment required by other codes and standards shall not be used for storage.




Submittal Date: Thu Oct 04 12:45:04 EDT 2012


CommitteeStatement:

The new section on "(H) Clear Spaces" is added for clarity and consistency and to provide the user of thestandard with information on maintaining clear working space in front of electrical equipment.

ResponseMessage:

FR-188-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 189-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Sections 130.6(H), 130.6(I), 130.6(J), 130.6(K) ]

Sections 130.6(H), 130.6(I), 130.6(J), 130.6(K)

(H I ) Housekeeping Duties.

Employees shall not perform housekeeping duties inside the limited approach boundary where there is apossibility of contact with energized electrical conductors or circuit parts, unless adequate safeguards (such asinsulating equipment or barriers) are provided to prevent contact. Electrically conductive cleaning materials(including conductive solids such as steel wool, metalized cloth, and silicone carbide, as well as conductive liquidsolutions) shall not be used inside the limited approach boundary unless procedures to prevent electrical contactare followed.

(I J ) Occasional Use of Flammable Materials.

Where flammable materials are present only occasionally, electric equipment capable of igniting them shall notbe permitted to be used, unless measures are taken to prevent hazardous conditions from developing. Suchmaterials shall include, but are not limited to, flammable gases, vapors, or liquids; combustible dust; and ignitiblefibers or flyings.

Informational Note: Electrical installation requirements for locations where flammable materials are presenton a regular basis are contained in NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.

(J K ) Anticipating Failure.

When there is evidence that electric equipment could fail and injure employees, the electric equipment shall bede-energized, unless the employer can demonstrate that de-energizing introduces additional hazards orincreased risk or is infeasible because of equipment design or operational limitation. Until the equipment is de-energized or repaired, employees shall be protected from hazards associated with the impending failure of theequipment by suitable barricades and other alerting techniques necessary for safety of the employees.

Informational Note: See 130.7(E) for alerting techniques.

(K L ) Routine Opening and Closing of Circuits.

Load-rated switches, circuit breakers, or other devices specifically designed as disconnecting means shall beused for the opening, reversing, or closing of circuits under load conditions. Cable connectors not of the load-break type, fuses, terminal lugs, and cable splice connections shall not be permitted to be used for suchpurposes, except in an emergency.




Submittal Date: Thu Oct 04 12:52:38 EDT 2012


CommitteeStatement:

The sections have been renumbered to allow for new section on "(H) Clear Spaces", which is added for clarity andconsistency and to provide the user of the standard with information on maintaining clear working space in front ofelectrical equipment.

ResponseMessage:

FR-189-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 119-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.6(L) ]

(N) Safety Interlocks. Only qualified persons following the requirements for working inside the restricted approachboundary as covered by 130.4(C) shall be permitted to defeat or bypass an electrical safety interlock over which theperson has sole control, and then only temporarily while the qualified person is working on the equipment. The safetyinterlock system shall be returned to its operable condition when the work is completed.






CommitteeStatement:

The new section on "Safety Interlocks" have been relocated from 130.3(B)(2) as a new section130.6(N).


Committee Notes:

Date Submitted By

Oct 4, 2012 [ Not Specified ] In FR-110 NFPA 70E check for consistent section renumbering.

Public Input No. 419-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.6(H)]

First Revision No. 120-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.6(L) ]

(L M ) Reclosing Circuits After Protective Device Operation.

After a circuit is de-energized by the automatic operation of a circuit protective device, the circuit shall not bemanually reenergized until it has been determined that the equipment and circuit can be safely energized. Therepetitive manual reclosing of circuit breakers or reenergizing circuits through replaced fuses shall be prohibited.When it is determined from the design of the circuit and the overcurrent devices involved that the automaticoperation of a device was caused by an overload rather than a fault condition, examination of the circuit orconnected equipment shall not be required before the circuit is reenergized.






Committee Statement: Returning to the 2009 wording provides clarity.


of 473




First Revision No. 71-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.7(C)(7)(a) ]

(a) Shock Protection.

Employees shall wear rubber insulating gloves with leather protectors where there is a danger of hand injury fromelectric shock due to contact with energized electrical conductors or circuit parts. Employees shall wear rubberinsulating gloves with leather protectors and rubber insulating sleeves where there is a danger of hand and arminjury from electric shock due to contact with energized electrical conductors or circuit parts. Rubber insulatinggloves shall be rated for the voltage for which the gloves will be exposed.

Exception: Where it is necessary to use rubber insulating gloves without leather protectors, the requirementsof ASTM F 496, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves, shall be met.

Informational Note: Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) and Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) provide further information on taskswhere rubber insulating gloves are required.






CommitteeStatement:

See FR-68 NFPA 70E-2012. Requirements for rubber insulating gloves have been removed from this table.

ResponseMessage:

FR-71-NFPA 70E-2012. The proposed deletion is made to correlate with the removal of requirements from the HRCtables. The label information required in 130.5(C) is permitted to be determined by either an incident energyanalysis or the PPE category tables.

Public Input No. 270-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. 130.7(C)(7)(a)]


(8) Foot Protection.

Where insulated footwear is used as protection against step and touch potential, dielectric overshoes footwearshall be required. Insulated soles shall not be used as primary electrical protection.

Informational Note: EH ( Electrical Hazard (EH ) shoes footwear meeting ASTM F 2413, StandardSpecification for Performance Requirements for Foot Protection , can provide a secondary source ofelectric shock protection under dry conditions.






CommitteeStatement:

The substitution of the term “shoes” with “footwear” makes the language consistent with ASTM family of standards.(See action FR 11 for global revision) Reference to “occupational” is struck out to improve clarity.

ResponseMessage:

FR-102-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473


(9) Factors

Factors in Selection of Protective Clothing .

Clothing and equipment that provide worker protection from shock and arc flash hazards shall be used. If arc-ratedclothing is required, it shall cover associated parts of the body as well as all flammable apparel while allowingmovement and visibility.

Clothing and equipment required for the degree of exposure shall be permitted to be worn alone or integrated withflammable, nonmelting apparel. Garments that are not arc rated shall not be permitted to be used to increase thearc rating of a garment or of a clothing system.

Informational Note: Protective clothing includes shirts, pants, coveralls, jackets, and parkas worn routinelyby workers who, under normal working conditions, are exposed to momentary electric arc and relatedthermal hazards. Arc-rated rainwear worn in inclement weather is included in this category of clothing.

(a) Layering. Nonmelting, flammable fiber garments shall be permitted to be used as underlayers in conjunctionwith arc-rated garments in a layered system for added protection . If nonmelting, flammable fiber garmentsare used as underlayers, the system arc rating shall be sufficient to prevent breakopen of the innermost arc-rated layer at the expected arc exposure incident energy level to prevent ignition of flammable underlayers.Garments that are not arc rated shall not be permitted to be used to increase the arc rating of a garment orof a clothing system.

Informational Note: A typical layering system might include cotton underwear, a cotton shirt andtrouser, and an arc-rated coverall. Specific tasks might call for additional arc-rated layers to achievethe required protection level.

(b) Outer Layers. Garments worn as outer layers over arc-rated clothing, such as jackets or rainwear, shallalso be made from arc-rated material.

(c) Underlayers. Meltable fibers such as acetate, nylon, polyester, polypropylene, and spandex shall not bepermitted in fabric underlayers (underwear) next to the skin.

Exception: An incidental amount of elastic used on nonmelting fabric underwear or socks shall bepermitted.

Informational Note No. 1: Arc-rated garments (for example e.g. , shirts, trousers, and coveralls) wornas underlayers that neither ignite nor melt and drip in the course of an exposure to electric arc andrelated thermal hazards generally provide a higher system arc rating than nonmelting, flammable fiberunderlayers.

Informational Note No. 2: Arc-rated underwear or undergarments used as underlayers generallyprovide a higher system arc rating than nonmelting, flammable fiber underwear or undergarmentsused as underlayers.

(d) Coverage. Clothing shall cover potentially exposed areas as completely as possible. Shirt sleeves shall befastened at the wrists, and shirts and jackets shall be closed at the neck.

(e) Fit. Tight-fitting clothing shall be avoided. Loose-fitting clothing provides additional thermal insulationbecause of air spaces. Arc-rated apparel shall fit properly such that it does not interfere with the work task.

(f) Interference. The garment selected shall result in the least interference with the task but still provide thenecessary protection. The work method, location, and task could influence the protective equipmentselected.






CommitteeStatement:

Nonmelting flammable fibers can be worn but cannot contribute to the overall arc rating of the layeringsystem.


of 473



Public Input No. 387-NFPA 70E-2012 [Sections 130.7(C)(9), 110.2(C)]


(12) Clothing and Other Apparel Not Permitted.

Clothing and other apparel (such as hard hat liners and hair nets) made from materials that do not meet therequirements of 130.7(C)(11) regarding melting , or made from materials that do not meet the flammabilityrequirements shall not be permitted to be worn.

Informational Note: Some flame-resistant fabrics, such as non-FR flame-resistant modacrylic andnondurable flame-retardant treatments of cotton, are not recommended for industrial electrical or utilityapplications.

Exception No. 1: Nonmelting, flammable (non–arc-rated) materials shall be permitted to be used as underlayersto arc-rated clothing, as described in 130.7(C)(11), and also shall be permitted to be used for Hazard/RiskCategory 0 as described in Table 130 . 7(C)(16).

Exception No. 2: Where the work to be performed inside the arc flash boundary exposes the worker to multiplehazards, such as airborne contaminants, under special permission by the authority having jurisdiction andwhere it can be shown and the risk assessment identifies that the level of protection is adequate to addressthe arc flash hazard, non–arc-rated personnel personal protective equipment (PPE) shall be permitted.






CommitteeStatement:

HRC 0 is deleted, the present text is no longer relevant. The performance of a risk assessment is theresponsibility of the employer, not the responsibility of the authority having jursidiction.

ResponseMessage:

FR-104-NFPA 70E-2012



Found 2 configuration elements matching the xpath: /systemconfig/systemhomeroot in fileC:\TerraXML\terra_view_config.xml






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed revision will align the ASTM family of standards with the most current editions. Other ASTMstandards for inclusion are ASTM F 1296, ASTM 2757 and ASTM 1449. Additional standards currently housed intable 130.7 (C)(14) shall remain and made current.

ResponseMessage:

FR-105-NFPA 70E-2012



of 473


(14) Standards Standards for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) .

Personal protective equipment (PPE) shall conform to the standards given listed in Table 130.7(C)(14).

Informational Note: Non–arc-rated or flammable fabrics are not covered by a standard any of the standardsin Table 130.7(C)(14). See 130.7(C)(11) and 130.7(C)(12).

Table 130

Replace Table 130 .7(C)(14)

Standards on Protective Equipment Subject Document Title Document Number and Revision Apparel — ArcRated Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for Wearing Apparel forUse by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards ASTM F 1506 - 10aAprons — Insulating Standard Specification for Electrically Insulating Aprons ASTM F 2677 – 08a Eye and FaceProtection — General Practice for Occupational and Educational Eye and Face Protection ANSI/ASSE Z87.1-2003 Face— Arc Rated Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating and Standard Specification for Face ProtectiveProducts ASTM F 2178 - 08 Fall Protection Standard Specifications for Personal Climbing Equipment ASTM F 887 - 10Footwear — Dielectric Specification Standard Specification for Dielectric Footwear ASTM F 1117 - 03(2008) Footwear —Dielectric Test Method Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear ASTM F 1116 -03(2008) Footwear — Standard Performance Specification Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for FootProtection ASTM F 2413 - 05 Footwear — Standard Test Method Standard Test Methods for Foot Protection ASTM F2412 - 05 Gloves — Leather Protectors Standard Specification for Leather Protectors for Rubber Insulating Gloves andMittens ASTM F 696 - 06 Gloves — Rubber Insulating Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves ASTM D 120 -09 Gloves and Sleeves — In-Service Care Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and SleevesASTM F 496 - 08 Head Protection — Hard Hats Personal Protection — Protective Headwear for IndustrialWorkers ANSI/ISEA Z89.1-2009 Rainwear — Arc Rated Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant RainwearASTM F 1891 - 06 Rubber Protective Products — Visual Inspection Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of ElectricalProtective Rubber Products ASTM F 1236 - 96(2007) Sleeves — Insulating Standard Specification for Rubber InsulatingSleeves ASTM D 1051 - 08with the table in Attachment FR114A.


FileName

Description

FR114B.docxReplaces existing Table 130.7(C)(14) with new edited Table 130.7(C)(14) - Years are shown in Informative Annex A and Informative Annex B.






CommitteeStatement:

Table 130.7(C)(14) has been revised to make updates to revision dates and titles. Two additional apparelstandards have been added.

ResponseMessage:

FR-114-NFPA 70E-2012



(15)

Selection

of 473



Selection of Personal Protective Equipment When Required for Various Tasks.

Where

(a) Alternating Current (ac) Equipment. When selected in lieu of the incident energy analysis of 130.5(B)(1),Table 130.7(C)(15)(a)

and

shall be used to identify when arc flash personal protective equipment (PPE) is required. When arc flash PPE isrequired, Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) shall be used to determine the

hazard/risk category and requirements for use of rubber insulating gloves and insulated and insulating hand tools for atask. The assumed maximum

PPE category. The estimated maximum available short-circuit current

capacities and

, maximum fault - clearing times and minimum working distances for various

tasks

ac equipment types or classifications are listed in Table 130.7(C)(15)(

a). For tasks not listed, or for power

b). An incident energy analysis shall be required in accordance with 130.5 for the following:

(1) Tasks not listed in Table 130.15(C)(15)(a)

(2) Power systems with greater than the

assumed

(1) estimated maximum available short-circuit current

capacity or

(1)

(2) Power systems with longer than the

assumed

(1) maximum fault clearing times

, an

(1)

(2) Tasks with less than the minimum working distance

(b) Direct Current (dc) Equipment. When selected in lieu of the incident energy analysis of 130.5(B)(1), Table130.7(C)(15)(c)shall be used to identify when arc flash PPE is required. When arc flash PPE is required Table130.7(C)(15)(d) shall be used to determine the PPE category. The estimated maximum available short circuitcurrent, maximum arc duration and working distances for dc equipment are listed in Table 130.7(C)(15)(d). Anincident energy analysis shall be required in accordance with 130.5 for the following:

(1) Tasks not listed in Table 130 . 15(C)(15)(c)

(2) Power systems with greater than the estimated available short circuit current;

(3) Power systems with longer than the maximum arc duration; or

(4) Tasks with less than the minimum working distance.


The hazard/risk

The PPE category, work tasks, and protective equipment

identified

provided in

Table

Table 130.7(C)(15)(a)

were identified by a task group, and the hazard/risk category, protective clothing, and equipment selected were

, Table 130.7(C)(15)(b), Table 130.7(C)(15)(c), and Table 130.7(C)(15)(d) were identified and selected, based onthe collective experience of the

task group

NFPA 70E Technical Committee . The

hazard/risk

of 473



PPE category of the protective clothing and equipment

are

is generally based on determination of the estimated exposure

levels.

In several cases, where the risk of an arc flash incident is considered low, very low, or extremely low by the task group,the hazard/risk category number has been reduced by 1, 2, or 3 numbers, respectively.

level.


The collective experience of the

task group

NFPA 70E technical committee is that, in most cases, closed doors do not provide enough protection toeliminate the need for PPE

for instances where

situations in which the state of the equipment is known to readily change (

for example

e.g. , doors open or closed, rack in or rack out).


The premise used by the

task group

NFPA 70E Technical Committee in developing the criteria discussed in Informational Note No. 1 and InformationalNote No. 2 is considered to be reasonable, based on the consensus judgment of the

full NFPA 70E Technical Committee

committee .

Table 130

Insert Attachment FR68G here, which includes Tables 130 .7(C)(15)(a)

Hazard/Risk Category Classifications and Use of Rubber Insulating Gloves and Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools-Alternating Current Equipment (Formerly, Table 130.7(C)(

9) Tasks Performed on Energized Equipment Hazard/Risk Category Rubber Insulating Gloves Insulated and InsulatingHand Tools Panelboards or other equipment rated 240 V and below

Parameters:

Maximum of 25 kA short circuit current available; maximum of 0.03 sec (2 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:19 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approachboundary 0 N N Circuit breaker (CB) or fused switch operation with covers on 0 N N CB or fused switch operation withcovers off 0 N N Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing 1 Y Y Remove/installCBs or fused switches 1 Y Y Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuitparts) 1 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuit parts) 0 N N Work onenergized electrical conductors and circuit parts of utilization equipment fed directly by a branch circuit of the panelboard1 Y Y Panelboards or other equipment rated > 240 V and up to 600 V Parameters:

Maximum of 25 kA short circuit current available; maximum of 0.03 sec (2 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:30 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approachboundary 1 N N Circuit breaker (CB) or fused switch operation with covers on 0 N N CB or fused switch operation withcovers off 1 Y N Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing 2 Y Y Remove/installCBs or fused switches 2 Y Y Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuitparts) 1 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuit parts) 0 N N Work onenergized electrical conductors and circuit parts of utilization equipment fed directly by a branch circuit of the panelboard2 Y Y 600 V class motor control centers (MCCs) Parameters:

Maximum of 65 kA short circuit current available; maximum of 0.03 sec (2 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:53 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approach boundary 1 N N CBor fused switch or starter operation with enclosure doors closed 0 N N Reading a panel meter while operating a meterswitch 0 N N CB or fused switch or starter operation with enclosure doors open 1 N N Work on energized electricalconductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing 2 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductorsand circuit parts 120 V or below, exposed 0 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuitparts >120 V, exposed 2 Y Y Application of temporary protective grounding equipment, after voltage test 2 Y N Work onenergized electrical conductors and circuit parts of utilization equipment fed directly by a branch circuit of the motor

control center 2 Y Y 600 V class motor control centers (MCCs) Parameters: of 473



control center 2 Y Y 600 V class motor control centers (MCCs) Parameters:

Maximum of 42 kA short circuit current available; maximum of 0.33 sec (20 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:165 in. Insertion or removal of individual starter “buckets” from MCC 4 Y N Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare,energized electrical conductors and circuit parts) 4 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electricalconductors and circuit parts) 1 N N 600 V class switchgear (with power circuit breakers or fused switches) and 600V class switchboards Parameters:

Maximum of 35 kA short circuit current available; maximum of up to 0.5 sec (30 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:233 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approachboundary 2 N N CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors closed 0 N N Reading a panel meter while operating ameter switch 0 N N CB or fused switch operation with enclosure doors open 1 N N Work on energized electrical conductorsand circuit parts, including voltage testing 2 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuitparts 120 V or below, exposed 0 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuit parts >120V, exposed 2 Y Y Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors open or closed 4 N N Application of temporaryprotective grounding equipment after voltage test 2 Y N Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized electricalconductors and circuit parts) 4 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuitparts) 2 N N Other 600 V class (277 V through 600 V, nominal) equipment Parameters:

Maximum of 65 kA short circuit current available; maximum of 0.03 sec (2 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 18 in.working distance (except as indicated) Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit partsusing above parameters: 53 in. Lighting or small power transformers (600 V, maximum) ?Removal of bolted covers (toexpose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuit parts) 2 N N ?Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energizedelectrical conductors and circuit parts) 1 N N ?Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltagetesting 2 Y Y ?Application of temporary protective grounding equipment, after voltage test 2 Y N Revenue meters (kW-hour,at primary voltage and current)—insertion or removal 2 Y N Cable trough or tray cover removal or installation1 N N Miscellaneous equipment cover removal or installation 1 N N Work on energized electrical conductors and circuitparts, including voltage testing 2 Y Y Application of temporary protective grounding equipment, after voltage test2 Y N Insertion or removal of plug-in devices into or from busways 2 Y N NEMA E2 (fused contactor) motor starters, 2.3kV through 7.2 kV Parameters:

Maximum of 35 kA short circuit current available; maximum of up to 0.2 sec (12 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 36 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:422 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approachboundary 3 N N Contactor operation with enclosure doors closed 0 N N Reading a panel meter while operating a meterswitch 0 N N Contactor operation with enclosure doors open 2 N N Work on energized electrical conductors and circuitparts, including voltage testing 4 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuit parts 120 Vor below, exposed 0 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuit parts >120 V,exposed 3 Y Y Insertion or removal (racking) of starters from cubicles, doors open or closed 4 N N Application of temporaryprotective grounding equipment, after voltage test 3 Y N Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized electricalconductors and circuit parts) 4 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuitparts) 3 N N Insertion or removal (racking) of starters from cubicles of arc-resistant construction, tested in accordance withIEEE C37.20.7, doors closed only 0 N N Metal clad switchgear, 1 kV through 38 kV Parameters:

Maximum of 35 kA short circuit current available; maximum of up to 0.2 sec (12 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 36 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:422 in. Perform infrared thermography and other non-contact inspections outside the restricted approachboundary 3 N N CB operation with enclosure doors closed 2 N N Reading a panel meter while operating a meterswitch 0 N N CB operation with enclosure doors open 4 N N Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts,including voltage testing 4 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuit parts 120 V orbelow, exposed 2 Y Y Work on control circuits with energized electrical conductors and circuit parts >120 V,exposed 4 Y Y Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doors open or closed 4 N N Application of temporaryprotective grounding equipment, after voltage test 4 Y N Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare, energized electricalconductors and circuit parts) 4 N N Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electrical conductors and circuitparts) 3 N N Opening voltage transformer or control power transformer compartments 4 N N Arc-resistant switchgearType 1 or 2 (for clearing times of < 0.5 sec with a perspective fault current not to exceed the arc-resistant ratingof the equipment) Parameters:

Maximum of 35 kA short circuit current available; maximum of up to 0.2 sec (12 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 36 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:422 in. CB operation with enclosure door closed 0 N N Insertion or removal (racking) of CBs from cubicles, doorsclosed 0 N N Insertion or removal of CBs from cubicles with door open 4 N N Work on control circuits with energizedelectrical conductors and circuit parts 120 V or below, exposed 2 Y Y Insertion or removal (racking) of ground and testdevice with door closed 0 N N Insertion or removal (racking) of voltage transformers on or off the bus door closed 0 N NOther equipment 1 kV through 38 kV Parameters:

Maximum of 35 kA short circuit current available; maximum of up to 0.2 sec (12 cycle) fault clearing time; minimum 36 in.working distance Potential arc flash boundary with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts using above parameters:422 in. Metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear, fused or unfused ?Switch operation of arc-resistant-type construction, testedin accordance with IEEE C37.20.7, doors closed only 0 N N ?Switch operation, doors closed 2 N N ?Work on energizedelectrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing 4 Y Y ?Removal of bolted covers (to expose bare,

of 473



energized electrical conductors and circuit parts) 4 N N ?Opening hinged covers (to expose bare, energized electricalconductors and circuit parts) 3 N N Outdoor disconnect switch operation (hookstick operated) 3 Y Y Outdoor disconnectswitch operation (gang-operated, from grade) 2 Y N Insulated cable examination, in manhole or other confined space4 Y N Insulated cable examination, in open area 2 Y N

Y = Yes (required). N: No (not required).

Notes:

(1) Rubber insulating gloves are gloves rated for the maximum line-to-line voltage upon which work will be done.

(2) Insulated and insulating hand tools are tools rated and tested for the maximum line-to-line voltage upon which work willbe done, and are manufactured and tested in accordance with ASTM F 1505, Standard Specification for Insulated andInsulating Hand Tools .

(3) The use of “N” does not indicate that rubber insulating gloves and insulated and insulating hand tools are not required inall cases. Rubber insulating gloves and insulated and insulating hand tools may be required by 130.4, 130.8 (C) (7), and130.8(D).

(4) For equipment protected by upstream current limiting fuses with arcing fault current in their current limiting range (1 ? 2 cycle fault clearing time or less), the hazard/risk category required may be reduced by one number.

(5) For power systems up to 600 V the arc flash boundary was determined by using the following information: When 0.03second trip time was used, that indicated MCC or panelboard equipment protected by a molded-case circuit breaker.Working distance used was 18 in. (455 mm). Arc gap used was 32 mm for switchgear and 25 mm for MCC and protectivedevice type 0 for all. When 0.33 or 0.5 second trip time was used, that indicated a LVPCB (drawout circuit breaker) inswitchgear. Working distance was 24 in. (610 mm). Arc gap used was 32 mm and protective device type 0 for all. Allnumbers were rounded up or down depending on closest multiple of 5.

(6) For power systems from 1 kV to 38 kV the arc flash boundary was determined by using the following information: Nomaximum values were given in the 2009 edition of NFPA 70E for short-circuit current or operating time. Two sets ofequations were performed: 35 kA AIC and 0.2 second operating time and 26 kA AIC and 0.2 second operating time. 0.2seconds was used by adding the typical maximum total clearing time of the circuit breaker to an estimated value for relayoperation. This coincides with the IEEE 1584 values of 0.18 second operating time and 0.08 tripping time rounded off. A

short-circuit current of 35 kA was used as a maximum (HRC-4 @ ~ 40 cal/cm 2 ) and 26 kA was used to compare the

effects of lowering the short circuit current (HRC-4 @ ~ 30 cal/cm 2 ). Working distance used was 36 in. (909 mm), arcgap was 6 in. (455 mm), and protective device type 0 for all.

Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) Hazard/Risk Category Classifications and Use of Rubber Insulating Gloves and Insulated andInsulating Hand Tools — Direct Current Equipment

Tasks Performed on Energized Equipment Hazard/Risk Category a Rubber Insulating Gloves b Insulated and InsulatingHand Tools Storage batteries, direct-current switchboards and other direct-current supply sources >100 V <250V Parameters:

Voltage: 250 V

Maximum arc duration and working

distance: 2 sec @ 18 in. Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing where arcingcurrent is ?1 kA and <4 kA 1 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary using above parameters at 4 kA: 36 in. Work on energizedelectrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing where arcing current is ?4 kA and <7 kA 2 Y Y Potentialarc flash boundary using above parameters at 7 kA: 48 in. Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts,including voltage testing where arcing current is ?7 kA and <15 kA 3 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary using aboveparameters at 15 kA: 72 in. Storage batteries, direct-current switchboards and other direct-current supplysources ?250 V ?600 V Parameters:

Voltage: 600 V

Maximum arc duration and working distance: 2 sec @ 18 in. Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts,including voltage testing where arcing current is ?1 kA and <1.5 kA 1 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary using aboveparameters at 1.5 kA: 36 in. Work on energized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing wherearcing current is ?1.5 kA and <3 kA 2 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary using above parameters at 3 kA: 48 in. Work onenergized electrical conductors and circuit parts, including voltage testing where arcing current is ?3 kA and <7 kA3 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary using above parameters at 7 kA: 72 in. Work on energized electrical conductors andcircuit parts, including voltage testing where arcing current is ?7 kA and <10 kA 4 Y Y Potential arc flash boundary usingabove parameters at 10 kA: 96 in.

Y: Yes (required).

a If acid exposure is possible, the clothing is required to be protected from acid and arc rated to the hazard according toASTM F 1891 or equivalent and evaluated by ASTM F 1296 for acid protection.

b In clean rooms or other electrical installations, that do not permit leather protectors for arc flash exposure, ASTM F 496is required to be followed for use of rubber insulating gloves without leather protectors, and the rubber gloves chosen arerequired to be arc rated to the potential exposure level of the hazard/risk category.

of 473



15)(b), Table 130.7(C)(15)(c) and there associated notes and informational notes.



FR68G.docx Edited tables and associated notes and informational notes.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision increases clarity and usability. The requirements for the AC table and DC table are separated into listitems for clarity and usability. The last sentence of Informational Note # 1 is deleted because it is no longerrelevant. Editorial revisions are made throughout for clarity. The separation of this requirement into two separatetables provides the user with an extremely easy to use format. The first part of this new table will aid the user in thedetermination of when an arc flash hazard exists. The second part of the table provides the PPE category. Thereare no longer multiple levels of categories for a given piece of equipment and parameters. A hazard exists or it doesnot exist. The reduction in category is removed and PPE is required for tasks/equipment that require PPE at asingle level, again increasing clarity and usability. This revision into two tables separates the determination of thelikelihood of an arc flash incident occurring from the potential severity of the incident if it does occur. The likelihoodis used to identify the need for PPE; the severity is used to identify the level of protection provided by the PPE. Thisproposed method follows accepted safety engineering principles. The existing Note 4, New Note 1 is expanded toinclude current-limiting circuit breakers, because they also limit the arcing current and reduce the opening time. A200 ampere current limiting device was chosen for this revision because most 200 ampere devices will operatewithin their current limiting range based on the table parameters. The application of this note will require a minimumPPE category 1. All references to rubber insulating gloves and insulating hands tools (including notes 1, 2 & 3) areremoved from the table. These requirements exist in 130.4. Notes 5 & 6 have been deleted. The relevant informationwas moved to the header of each section in the last revision cycle. The remaining information in Notes 5 & 6 is notrelevant to the user of the table. The arc flash boundary distances are in conformance with the NEC manual ofstyle. Arc flash boundaries were rounded up to the nearest full foot for usability where applicable. Additional textand other editorial revisions are included for clarity. The new table is limited to 15 kV because voltage levels above15 kV require special consideration including an incident energy analysis. This first revision also addresses existing130.7(C)(15)(b) for consistency. This revision to new Tables 130.7(C)(15)(c) and 130.7(C)(15)(d) to be consistentwith the new ac tables. Regarding New Table 130.7(C)(15)(d), all references to rubber insulating gloves andinsulating hands tools (including note b) are removed from the table. These requirements exist in 130.4. The arcflash boundary distances are in conformance with the NEC Style Manual. Arc flash boundaries were rounded up tothe nearest full foot for usability where applicable. The divisions of tasks are now based on short-circuit currentrather than arcing current in order to simplify use of the table. References to acid in Note 1 to the table have beenchanged to electrolyte to cover all chemicals that might be in the work area. Informational Note No. 1 was added toexplain the use of short-circuit current in the development of the table and to warn the user that use of the valuemust be done carefully. Informational Note No. 2 explains that application of the table inside an enclosure couldrequire additional evaluation. Additional text and other editorial revisions are included for clarity..

ResponseMessage:

FR-68-NFPA 70E-2012










(16)

of 473



Protective Clothing and

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) .

Once the

hazard/risk

PPE category has been identified from Table 130.7(C)(15)(

a

b )

and

or Table 130.7(C)(15)(

b

d ) (including associated notes) and the requirements of 130.7(C)(15), Table 130.7(C)(16) shall be used todetermine the required PPE for the task. Table 130.7(C)(16) lists the requirements for

protective clothing and other protective equipment

PPE based on

Hazard/Risk

PPE Categories

0

1 through 4. This clothing and equipment shall be used when working within the arc flash boundary.


See

See Annex H for a suggested simplified approach to ensure adequate PPE for electrical workers within facilitieswith large and diverse electrical systems.


The

The PPE requirements of this section are intended to protect a person from arc flash

and shock

hazards. While some situations could result in burns to the skin, even with the protection described in Table130.7(C)(16) , burn injury should be reduced and survivable. Due to the explosive effect of some arc events,physical trauma injuries could occur. The PPE requirements of this section do not address protection againstphysical trauma other than exposure to the thermal effects of an arc flash.


The

The arc rating for a particular clothing system can be obtained from the arc-rated clothing manufacturer.

Table 130.7(C)(16) Protective Clothing and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

Hazard/Risk Category Protective Clothing and PPE 0 Protective Clothing, Nonmelting or Untreated NaturalFiber (i.e., untreated cotton, wool, rayon, or silk, or blends of these materials) with a Fabric Weight of

at Least 4.5 oz/yd 2 ?? ?Shirt (long sleeve) ?Pants (long) Protective Equipment ?Safety glasses or safetygoggles (SR) ?Hearing protection (ear canal inserts) ?Heavy duty leather gloves (AN) (See Note 1. ) 1 Arc-

Rated Clothing, Minimum Arc Rating of 4 cal/cm 2 (See Note 3.) ?Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and pants orarc-rated coverall ?Arc-rated face shield (see Note 2) or arc flash suit hood ?Arc-rated jacket, parka, rainwear, orhard hat liner (AN) Protective Equipment ?Hard hat ?Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) ? ?Hearingprotection (ear canal inserts) ?Heavy duty leather gloves (See Note 1.) ?Leather work shoes (AN) 2 Arc-Rated

Clothing, Minimum Arc Rating of 8 cal/cm 2 (See Note 3.) ?Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and pants or arc-rated coverall ?Arc-rated flash suit hood or arc-rated face shield (See Note 2) and arc-rated balaclava ?Arc-ratedjacket, parka, rainwear, or hard hat liner (AN) Protective Equipment ?Hard hat ?Safety glasses or safetygoggles (SR) ?Hearing protection (ear canal inserts) ?Heavy duty leather gloves (See Note 1.) ?Leather workshoes 3 Arc-Rated Clothing Selected so That the System Arc Rating Meets the Required Minimum Arc

Rating of 25 cal/cm 2 (See Note 3.) ?? ?Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt (AR) ?Arc-rated pants (AR) ?Arc-ratedcoverall (AR) ?Arc-rated arc flash suit jacket (AR) ?? ?Arc-rated arc flash suit pants (AR) ?Arc-rated arc flashsuit hood ?Arc-rated gloves (See Note 1.) ?Arc-rated jacket, parka, rainwear, or hard hat liner (AN) ProtectiveEquipment ??? ?Hard hat ?? ?Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) ?Hearing protection (ear canal inserts) ?Leather work shoes 4 Arc-Rated Clothing Selected so That the System Arc Rating Meets the Required

Minimum Arc Rating of 40 cal/cm 2 (See Note 3.) ?Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt (AR) ?Arc-rated pants (AR) ?Arc-rated coverall (AR) ?Arc-rated arc flash suit jacket (AR) ??? ?Arc-rated arc flash suit pants (AR) ?Arc-ratedarc flash suit hood ?Arc-rated gloves (See Note 1.) ?Arc-rated jacket, parka, rainwear, or hard hat liner (AN)Protective Equipment ?Hard hat ?Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) ?Hearing protection (ear canalinserts) ?Leather work shoes

of 473



AN: as needed (optional). AR: as required. SR: selection required.

Notes:

(1) If rubber insulating gloves with leather protectors are required by

Insert Attachment 69B here, which includes Table 130.7(C)(

9), additional leather or arc-rated gloves are not required. The combination of rubber insulating gloves with leatherprotectors satisfies the arc flash protection requirement.

(2) Face shields are to have wrap-around guarding to protect not only the face but also the forehead, ears, and neck, or,alternatively, an arc-rated arc flash suit hood is required to be worn.

(3) Arc rating is defined in Article 100 and can be either the arc thermal performance value (ATPV) or energy of breakopen threshold (E BT ). ATPV is defined in ASTM F 1959, Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Thermal

Performance Value of Materials for Clothing , as the incident energy on a material, or a multilayer system of materials,that results in a 50 percent probability that sufficient heat transfer through the tested specimen is predicted to cause the

onset of a second-degree skin burn injury based on the Stoll curve, in cal/cm 2 . E BT is defined in ASTM F 1959 as the

incident energy on a material or material system that results in a 50 percent probability of breakopen. Arc rating isreported as either ATPV or EBT, whichever is the lower value.

16) and associated notes.



FR69B.docx The attachment includes edited Table 130.7(C)(16) and associated notes.






CommitteeStatement:

The words “Protective Clothing and” are deleted to correlate with the revision in FR-68 NFPA 70E-2012. The tableno longer contains a category “0” so the text is no longer relevant. The reference to category “0” is deleted. Note 1is revised to correlate with the revision to remove requirements for rubber insulating gloves from new Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) as seen in FR-68 NFPA 70E-2012.

ResponseMessage:

FR-69-NFPA 70E-2012





of 473



(1) Insulated

Insulated Tools and Equipment .

Employees shall use insulated tools or handling equipment, or both, when working inside the

limited

restricted approach boundary of exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts where tools or handlingequipment might make accidental contact.

Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) and Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) provide further information for tasks that require insulated andinsulating hand tools.

Insulated tools shall be protected from damage to the insulating material.

Informational Note: See 130.4(B), Shock Protection Boundaries.

(a) Requirements for Insulated Tools. The following requirements shall apply to insulated tools:

(1) Insulated tools shall be rated for the voltages on which they are used.

(2) Insulated tools shall be designed and constructed for the environment to which they are exposed andthe manner in which they are used.

(3) Insulated tools and equipment shall be inspected prior to each use. The inspection shall look fordamage to the insulation or damage that may can limit the tool from performing its intended functionor could increase the potential for an incident (for example e.g. , damaged tip on a screwdriver).

(b) Fuse or Fuse Holding Fuseholder Handling Equipment. Fuse or fuseholder handling equipment, insulatedfor the circuit voltage, shall be used to remove or install a fuse if the fuse terminals are energized.

(c) Ropes and Handlines. Ropes and handlines used within the limited approach boundary of exposedenergized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 volts or more , or used where an electricalhazard exists , shall be nonconductive.

(d) Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Rods. Fiberglass-reinforced plastic rod and tube used for live-line tools shallmeet the requirements of applicable portions of electrical codes and standards dealing with electricalinstallation requirements.

Informational Note: For further information concerning electrical codes and standards dealing withinstallation requirements, refer to ASTM F 711, Standard Specification for Fiberglass-ReinforcedPlastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live Line Tools.

(e) Portable Ladders. Portable ladders shall have nonconductive side rails if they are used where the anemployee or ladder could contact exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50volts or more or where an electrical hazard exists. Nonconductive ladders shall meet the requirements of theANSI standards for ladders listed in Table 130.7(F).

(f) Protective Shields. Protective shields, protective barriers, or insulating materials shall be used to protecteach employee from shock, burns, or other electrically related injuries while that an employee is workingwithin the limited approach boundary of energized conductors or circuit parts that might be accidentallycontacted or where dangerous electric heating or arcing might occur. When normally enclosed energizedconductors or circuit parts are exposed for maintenance or repair, they shall be guarded to protectunqualified persons from contact with the energized conductors or circuit parts.

(g) Rubber Insulating Equipment. Rubber insulating equipment used for protection from accidental contact withenergized conductors or circuit parts shall meet the requirements of the ASTM standards listed in Table130.7(F).

(h) Voltage-Rated Plastic Guard Equipment. Plastic guard equipment for protection of employees fromaccidental contact with energized conductors or circuit parts , or for protection of employees or energizedequipment or material from contact with ground , shall meet the requirements of the ASTM standards listedin Table 130.7(F).

(i) Physical or Mechanical Barriers. Physical or mechanical (field-fabricated) barriers shall be installed nocloser than the restricted approach boundary distance given in Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b).While the barrier is being installed, the restricted approach boundary distance specified in Table 130.4(C)(a)and Table 130.4(C)(b) shall be maintained, or the energized conductors or circuit parts shall be placed in anelectrically safe work condition.





of 473




CommitteeStatement:

The committee’s action aligns the document with the requirement of 130.7(C)(1). The reference to the HRC tableis deleted because all requirements for insulated tools and equipment have been deleted.

ResponseMessage:

FR-106-NFPA 70E-2012



(2) Barricades.

Barricades shall be used in conjunction with safety signs where it is necessary to prevent or limit employeeaccess to work areas containing energized conductors or circuit parts. Conductive barricades shall not be usedwhere it might cause increase the likelihood of exposure to an electrical hazard. Barricades shall be placed nocloser than the limited approach boundary given in Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b). Where the arc flashboundary is greater than the limited approach boundary, barricades shall not be placed closer than the arc flashboundary.






CommitteeStatement:

The current language does not limit employee access to work areas where an arc flash hazard exists. Additionalmodifications are made for clarity and consistency in the standard.

ResponseMessage:

FR-107-NFPA 70E-2012



First Revision No. 115-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.7(F) ]

of 473



(F) Standards for Other Protective Equipment.

Other protective equipment required in 130.7(D) shall conform to the standards given in Table 130.7(F).Table 130

Replace the Table 130 .7(F)

Standards on Other Protective Equipment Subject Document Document Number and Revision Arc ProtectiveBlankets Standard Test Method for Determining the Protective Performance of an Arc Protective Blanket forElectric Arc Hazards ASTM F 2676 2009 Blankets Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets ASTM D1048 - 05 Blankets — In-service Care Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets ASTM F479 - 06 Covers Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Covers ASTM D 1049 - 98(2002)e1 Fiberglass Rods— Live-Line Tools Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used in Live LineTools ASTM F 711 - 02(2007) Insulated Hand Tools Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating HandTools ASTM F 1505 - 07 Ladders American National Standard for Ladders — Wood Safety Requirements ANSIA14.1-2007 American National Standard for Ladders — Fixed — Safety Requirements ANSI A14.3-2008 American National Standard Safety Requirements for Job Made Wooden Ladders ANSI A14.4-2009 American National Standard for Ladders — Portable Reinforced Plastic — Safety Requirements ANSIA14.5-2007 Line Hose Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hose ASTM D 1050 - 05e1 Line Hose andCovers — In-service Care Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers ASTM F478 - 09 Plastic Guard Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic GuardEquipment for Protection of Workers ASTM F 712 - 06 PVC Sheeting Standard Specification for PVC InsulatingSheeting ASTM F 1742 - 03e1 Safety Signs and Tags Series of Standards for Safety Signs and Tags ANSI Z535Series Shield Performance on Live-Line Tools Standard Test Method for Determining the Protective Performanceof a Shield Attached on Live Line Tools or on Racking Rods for Electric Arc Hazards ASTM F 2522 -05 Temporary Protective Grounds — In-service testing Standard Specification for In-Service Test Methods forTemporary Grounding Jumper Assemblies Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment ASTM F2249 - 03(2009) Temporary Protective Grounds — Test Specification Standard Specifications for TemporaryProtective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment ASTM F 855 - 09

with the Table 130.7(F) in Attachment FR115A (text to stay as is).


FileName

Description

FR115A.docxReplaces existing Table 130.7(F) with edited Table 130.7(F) - years are shown in Informative Annex A and Informative Annex B.






CommitteeStatement:

Updated revisions have been made to Table 130.7(F). An additional sheeting standard (rubber) has beenadded.




of 473



First Revision No. 130-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.8(F)(3) ]

130.9 Underground Electrical Lines and Equipment. Before excavation starts where there exists a reasonablepossibility of contacting electrical lines or equipment, the employer shall take the necessary steps to contact theappropriate owners or authorities to identify and mark the location of the electrical lines or equipment. When it has beendetermined that a risk ofcontacting electrical lines or equipment exists, appropriate safe work practices and personalprotective equipment (PPE) shall be used during the excavation.






CommitteeStatement:

The relocation of 110.5 to a dedicated section 130.9 in Article 130 for underground electrical lines increases theuseability of the document. The proposed change in wording provides clarity, the deleted text "a hazard analysisshall be performed to identify the" is redundant. Text was added to include personal protective equipment in thepresent requirement for clarity.

ResponseMessage:

FR-130-NFPA 70E-2012



First Revision No. 171-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 130.8(F)(3) ]

130.10 Cutting or Drilling. Before cutting or drilling into equipment, floors, walls or structural elementswhere a risk of contacting energized electrical lines or parts exists, the employer shall perform a riskassessment to: (1) identify and mark the location of conductors, cables, raceways, or equipment;

(2) create an electrically safe work condition; and

(3) identify safe work practices and personal protective equipment to be used






CommitteeStatement:

This new requirement describes the safe work practices to be used where an employee will penetrate a floor wallor equipment where there is a possibility of contacting energized conductors or circuit parts.

ResponseMessage:

FR-171-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 347-NFPA 70E-2012 [Article 110]

of 473




200.1 Scope.

Chapter 2 addresses the requirements that follow.

(1) Chapter 2 covers practical safety-related maintenance requirements for electrical equipment andinstallations in workplaces as included in 90.2. These requirements identify only that maintenance directlyassociated with employee safety.

(2) Chapter 2 does not prescribe specific maintenance methods or testing procedures. It is left to the employerto choose from the various maintenance methods available to satisfy the requirements of Chapter 2.

(3) Informational Note: Common industry practice is to apply local indication as to the date and overallcondition of specific devices that have been tested and maintained in the field. The local indication providesthe employee immediate indication of last maintenance date and if the tested device or system was foundacceptable on the date of test. This local information can assist the employee in the assessment of overallelectrical equipment maintenance status.

(4) For the purpose of Chapter 2, maintenance shall be defined as preserving or restoring the condition ofelectrical equipment and installations, or parts of either, for the safety of employees who work whereexposed to electrical hazards. Repair or replacement of individual portions or parts of equipment shall bepermitted without requiring modification or replacement of other portions or parts that are in a safe condition.

Informational Note: Refer to NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance,and ANSI/NETA MTS-2007, Standard for Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electrical PowerDistribution Equipment and Systems, and IEEE Std 3007.2-2010 IEEE Recommended Practice for theMaintenance of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems f or guidance on maintenance frequency,methods, and tests.






CommitteeStatement:

The addition of recently approved IEEE Std 3007.2 provides a more complete listing of applicable standards. Thenew informational note is added to provide information to the user of the standard electrical maintenance andtesting best practices that provide important local status indication of installed equipment maintenance status.

ResponseMessage:

FR-154-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




205.3 General Maintenance Requirements.

Electrical equipment shall be maintained in accordance with manufacturers' instructions or industry consensusstandards to reduce the risk of failure and the subsequent exposure of employees to electricalhazards associated with failure. The equipment owner shall be responsible for maintenance of the electricalequipment and documentation .






CommitteeStatement:

The committee has revised 205.3 to indicate that the equipment owner is responsible for equipment maintenanceand documentation. The proposed change provides clarity by eliminating redundant text. Risk associated withfailure by definition implies a likelihood of occurrence of injury or damage to health, a severity of injury or damage tohealth, or both.

ResponseMessage:

FR-155-NFPA 70E-2012.




205.7 Guarding of Energized Conductors and Circuit Parts.

Enclosures shall be maintained to guard against accidental contact with energized conductors and circuit partsand other electrical hazards. Covers and doors shall be in place with all associated fasteners and latchessecured.






Committee Statement: This is intended to clarify intent.



of 473




205.13 Single and Multiple Conductors and Cables.

Electrical cables and single and multiple conductors shall be maintained free of damage, shorts, and ground thatwould present a hazard to employees expose employees to an electrical hazard .






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity. Damage to the items listed do not present a source of harm, rather,they expose the person to a source of harm.

ResponseMessage:

FR-157-NFPA 70E-2012


First Revision No. 159-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 205.14 [Excluding any Sub-Sections] ]

Flexible cords and cables shall be maintained to avoid strain and damage to preserve insulation integrity .






CommitteeStatement:

This revision adds clarity to the intent of the requirements. Insulation integrity shall be maintained regardlessof the source of the potential harm or damage.

ResponseMessage:

FR-159-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 158-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. 205.14(1) ]

(1) Damaged Cords and Cables.

Cords and cables shall not have worn, frayed, or damaged areas that present would expose employees to anelectrical hazard to employees .






CommitteeStatement:

The revision provides clarity. Damage to the items listed do not present a source of harm, rather, theyexpose the person to a source of harm.

ResponseMessage:

FR-158-NFPA 70E-2012



(3) Repair and Replacement. Cords and cord caps for portable electrical equipment shall be repaired and replaced byqualified personnel and checked for proper polarity, grounding and continuity prior to returning to service.






CommitteeStatement:

This revision clarifies flexible cord and cable repairs and replacement is performed by a qualified person andprior to return to service is verified for proper configuration.

ResponseMessage:

FR-160-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




205.15 Overhead Line Clearances. For overhead electric lines under the employer’s control, grade elevation shall bemaintained to preserve no less than the minimum designed vertical and horizontal clearances necessary to minimize riskof unintentional contact.






CommitteeStatement:

Unintentional contact with overhead lines is the leading cause of occupational electrical fatalities in the US. Thisrevision clarifies that maintaining proper clearance of overhead lines is critical to the prevention of unintentionalcontact.

ResponseMessage:

FR-161-NFPA 70E-2012



210.1 Enclosures.

Enclosures shall be kept free of material that would create a expose employees to an electrical hazard.






CommitteeStatement:

Material in enclosures does not create a source of injury or damage to health, rather, they expose the personto a source of harm. The revision clarifies the intent.

ResponseMessage:

FR-162-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




210.5 Protective Devices.

Protective devices shall be maintained to adequately withstand or safely interrupt available fault current.

Informational Note:

Failure to properly maintain protective devices can have an adverse effect on the arc flash hazard analysisincident energy values

Improper or inadequate maintenance can result in increased opening time of the overcurrent protective device,thus increasing the incident energy .






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed revision provides clarity. The context indicates that lack of maintenance can result in anincrease in incident energy values.

ResponseMessage:

FR-163-NFPA 70E-2012



225.1 Fuses.

Fuses shall be maintained free of breaks or cracks in fuse cases, ferrules, and insulators. Fuse clips shall bemaintained to provide adequate contact with fuses. Fuseholders for current-limiting fuses shall not be modified toallow the insertion of fuses that are not current-limiting. Non-current limiting fuses shall not be modified to allowtheir insertion into current-limiting fuseholders.






Committee Statement: The revision clarifies the intent of the section.



of 473




250.1 Maintenance Requirements for Personal Safety and Protective Equipment.

Personal safety and protective equipment such as the following shall be maintained in a safe working condition:

(1) Grounding equipment

(2) Hot sticks

(3) Rubber gloves, sleeves, and leather protectors

(4) Voltage test indicators Test instruments

(5) Blanket and similar insulating equipment

(6) Insulating mats and similar insulating equipment

(7) Protective barriers

(8) External circuit breaker rack-out devices

(9) Portable lighting units

(10) Safety Temporary protective grounding equipment

(11) Dielectric footwear

(12) Protective clothing

(13) Bypass jumpers

(14) Insulated and insulating hand tools






CommitteeStatement:

Item (4) was modified to correlate with descriptive language of “test instruments” in 110.4. Item 1 is “Groundingequipment” and Item 10 is “Safety grounding equipment”. Item 10 was changed to “Temporary protective groundingequipment” to use more accepted industry terminology to identify the equipment.

ResponseMessage:

FR-165-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(B) Testing.

The insulation of protective equipment and protective tools, such as items specified in 250.1(1) through (14), thatis used as primary protection from shock hazards and requires an insulation system to ensure protection ofpersonnel, shall be verified by the appropriate test and visual inspection to ascertain that insulating capability hasbeen retained before initial use, and at intervals thereafter, as service conditions and applicable standards andinstructions require, but in no case shall the interval exceed 3 years, unless specified otherwise by the respectiveASTM standards. .






CommitteeStatement:

The revision clarifies that only personal safety and protective equipment that has an insulation component shallrequire insulation testing. Some of the equipment listed in 250.1 has insulating value but is only used for secondaryprotection from shock and has no published or accepted in-service insulation testing procedure. In these casesvisual inspection is all that is required. “Unless specified otherwise by the respective ASTM standards” was deletedas it is redundant to “applicable standards and instructions require”.

ResponseMessage:

FR-166-NFPA 70E-2012




250.4 Test Instruments. Test Instruments and associated test leads used to verify the absence or presence of voltageshall be maintained to assure functional integrity. The maintenance program shall include functional verification asdescribed in 110.4(A)(5).






CommitteeStatement:

This revision is to provide requirements for maintenance of test instruments utilized in the verification of theabsence or presence of voltages.

ResponseMessage:

FR-167-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 83-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (310.2): Battery Effect. ]

Battery

Battery Effect.

A voltage that exists on the cell line after the power supply is disconnected.

Informational Note:

Electrolytic

Electrolytic cells

could

can exhibit characteristics similar to those of an electrical storage battery , and

, thus, a hazardous voltage

a shock hazard could exist after the power supply is disconnected from the cell line.






Committee Statement: The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. Shock hazard” is a defined term


Public Input No. 187-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (310.2): Battery Effect.]


(A) General. The training requirements of this chapter shall apply to employees who are

exposed to

the risk of electrical hazard

electrical hazards in the cell line working zone defined in 110.2 and shall supplement or modify the requirementsof 120.1, 130.2, 130.3, and 130.8.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and consistency with proposed definition and the rest of the document. Thecontext indicates that the reference is to exposure to electrical hazards

ResponseMessage:

FR-84-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(B) Training Requirements. Employees shall be trained to understand the specific electrical hazardsassociated with electrical energy on the cell line. Employees shall be trained in safety-related work practicesand procedural requirements to provide protection from the electrical hazards associated with their respective jobor task assignment.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. The scope of the document is electricalhazards



of 473




(1) Training. Qualified persons shall be trained and knowledgeable in the operation of cell line working zoneequipment and specific work methods and shall be trained to avoid the electrical hazards that are present. Such persons shall be familiar with the proper use of precautionary techniques and personal protectiveequipment. Training for a qualified person shall include the following:

(1) Skills and techniques to avoid

dangerous contact with hazardous voltages between energized surfaces, and between energized

(1) a shock hazard:

(a) Between energized surfaces, which might include temporarily insulating or guarding parts to permit theemployee to work on energized parts

(b) Between energized surfaces and grounded equipment, other grounded objects, or the earth itself,

that

which might include temporarily insulating or guarding parts to permit the employee to work on energized parts

(2) Method of determining the cell line working zone area boundaries






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. Shock hazard is a defined term that describes adangerous condition. Itemizing the source of the shock hazard in a list makes it easier to identify.

ResponseMessage:

FR-86-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(1) Training.

Unqualified persons shall be trained to

recognize

identify electrical hazards to which they

may

can be exposed and the proper methods of avoiding the hazards.






Committee Statement: The proposed change is consistent with revisions made in 2009 - hazards are “identified.”




(2) In Cell Line Working Zone.

When there is a need for an unqualified person to enter the cell line working zone to perform a specific task, thatperson shall be advised

by

of the electrical hazards by the designated qualified person in charge

of the possible hazards to

to ensure that the unqualified person is safeguarded.






CommitteeStatement:

The editorial revision is proposed for clarity. As worded, it is unclear what the qualified person is in charge of: - thepossible hazards, or - informing the unqualified person of the hazards. The context indicates it is the latter.

ResponseMessage:

FR-88-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(A) General.

Operation and maintenance of electrolytic cell lines may might require contact by employees with exposedenergized surfaces such as buses, electrolytic cells, and their attachments. The approach distances referred toin Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b) shall not apply to work performed by qualified persons in the cell lineworking zone. Safeguards such as safety-related work practices and other safeguards shall be used to protectemployees from injury while working in the cell line working zone. These safeguards shall be consistent with thenature and extent of the related electrical hazards. Safeguards might be different for energized cell lines and de-energized cell lines. Hazardous battery effect voltages shall be dissipated to consider a cell line de-energized.

Informational Note No. 1: Exposed energized surfaces might not establish a hazardous condition. Ahazardous electrical condition is present an electrical hazard. Electrical hazards are related to currentflow through the body, causing shock and arc flash burns and arc blasts. Shock is a function of manyfactors, including resistance through the body and through the skin, return paths, paths in parallel with thebody, and system voltages. Arc flash burns and arc blasts are a function of the current available at thepoint involved and the time of arc exposure.

Informational Note No. 2: A cell line or group of cell lines operated as a unit for the production of aparticular metal, gas, or chemical compound might differ from other cell lines producing the same productbecause of variations in the particular raw materials used, output capacity, use of proprietary methods orprocess practices, or other modifying factors. Detailed standard electrical safety-related work practicerequirements could become overly restrictive without accomplishing the stated purpose of Chapter 1.






Committee Statement: The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. Electrical hazard is a defined term.




of 473



(1) Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Procedure. Each task performed in the electrolytic cell line working zoneshall be analyzed for the risk

likelihood of arc flash

hazard

injury. If there is

risk

a likelihood of personal injury, appropriate measures shall be taken to protect persons exposed to the arc flashhazards

. These measures shall include

, including one or more of the following:

Provide

(1) Providing appropriate personal protective equipment [see 310.5(D)(2)] to prevent injury from the arc flashhazard

.

(1)

Alter

(1) Altering work procedures to

eliminate

(1) reduce the

possibility

(1) likelihood of

the

(1) occurrence of an arc flash

hazard.

(1) incident

Schedule

(1) Scheduling the task so that work can be performed when the cell line is de-energized

.

(1)






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change provides clarity and consistency with proposed definition of risk. The word risk in this contextis only referring to the likelihood of injury. The proposed change is consistent with definitions of hazard and risk.Altering work procedures when working in an energized electrolytic cell line does not eliminate an arc flash hazard,it has the effect of reducing the likelihood of occurrence.

ResponseMessage:

FR-90-NFPA 70E-2012



of 473




(2) Routine Tasks.

Arc flash

hazard

risk

analysis

assessment shall be done for all routine tasks performed in the cell line work zone. The results of the arc flash

hazard analysis

risk assessment shall be used in training employees in job procedures that minimize the possibility of arc flashhazards. The training shall be included in the requirements of 310.3.






Committee Statement: The proposed change is consistent with definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessment.



of 473




(3) Nonroutine Tasks.

Before a nonroutine task is performed in the cell line working zone, an arc flash

hazard

risk

analysis

assessment shall be done. If an arc flash hazard is a possibility during nonroutine work, appropriate instructionsshall be given to employees involved on how to minimize the

possibility of a hazardous

risk associated with arc flash.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed change to the first sentence is consistent with definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessment. Theproposed change to the second sentence provides clarity. The context indicates that the reference is to minimizingthe risk (i.e. combination of likelihood of occurrence of harm and the severity of harm) associated with arc flash.

ResponseMessage:

FR-92-NFPA 70E-2012



(4) Arc Flash Hazards.

If the

possibility

likelihood of occurrence of an arc flash hazard exists for either routine or nonroutine tasks, employees shall useappropriate safeguards.






Committee Statement: The proposed change is consistent with definition of risk (likelihood of occurrence).



of 473




(2) Personal Protective Equipment.

Personal protective equipment (PPE) shall provide protection from

hazardous

electrical

conditions

hazards .

Personal protective equipment

PPE shall include one or more of the following, as determined by authorized management:

Shoes, boots, or overshoes

(1) Footwear for wet service

(2) Gloves for wet service

(3) Sleeves for wet service

Shoes

(1) Footwear for dry service

(2) Gloves for dry service

(3) Sleeves for dry service

(4) Electrically insulated head protection

(5) Protective clothing

(6) Eye protection with nonconductive frames

(7) Face shield (polycarbonate or similar nonmelting type)

(8) Standards for

Personal Protective Equipment

(1)

a. PPE . Personal and other protective equipment shall be appropriate for conditions, as determined byauthorized management, and shall not be required to meet the equipment standards in 130.7(C)(14)through 130.7(F) and in Table 130.7(C)(14) and Table 130.7(F) .

b. Testing of

Personal Protective Equipment. Personal protective equipment

(1)

a. PPE. PPE shall be verified with regularity and by methods that are consistent with the exposure ofemployees to

hazardous electrical conditions

(1)

a. electrical hazards .





of 473




CommitteeStatement:

Consistent use of terminology within the document and with other referenced standards that address safetyfootwear such as the ASTM family of standards. The propose change to the term "electrical hazard", which is adefined term provides clarity and consistency.

ResponseMessage:

FR-96-NFPA 70E-2012




(3) Barriers.

Barriers shall be devices that prevent contact with energized or grounded surfaces that could present

a hazardous

an electrical

condition

hazard .






Committee Statement: The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. Electrical hazard is a defined term.



of 473




(5) Isolation.

Isolation shall be the placement of equipment or items in locations such that employees are unable tosimultaneously contact exposed conductive surfaces that could present

a hazardous

an electrical

condition

hazard .






Committee Statement: The proposed change provides clarity and consistency. Electrical hazard is a defined term



First Revision No. 97-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (320.2): Prospective Fault Current. ]

Prospective Fault

Prospective Short-Circuit Current.

The highest level of fault current

that can occur

that could theoretically occur at a point on a circuit. This is the fault current that can flow in the event of a zeroimpedance short circuit and if no protection devices operate.






CommitteeStatement:

The term “prospective fault current” is defined in Article 320 but it is not used anywhere in NFPA 70E. As applied tobattery systems, the correct term would be “prospective short circuit current.” The latter is only used one time inNFPA 70E. Section 320.3(A)(4)(1) requires the value to be posted, but nowhere in the standard is the term defined.The term “short circuit current rating” is defined in Article 100. would change number of the section where the termis used.

ResponseMessage:

FR-97-NFPA 70E-2012. The informational note is not needed because the sections references closely align.

Public Input No. 278-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (320.2): Prospective Fault Current.]

of 473




(A) General Safety Hazards.

(1) Battery Room or Enclosure Requirements.

(a) Personnel Access to Energized Batteries.

Each battery room or battery enclosure shall be accessible only to authorized personnel.

(b) Illumination.

Employees shall not enter spaces containing batteries unless illumination is provided that enables the employeesto perform the work safely.

Informational Note: Battery terminals are normally exposed and pose possible shock hazard. Batteries arealso installed in steps or tiers that may cause obstructions.

(2) Apparel.

Personnel shall not wear electrically conductive objects such as jewelry while working on a battery system.

(3) Abnormal Battery Conditions.

Alarms for early warning of the following abnormal conditions of battery operation, if present, shall be testedyearly:

(1) For vented cells:

(2) Overvoltage

(3) Undervoltage

(4) Overcurrent

(5) Ground fault

(6) For VRLA cells:

(7) Overvoltage

(8) Undervoltage

(9) Overcurrent

(10) Ground fault

(11) Overtemperature, as measured at the pilot cell

(4) Warning Signs.

The following warning signs or labels shall be posted in appropriate locations:

Electrical hazard warnings indicating the shock hazard due to the battery voltage and the arc hazard due to theprospective short-circuit current

Chemical hazard warnings, applicable to the worst case when multiple battery types are installed in the same space,indicating the following: Potential presence of explosive gas (when applicable to the battery type);

Prohibition of open flame and smoking; and

Danger of chemical burns from the electrolyte (when applicable to the battery type)

Notice for personnel to use and wear protective equipment and apparel appropriate to the hazard for the battery

Notice prohibiting access to unauthorized personnel

Informational Note: Because internal resistance or prospective short circuit, or both, are not always provided onbattery container labels or data sheets, and because many variables can be introduced into a battery layout, thebattery manufacturer should be consulted for accurate data. Variables can include, but are not limited to, thefollowing:

(1) Series connections

of 473



(2) Parallel connections

(3) Charging methodology

(4) Temperature

(5) Charge status

(6) DC distribution cable size and length

Replace section as indicate in Attachment FR98A.



FR98A.docx Revised edited 320.3(A)






CommitteeStatement:

This revision adds a new requirement for a risk assessment under 320.3(A) and renumbers subsequent sections (1)through (4). Proximity to a battery system does not, by itself, constitute a risk. The types of hazards will dependupon the size (voltage), capacity (ampere-hour), and configuration of the battery (number of cells, open rack versuscabinet, etc.), as well as the type of task to be performed. These all assume that a risk assessment (whichincludes an arc flash risk assessment) has been performed. The risk assessment does not have to be repeatedevery time somebody services a battery, but the appropriate PPE should be selected based upon the riskassessment that has already been performed. It is the equipment that is tested. Current text only requires testingwhen monitoring equipment is present, but monitoring equipment is not required to be present. The lists ofconditions to test for are not all-inclusive, and they relate almost exclusively to lead-acid batteries, to the exclusionof all other battery technologies. The revised text simplifies the requirement to simply require annual testing ifbattery alarm functionality is installed. The informational note is moved because it more accurately applies toelectrical hazard warning signs.

ResponseMessage:

FR-98-NFPA 70E-2012





of 473




(B) Electrolyte Hazards.

(1) Batteries with Liquid Electrolyte.

The following protective equipment shall be available to employees performing any type of service on a batterywith liquid electrolyte:

(1) Goggles and face shield appropriate for the electrical hazard and the chemical hazard

(2) Gloves and aprons appropriate for the chemical and electrical hazards

(3) Portable or stationary water facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes and body within the workarea

(2) Batteries with Solid or Immobilized Electrolyte.

The following protective equipment shall be available to employees performing any type of service on anonspillable battery with solid or immobilized electrolyte:

(1) Goggles or face shield appropriate for the electrical hazard

(2) Gloves appropriate for the electrical and chemical hazards

(3) Protective clothing appropriate for electrical hazard

Revise section in accordance with Attachment FR99A.



FR99A.docx Revised edited 130.3(B)






CommitteeStatement:

This change clarifies the risk of handling liquid electrolyte. Section 320.3(B) currently delineates between batterieswith liquid or solid electrolyte. For the vast majority of activities involving batteries, electrolyte is not handled andthe risk of injury from electrolyte is minimal. Chemical PPE should be based on whether liquid electrolyte ishandled. Additional eyewash information was added to quantify the amount of water required which is consistentwith ANSI guidelines.

ResponseMessage:

FR-99-NFPA 70E-2012




(C) Testing, Maintenance, and Operation.

(1) Battery Short-Circuit Current.

of 473



The battery manufacturer shall be consulted regarding the sizing of the battery short-circuit protection and forbattery short-circuit current values.

(2) Direct-Current Ground-Fault Detection.

Ground-fault detection shall be based on the type of dc grounding systems utilized.

Informational Note: Not all battery systems have dc ground fault detection systems. For personnelsafety reasons, it is important to understand the grounding methodology being used and todetermine the appropriate manner of detecting ground faults. If an unintended ground developswithin the system (e.g., dirt and acid touching the battery rack), it can create a short circuit thatcould cause a fire Commonly used dc grounding systems include, but may not be limited, to thefollowing :

(1) Type 1. An ungrounded dc system, in which neither pole of the battery is connected toground. If an unintentional ground occurs at any place in the battery, an increased potentialwould exist, allowing fault current to flow between the opposite end of the battery and theground. An ungrounded dc system is typically equipped with an alarm to indicate thepresence of a ground fault.

(2) Type 2. A solidly grounded dc system, in which either the most positive or most negative poleof the battery is connected directly to ground. If an unintentional ground occurs, it introduces apath through which fault current can flow. A ground detection system is not typically used onthis type of grounded system.

(3) Type 3. A resistance grounded dc system, which is a variation of a Type 1 system, in whichthe battery is connected to ground through a resistance. Detection of a change in theresistance typically enables activation of a ground fault alarm. Introducing an unintentionalground at one point of the battery could be detected and alarmed. A second unintentionalground at a different point in the battery would create a path for short-circuit current to flow.

(4) Type 4. A solidly grounded dc system, either at the center point or at another point to suit theload system. If an unintentional ground occurs on either polarity, it introduces a path throughwhich short- circuit current can flow. A ground detection system is not typically used on thistype of grounded system.

(3 2 ) Tools and Equipment.

(a) Tools and equipment for work on batteries shall be equipped with handles listed as insulated for themaximum working voltage

(b) Battery terminals and all electrical conductors shall be kept clear of unintended contact with tools, testequipment, liquid containers, and other foreign objects.

(c) Non-sparking Nonsparking tools shall be required when the hazard identification and risk assessmentrequired by 110.7 3 (F) justify justifies their use.






CommitteeStatement:

Subdivision (1) is removed because the same information is located in 320.3(A). See committee action in FR-98NFPA 70E-2012. Additional editorial changes were made.

ResponseMessage:

FR-100-NFPA 70E-2012




of 473



First Revision No. 101-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Sections 320.3(D), 320.3(E) ]

Sections 320.3(D), 320.3(E)

(D) Cell Flame Arresters and Cell Ventilation.

Battery When present, battery cell ventilation openings shall be unobstructed, and cell flame arresters shall bemaintained.

(E) Fire Hazards.

Battery cell

. Cell flame arresters shall be inspected for proper installation and unobstructed ventilation and shall be replacedwhen necessary in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions .






CommitteeStatement:

Not all batteries have vents and/or flame arresters, and even when present (such as on VRLA batteries), inspectionmay not be feasible. If inspection reveals that a flame arrestor for some reason has become damaged or otherwisenon-functional, the appropriate action is to replace it.

ResponseMessage:

FR-101-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 287-NFPA 70E-2012 [Sections 320.3(D), 320.3(E)]

First Revision No. 123-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (330.2): Fail Safe. ]

Fail

Fail Safe.

The design consideration in which failure of a component does not

increase the hazard

create additional hazards or increased risk . In the failure mode, the system is rendered inoperative ornonhazardous.






Committee Statement: This change provides clarity and consistency with revisions made to 110.3(F) in 2009 edition.


Public Input No. 206-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (330.2): Fail Safe.]

of 473




(B) Scope of Training.

The training shall include, but is not limited to, the following:

(1) Familiarization with laser principles of operation, laser types, and laser emissions

(2) Laser safety, including the following:

a. System operating procedures

b. Hazard control identification, risk assessment, and risk control procedures

c. Need for personnel protection

d. Accident reporting procedures

e. Biological effects of the laser upon the eye and the skin

f. Electrical and other hazards associated with the laser equipment, including the following:

i. High voltages (> 1 kV) and stored energy in the capacitor banks

ii. Circuit components, such as electron tubes, with anode voltages greater than 5 kV emitting X-rays

iii. Capacitor bank explosions

iv. Production of ionizing radiation

v. Poisoning from the solvent or dye switching liquids or laser media

vi. High sound intensity levels from pulsed lasers






CommitteeStatement:

This change provides clarity and consistency with the proposed definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessmentand with risk management principles: hazards are identified, risk is assessed and controlled.

ResponseMessage:

FR-124-NFPA 70E-2012


of 473




(C) Proof of Qualification.

Proof of qualification of the laser equipment operator shall be available and in possession of the operator at alltimes readily available .






CommitteeStatement:

Requiring the operator to have possession of some proof of qualification while in a zone where the risk of hazardcould exist, could create an unnecessary exposure for the operator.

ResponseMessage:

FR-125-NFPA 70E-2012



of 473



340.5 Hazardous Effects 5 Effects of Electricity on the Human Body.

The employer and employees shall be aware of the following hazards associated with power electronicequipment.

(1) Results of Power Frequency Current power frequency current .

a. At 0.5 mA, shock is perceptible.

b. At 10 mA, a person may not be able to voluntarily let go of the hazard an energized electricalconductor or circuit part .

c. At about 40 mA, the shock, if lasting for 1 second or longer, may be fatal due to ventricular fibrillation.

d. Further increasing current leads to burns and cardiac arrest.

(2) Results of Direct Current direct current .

a. A dc current of 2 mA is perceptible.

b. A dc current of 10 40 mA is considered the threshold of the let-go current.

(3) Results of Voltage. A voltage of 30 V rms, or 60 V dc, is considered safe, except when the skin is broken.The internal body resistance can be as low as 500 ohms, so fatalities can occur.

(4) Results of Short Contact.

a. For contact less than 0.1 second and with currents just greater than 0.5 mA, ventricular fibrillationmay can occur only if the shock is received in a vulnerable part of the cardiac cycle.

b. For contact of less than 0.1 second and with currents of several amperes, ventricular fibrillation maycan occur if the shock is received in a vulnerable part of the cardiac cycle.

c. For contact of greater than 0.8 second and with currents just greater than 0.5 A, cardiac arrest(reversible) may can occur.

d. For contact greater than 0.8 second and with currents of several amperes, burns and death areprobable.

(5) Results of Alternating Current at Frequencies Above 100 Hz. When the threshold of perception increasesfrom 10 kHz to 100 kHz, the threshold of let-go current increases from 10 mA to 100 mA.

(6) Effects of Waveshape. Contact with voltages from phase controls usually causes effects between those ofac and dc sources.

(7) Effects of Capacitive Discharge.

a. A circuit of capacitance of 1 microfarad µF having a 10 - kV capacitor charge may cause ventricularfibrillation.

b. A circuit of capacitance of 20 microfarad µF having a 10 - kV capacitor charge may be dangerousand probably will cause ventricular fibrillation.






CommitteeStatement:

This change to the title provides clarity: use of "hazardous" is redundant. The change to list item (1)(b) providesclarity. The let go threshold for dc current 340.5(B)(2)(b) is increased from 10 to 40 mA to be consistent withavailable data.

ResponseMessage:

FR-126-NFPA 70E-2012




of 473



(A) Employer Responsibility.

The employer shall be responsible for the following:

(1) Proper training and supervision by properly qualified personnel , including the following:

Nature

(1)

a. Identification of

the

(1)

a. associated

hazard

(1)

a. hazards

b. Strategies to

minimize the hazard

(1)

a. reduce the risk associated with the hazards

b. Methods of avoiding or protecting against the hazard

c. Necessity of reporting any

hazardous incident

(1)

a. incident that resulted in, or could have resulted in, injury or damage to health

(2) Properly installed equipment

(3) Proper access to the equipment

(4) Availability of the correct tools for operation and maintenance

(5) Proper identification and guarding of dangerous equipment

(6) Provision of complete and accurate circuit diagrams and other published information to the employee priorto the employee starting work (The circuit diagrams should be marked to indicate the

hazardous components

(1) components that present an electrical hazard .)

(2) Maintenance of clear and clean work areas around the equipment to be worked on

(3) Provision of adequate and proper illumination of the work area






Committee Statement: These changes provide clarity and consistency with definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessment.



of 473




(B) Employee Responsibility.

The employee

is

shall be responsible for the following:

(1) Understanding the hazards associated with the work

(2) Being continuously alert and aware of the possible hazards

(3) Using the proper tools and procedures for the work

(4) Informing the employer of malfunctioning protective measures, such as faulty or inoperable enclosures andlocking schemes

(5) Examining all documents provided by the employer relevant to the work, especially those documentsindicating the

hazardous components location

(1) location of components that present an electrical hazard

(2) Maintaining good housekeeping around the equipment and work space

(3) Reporting any

hazardous incident

(1) incident that resulted in, or could have resulted in, injury or damage to health

(2) Using and appropriately maintaining the PPE and tools required to perform the work safely






Committee Statement: These changes provide clarity and consistency with definitions of hazard, risk and risk assessment.



of 473



First Revision No. 129-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Definition (350.2): Competent Person. ]

Competent

Competent Person.

A person

meeting

who meets all

of

the requirements of

a

qualified person , as defined in Article 100 in Chapter 1 of this

document

standard and who , in addition, is responsible for all work activities or safety procedures related to custom orspecial equipment

,

and has detailed knowledge regarding the exposure to electrical

hazard exposure

hazards , the appropriate

controls for mitigating

control methods to reduce the risk associated with those hazards, and the implementation of those

controls

methods .






CommitteeStatement:

This change provides clarity and consistency with the proposed definitions of hazard, risk and riskassessment, and with risk management principles.

ResponseMessage:

FR-129-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 212-NFPA 70E-2012 [Definition (350.2): Competent Person.]

of 473



First Revision No. 131-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. A.1 ]

Title of annex is to be revised to "Informative Annex A "

A .1 General.

The

This informative annex is not part of the requirements of this document and is included for information only. To theextent the documents or portions thereof listed in this informative annex are referenced within this standard

and

, those documents shall be considered part of the requirements of this document in the section and manner inwhich they are referenced .






Committee Statement: The revised text resolves a conflict between 90.3 and the previous text in A.1.


Public Input No. 94-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. A.1]


A.2 NFPA Publications.

National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471.

NFPA 70 ®, National Electrical Code ®, 2011 2014 edition.




Submittal Date: Fri Oct 05 14:34:26 EDT 2012


Committee Statement: Section A.2 is upgraded for consistency.


First Revision No. 111-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. A.3.2 ]

of 473



A.3.2 ASTM Publications.

ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

ASTM D 120-09 , Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Gloves(R 2006) , 2009

ASTM D 1048, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Blankets, 2005 2011 .

ASTM D 1049, Standard Specification for Rubber Covers, 1998 (R 2002 2010 ).

ASTM D 1050, Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Line Hoses, 2005 (R 2011) .

ASTM D 1051-08 , Standard Specification for Rubber Insulating Sleeves, 2008 .

ASTM F 478-09 , Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Line Hose and Covers(R , 2009) .

ASTM F 479, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Blankets, 2006 (R 2011) .

ASTM F 496-08 , Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves, 2008 .

ASTM F 696, Standard Specification for Leather Protectors for Rubber Insulating Gloves and Mittens, 2006 (R2011) .

ASTM F 711, Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used; in Live LineTools, 2002 (R 2007).

ASTM F 712, Standard Test Methods and Specifications for Electrically Insulating Plastic Guard Equipment forProtection of Workers, 2006 (R 2011) .

ASTM F 855-09 , Standard Specification for Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized ElectricPower Lines and Equipment, 2009 .

ASTM F 887-10 , Standard Specification for Personal Climbing Equipment, 2011 .

ASTM F 1116-03 (2008) , Standard Test Method for Determining Dielectric Strength of Dielectric Footwear, 2003(R 2008) .

ASTM F 1117-03 (2008) , Standard Specification for Dielectric Overshoe Footwear, 2003 (R2008) .

ASTM F 1236, Standard Guide for Visual Inspection of Electrical Protective Rubber Products, 1996 (R 2007) .

ASTM F 1296-08 , Standard Guide for Evaluating Chemical Protective Clothing. , 2008

ASTM F 1505, Standard Specification for Insulated and Insulating Hand Tools, 2007 2010 .

ASTM F 1506-10a , Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials forWearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related ThermalHazards, 2002a 2010a .

ASTM F 1742-03e1 , Standard Specification for PVC Insulating Sheeting, 2003 (R 2011) .

ASTM F 1891, Standard Specification for Arc and Flame Resistant Rainwear, 2006 2012 .

ASTM F 1959/F 1959M , Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Thermal Performance Value of Materialsfor Clothing, 2006 2006ae1 .

ASTM F 2178-08 , Standard Test Method for Determining the Arc Rating and Standard Specification for FaceProtective Products. , 2008

ASTM F 2249-03 (2009) , Standard Specification for In-Service Test Methods for Temporary Grounding JumperAssemblies Used on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment. , 2003 (R 2009)

ASTM F 2412, Standard Test Methods for Foot Protections, 2005 2011 .

ASTM F 2413, Standard Specification for Performance Requirements for Foot Protection , 2005 Protective(Safety) Toe Cap Footwear , 2011 .

ASTM F 2522-05 , Standard Test Method for Determining the Protective Performance of a Shield Attached onLive Line Tools or on Rack ing Rods for Electric Arc Hazards, 2005 (R 2011) .

ASTM F 2676-09 , Standard Test Method for Determining the Protective Performance of an Arc ProtectiveBlanket for Electric Arc Hazards, 2009 .

ASTM F 2677-08a , Standard Specification for Electrically Insulating Aprons, 2008a .






of 473



Committee Statement: The references to Informative Annex A are updated to reflect the most current editions.


First Revision No. 113-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. A.3.5 ]

A.3.5 IEEE Publications.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, IEEE Operations Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331,Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331.

IEEE C37.20.7, Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults, 2007.IEEE 1584, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Calculations, 2002

/Corrigendum 1, 2010 .






Committee Statement: IEEE 1584 is no longer referenced in the requirements of the body of the standard.


Public Input No. 29-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. A.3.5]


A.4 References for Extracts in Mandatory Sections.

NFPA 70 ®, National Electrical Code®, 2011 2014 edition.

NFPA 101 ® , Life Safety Code ® , 2012 edition.






Committee Statement: NFPA 101 has been removed since it is not included within the 70E Standard.


First Revision No. 133-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Annex B ]

Informative Annex

of 473



B Informational References B Informational References

B.

1 Referenced1 Referenced Publications.

The following documents or portions thereof are referenced within this standard for informational purposes only and arethus not part of the requirements of this document unless also listed in Annex A.

B.1.

1 NFPA1 NFPA Publications .


NFPA 1, Fire Code , 2012 edition.

NFPA 70 , ® National Electrical

Code ®

Code® ,

20112014 edition.

NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance,

20102013 edition.

NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery , 2012 edition.

B.1.

2 ANSI2 ANSI Publications.

American National Standards Institute, Inc., 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, New York, NY 10036.

ANSI/AIHA Z10, American National Standard for Occupational Health and Safety

and HealthManagement Systems ,

20052012 .

ANSI/ASSE Z244.1, Control of Hazardous Energy — Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods , 2003 (R 2008).

ANSI/ISO 14001, Environmental Management Systems

—Requirements with Guidance for Use , 2004/Corrigendum 1, 2009.

ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels ,

19982011 .

ANSI/NETA MTS, Standard for Maintenance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipmentand Systems,

20072011 .

B.1.

3 ASTM3 ASTM Publications.

ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

ASTM F 496, Standard Specification for In-Service Care of Insulating Gloves and Sleeves , 2006 2008 .

ASTM F 711, Standard Specification for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Rod and Tube Used; in Live LineTools , 2002 (R 2007).

ASTM F 1449, Standard Guide for Industrial Laundering of Flame, Thermal, and Arc Resistant Clothing , 2008

ASTM F 1506, Standard Performance Specification for Flame Resistant and Arc Rated Textile Materials for

Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards , of 473



Wearing Apparel for Use by Electrical Workers Exposed to Momentary Electric Arc and Related Thermal Hazards ,

20082010a .

ASTM F 2249 , Standard Specification for In-Service Test Methods for Temporary Grounding Jumper AssembliesUsed on De-Energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment , 2003 (R 2009) .

ASTM F 2413, Standard Specifications for Performance Requirements for

Foot Protection, 2005Protective (Safety) Toe Cap Footwear , 2011 .

B.1.

4 4 British Standards Institute, Occupational Health and Safety Assessment Series (OHSAS) Project GroupPublications.

British British Standards Institute, American Headquarters, 12110 Sunset Hills Road, Suite 200, Reston VA 20190-5902.

BS OSHAS 18001, Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems , 2007.

B.1.

5 5 CSA Publications.

Canadian Standards Association, 5060 Spectrum Way, Mississauga, ON L4W 5N6, Canada.

CAN/ CSA Z462, Workplace Electrical Safety , 2012.

CAN/CSA

21000,Z1000, Occupational Health and Safety Management , 2006 (R 2011).

CAN/CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code , Part 1 , 2012 .

B.1.

6 6 IEC Publications.

International Electrotechnical Commission, 3, rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland.

IEC 60204-1 ed 5.1 Consol. with am 1, Safety of Machinery

-– Electrical Equipment of Machines — Part 1: General Requirements , 2009.

B.1.

7 IEEE7 IEEE Publications.

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE Operations Center, 445 Hoes Lane, P. O. Box 1331, Piscataway,NJ 08855-1331.

ANSI/IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code ,

20072012 .

ANSI/IEEE C 37.20.6, Standard for 4.76 kV to 38 kV

-Rated Ground and Test Devices Used in Enclosures , 2007.

ANSI/IEEE C84.1, Electric Power Systems and

Equipment—Equipment – Voltage Ratings (60 Hz) , 1995.

IEEE 4, Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing, 1978.

IEEE 4A, Amendment to IEEE 4 , 2001.

IEEE 450, IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-AcidBatteries for Stationary Applications , 2002.

IEEE 484, Recommended Practice for Installation Design and Installation of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for

Stationary ApplicationsStationaryApplications , 2002 (R 2008).

IEEE 485 , IEEE Recommended Practice for Sizing Lead-Acid Storage Batteries for Stationary Applications ,1997 (R 2003).

of 473



IEEE 516, Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines , 2009.

IEEE 937, Recommended Practice for Installation and Maintenance of Lead-Acid Batteries for PhotovoltaicSystems , 2007.

IEEE 1106, IEEE Recommended Practice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of VentedNickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications , 2005.

IEEE 1184, IEEE Guide for Batteries for Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems , 2006.

IEEE 1187 , Recommended Practice for Installation Design and Installation of Valve-Regulated Lead-AcidStorage Batteries for Stationary Applications , 2002.

IEEE 1188, IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications , 2005.

IEEE 1189, IEEE Guide for Selection of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for StationaryApplications , 2007.

IEEE 1375, IEEE Guide for Protection of Stationary Battery Systems , 1998 (R 2003).

IEEE 1584, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Calculations , 2002.

IEEE 1584a, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations, Amendment 1 , 2004. 1584b, IEEE Guidefor Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations--Amendment 2: Changes to Clause 4 , 2011

IEEE 1657, Recommended Practice for Personnel Qualifications for Installation and Maintenance of StationaryBatteries, 2009.

IEEE 3007.1, IEEE Recommended Practice for the Operation and Management of Industrial and CommercialPower Systems , 2010

IEEE 3007.2, IEEE Recommended Practice for the Maintenance of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems ,2010

IEEE 3007.3, IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Safety in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems .2012

Anderson, W. E., “Risk Analysis Methodology Applied to Industrial Machine

DevelopmentDevelopment” ,

”IEEE Trans. on Industrial Applications , Vol. 41, No. 1, January/February 2005, pp. 180–187.

Ammerman, R. F.; Gammon, et al., “DC arc models and incident energy calculations,” IEEE Trans. on IndustrialApplications , Vol. 46, No. 5, 2010.

Doan, D. R, “Arc Flash Calculations for Exposures to DC Systems,” IEEE Trans. on Industrial Applications , Vol46, No. 6, 2010.

Doughty, R. L., T. E. Neal, and H. L. Floyd II, “Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric ArcHazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,” Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS

45 th

45th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference , September 28–30, 1998.

Lee,

RalphR. , “The Other Electrical Hazard: Electrical Arc Flash Burns,” IEEE Trans.

Industrial Applications , Vol. 1A-18, No. 3, May/June 1982.

B.1.

8 ISA8 ISA Publications.

Instrumentation Instrumentation , Systems, and Automation Society, 67 Alexander Drive, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.

ANSI/ISA 61010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and LaboratoryUse ,

“PartPart 1: General

RequirementsRequirement s ,

”2007.

B.1.

of 473



9 9 ISO Publications.

International Organization for Standardization, 1, Ch. de la Voie-Creuse, Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20,Switzerland.

ISO 14001:2004, Environmental Management

Systems — RequirementsSystems—Requirements with Guidance for Use . , 2004.

B.1.

10 10 NIOSH Publications.

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 1600 Clifton Road,Atlanta, GA 30333.

DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 94-110, Applications Manual for the Revised NIOSH Lifting Equation , 1994.

B.1.

11 UL11 UL Publications.

Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062-2096.

ANSI/UL 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters , 2006, revised 2010.

ANSI/UL 1203, Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in Hazardous (Classified)Locations , 2006

, Revised(R 2009 ) .

B.1.

12 U12 U .S. Government Publications.

U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.

OSHAS 18001-2007, Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems — Requirements .

Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations

, Part 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction,” and Part:

Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards

.: ”

OSHA Subpart S, “Electrical:”

1910.137,

Personal“Personal Protective Equipment

.;” and

OSHA1910.305(j)(7),

Storage“Storage Batteries . ”

OSHA 1926 Part 1926, “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction:”

Subpart k, “Electrical:”

1926 .441,

Batteries“Batteries and Battery Charging . ”

B.1.

13 Other13 Other Publications.

of 473



1.

“DC arc models and incident energy calculations,” Ammerman, R.F.; Gammon, T.; Sen, P.K.; Nelson, J.P.; Petroleumand Chemical Industry Conference, 2009, Record of Conference Papers,14–16 September 20092. “Arc Flash Calculationsfor Exposures toDC

Systems”, Doan, D.R., IEEE IAS Electrical Safety Workshop, 2007, Record of Conference Papers, March 2007. 3. DCArc Hazard Assessment Phase II Copyright Material Kinectrics Inc. Report No. K-012623-RA-0002-R00.






CommitteeStatement:

The revision dates for the references listed in Annex B are updated to the most current revision. New relevant anduseful IEEE standards supporting the implementation of the 70E requirements have been added. Certain IEEEPapers that were originally located in “Other Publications” have been moved to their more appropriate locationwithin IEEE publications.

ResponseMessage:

FR-133-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 108-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. B.1.5]





First Revision No. 134-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Annex C ]

Annex C Limits of Approach

This informative annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included for informationalpurposes only.

C.1 Preparation for Approach.

Observing a safe approach distance from exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts is an effectivemeans of maintaining electrical safety. As the distance between a person and the exposed energized conductorsor circuit parts decreases, the potential for electrical accident increases.

C.1.1 Unqualified Persons, Safe Approach Distance.

Unqualified persons are safe when they maintain a distance from the exposed energized conductors or circuitparts, including the longest conductive object being handled, so that they cannot contact or enter a specified airinsulation distance to the exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts. This safe approach distance isthe limited approach boundary. Further, persons must not cross the arc flash boundary unless they are wearingappropriate personal protective clothing and are under the close supervision of a qualified person. Only whencontinuously escorted by a qualified person should an unqualified person cross the limited approach boundary.Under no circumstance should an unqualified person cross the restricted approach boundary, where specialshock protection techniques and equipment are required.

C.1.2 Qualified Persons, Safe Approach Distance.

C.1.2.1

Determine the arc flash boundary and, if the boundary is to be crossed, appropriate arc-rated protectiveequipment must be utilized.

C.1.2.2

For a person to cross the limited approach boundary and enter the limited space, he or she must be qualified toperform the job/task.

of 473



C.1.2.3

To cross the restricted approach boundary and enter the restricted space, qualified persons must do thefollowing:

(1) Have a plan that is documented and approved by authorized management

(2) Use personal protective equipment that is appropriate for working near exposed energized conductors orcircuit parts and is rated for the voltage and energy level involved

(3) Be certain that no part of the body enters the prohibited space

(4) Minimize the risk from inadvertent movement by keeping as much of the body out of the restricted space aspossible, using only protected body parts in the space as necessary to accomplish the work

C.1.2.4

Crossing the prohibited approach boundary and entering the prohibited space is considered the same as makingcontact with exposed energized conductors or circuit parts. (See Figure C.1.2.4 .)

Therefore, qualified persons must do the following:

(1) Have specified training to work on energized conductors or circuit parts

(2) Have a documented plan justifying the need to work that close to exposed energized conductors or circuitparts

(3) Perform a risk analysis

(4) Have the plan and the risk analysis approved by authorized management

(5) Use personal protective equipment that is appropriate for working on exposed energized conductors orcircuit parts and is rated for the voltage and energy level involved

Figure C.1.2.4 Limits of Approach.

C.2 Basis for Distance Values in Table 130.2(C).

C.2.1 General Statement.

Columns 2 through 5 of Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b) show various distances from the exposed of 473



Columns 2 through 5 of Table 130.4(C)(a) and Table 130.4(C)(b) show various distances from the exposedenergized electrical conductors or circuit parts. They include dimensions that are added to a basic minimum airinsulation distance. Those basic minimum air insulation distances for voltages 72.5 kV and under are based onIEEE 4, Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing, Appendix 2B; and voltages over 72.5 kV are based onIEEE 516, Guide for Maintenance Methods on Energized Power Lines . The minimum air insulation distances thatare required to avoid flashover are as follows:

(1) ?300 V: 1 mm (0 ft 0.03 in.)

(2) >300 V to ?750 V: 2 mm (0 ft 0.07 in.)

(3) >750 V to ?2 kV: 5 mm (0 ft 0.19 in.)

(4) >2 kV to ?15 kV: 39 mm (0 ft 1.5 in.)

(5) >15 kV to ?36 kV: 161 mm (0 ft 6.3 in.)

(6) >36 kV to ?48.3 kV: 254 mm (0 ft 10.0 in.)

(7) >48.3 kV to ?72.5 kV: 381 mm (1 ft 3.0 in.)

(8) >72.5 kV to ?121 kV: 640 mm (2 ft 1.2 in.)

(9) >138 kV to ?145 kV: 778 mm (2 ft 6.6 in.)

(10) >161 kV to ?169 kV: 915 mm (3 ft 0.0 in.)

(11) >230 kV to ?242 kV: 1.281 m (4 ft 2.4 in.)

(12) >345 kV to ?362 kV: 2.282 m (7 ft 5.8 in.)

(13) >500 kV to ?550 kV: 3.112 m (10 ft 2.5 in.)

(14) >765 kV to ?800 kV: 4.225 m (13 ft 10.3 in.)

C.2.1.1 Column 1.

The voltage ranges have been selected to group voltages that require similar approach distances based on thesum of the electrical withstand distance and an inadvertent movement factor. The value of the upper limit for arange is the maximum voltage for the highest nominal voltage in the range, based on ANSI/IEEE C84.1, ElectricPower Systems and Equipment— Voltage Ratings (60 Hz). For single-phase systems, select the range that isequal to the system’s maximum phase-to-ground voltage multiplied by 1.732.

C.2.1.2 Column 2.

The distances in this column are based on OSHA’s rule for unqualified persons to maintain a 3.05 m (10 ft)clearance for all voltages up to 50 kV (voltage-to-ground), plus 102 mm (4.0 in.) for each 1 kV over 50 kV.

C.2.1.3 Column 3.

The distances in this column are based on the following:

(1) ?750 V: Use NEC Table 110.26(A)(1), Working Spaces, Condition 2, for the 151 V to 600 V range.

(2) >750 V to ?145 kV: Use NEC Table 110.34(A), Working Space, Condition 2.

(3) >145 kV: Use OSHA’s 3.05 m (10 ft) rules as used in Column 2.

C.2.1.4 Column 4.

The distances in this column are based on adding to the flashover dimensions shown above the followinginadvertent movement distance:

?300 V: Avoid contact.

Based on experience and precautions for household 120/240-V systems:

>300 V to ?750 V: Add 304.8 mm (1 ft 0 in.) for inadvertent movement.

These values have been found to be adequate over years of use in ANSI/IEEE C2, National Electrical SafetyCode, in the approach distances for communication workers.

>72.5 kV: Add 304.8 mm (1 ft 0 in.) for inadvertent movement.

These values have been found to be adequate over years of use in the National Electrical Safety Code in theapproach distances for supply workers.

of 473



C.2.1.5 Column 5.

The distances in this column are based on the following:

(1) ?300 V: Avoid contact.

(2) >300 to ?750 V: Use NEC Table 230.51(C), Clearances.

Between open conductors and surfaces, 600 V not exposed to weather.

(1) >750 V to ?2.0 kV: Select value that fits in with adjacent values.

(2) >2 kV to ?72.5 kV: Use NEC Table 490.24, Minimum Clearance of Live Parts, outdoor phase-to-groundvalues.

(3) >72.5 kV: Add 152.4 mm (0 ft 6 in.) for inadvertent movement.

These values have been found to be adequate over years of use where there has been a hazard/risk analysis,either formal or informal, of a special work procedure that allows a closer approach than that permitted by therestricted approach boundary distance.

Replace with Attachment FR134B.



FR134B.docx Revised edited Informative Annex C including revised edited figure.






CommitteeStatement:

Section C.1.2.4 has been deleted since the term “prohibited approach boundary” has been deleted. Other itemshave been added or deleted to correlate with the boundary requirements in Article 110 and 130. 1kV has beenchanged to 10 kV to properly reflect the OSHA Standard. Changes have been made to correlate with the revisedhazard and risk terminology.

ResponseMessage:

FR-134-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 76-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. C.1]

Public Input No. 90-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. C.2.1.2]



of 473



First Revision No. 137-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. D.1 ]

D.1 Introduction.

Annex D summarizes calculation methods available for calculating arc flash boundary and incident energy. It isimportant to investigate the limitations of any methods to be used. The limitations of methods summarized inAnnex D are described in Table D.1.

Table D.1 Limitation of Calculation Methods

Section Source Limitations/Parameters D.2, D.3, D.4 Ralph Lee paper Calculates arc flash boundary for arc inopen air; conservative over 600 V and becomes more conservative as voltage increases D.5 Doughty/Nealpaper Calculates incident energy for three-phase arc on systems rated 600 V and below; applies to short-circuitcurrents between 16 kA and 50 kA D.6 Ralph Lee paper Calculates incident energy for three-phase arc in open airon systems rated above 600 V; becomes more conservative as voltage increases D.7 IEEE Std. 1584 Calculatesincident energy and arc flash boundary for:

208 V to 15 kV; three-phase; 50 Hz to 60 Hz; 700 A to 106,000 A short-circuit current; and 13 mm to 152 mmconductor gaps D.8 ANSI/IEEE C2 NESC, Section 410, Table 410-1 and Table 410-2 Calculates incident energyfor open air phase-to-ground arcs 1 kV to 500 kV for live-line work

Insert revised table Attachment FR137A.



FR137A.docx Replaces exisitng Table D.1 with edited Table D.1.






CommitteeStatement:

Table D.1 has been renumbered and rearranged to reflect the new grouping. The D.8 source paper in Table D.1has been corrected to properly refer to the Direct-Current Incident Energy Calculations.

ResponseMessage:

FR-137-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 446-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. D.1]

Public Input No. 447-NFPA 70E-2012 [Sections D.2, D.3, D.4, D.5, D.6, D.7]



First Revision No. 169-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Sections D.2, D.3, D.4, D.5, D.6, D.7 ]

Sections D.2, D.3, D.4, D.5, D.6, D.7

D.2 Basic 2 Ralph Lee Calculation Method.

D.2.1 Basic Equations for Calculating Arc Flash Boundary Distances.

of 473



The short-circuit symmetrical ampacity, Isc , from a bolted three-phase fault at the transformer terminals is

calculated with the following formula:

[D.2.1 (a)]

where Isc is in amperes, V is in volts, and %Z is based on the transformer MVA.

A typical value for the maximum power, P (in MW) in a three-phase arc can be calculated using the followingformula:

[D.2.1 (b)]

[D.2.1 (c)]

The arc flash boundary distance is calculated in accordance with the following formulae:

[D.2.1 (d)]

[D.2.1 (e)]

where:

Dc = distance in feet of person from arc source for a just curable burn (that is, skin temperature remains lessthan 80°C).

MVAbf = bolted fault MVA at point involved.

MVA = = MVA rating of transformer. For transformers with MVA ratings below 0.75 MVA, multiply thetransformer MVA rating by 1.25.

t = time of arc exposure in seconds.

The clearing time for a current-limiting fuse is approximately 1⁄4 cycle or 0.004 second if the arcing fault current isin the fuse’s current-limiting range. The clearing time of a 5-kV and 15-kV circuit breaker is approximately 0.1second or 6 cycles if the instantaneous function is installed and operating. This can be broken down as follows:actual breaker time (approximately 2 cycles), plus relay operating time of approximately 1.74 cycles, plus anadditional safety margin of 2 cycles, giving a total time of approximately 6 cycles. Additional time must be addedif a time delay function is installed and operating.

The formulas used in this explanation are from Ralph Lee,“The Other Electrical Hazard: Electrical Arc BlastBurns,” in IEEE Trans. Industrial Applications. Vol. 1A-18. No. 3, Page 246, May/June 1982. The calculationsare based on the worst-case arc impedance. (See Table D.2.)

Table D.2 Flash 2.1 Flash Burn Hazard at Various Levels in a Large Petrochemical Plant

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Bus NominalVoltageLevels

System(MVA)

Transformer(MVA)

System orTransformer

(% Z)

Short-CircuitSymmetrical

(A)

Clearing Timeof Fault(cycles)

Arc FlashBoundary Typical

Distance*

SI U.S.

230 kV 9000 1.11 23,000 6.0 15 m 49.2 ft

13.8 kV 750 9.4 31,300 6.0 1.16 m 3.8 ft

Load side of all

13.8-V fuses750 9.4 31,300 1.0 184 mm 0.61 ft

4.16 kV 10.0 5.5 25,000 6.0 2.96 m 9.7 ft

4.16 kV 5.0 5.5 12,600 6.0 1.4 m 4.6 ft

Line side ofincoming

600-V fuse

2.5 5.5 44,000 60.0–120.0 7 m–11 m 23 ft–36 ft

600-V bus 2.5 5.5 44,000 0.25 268 mm 0.9 ft

600-V bus 1.5 5.5 26,000 6.0 1.6 m 5.4 ft

600-V bus 1.0 5.57 17,000 6.0 1.2 m 4 ft

*Distance from an open arc to limit skin damage to a curable second degree skin burn [less than 80°C (176°F) onskin] in free air.

of 473



D.3 Single 2.2 Single -Line Diagram of a Typical Petrochemical Complex.

The single-line diagram (see Figure D.3 2.2 ) illustrates the complexity of a distribution system in a typicalpetrochemical plant.

Figure D.3 Single 2.2 Single -Line Diagram of a Typical Petrochemical Complex.

D.4 Sample 2.3 Sample Calculation.

Many of the electrical characteristics of the systems and equipment are provided in Table D.2.1. The samplecalculation is made on the 4160-volt bus 4A or 4B. Table D.2.1 tabulates the results of calculating the arc flashboundary for each part of the system. For this calculation, based on Table D.2.1 , the following results areobtained:

(1) Calculation is made on a 4160-volt bus.

(2) Transformer MVA (and base MVA) = 10 MVA.

(3) Transformer impedance on 10 MVA base = 5.5 percent.

(4) Circuit breaker clearing time = 6 cycles.

Using Equation D.2(a), calculate the short-circuit current:

Using Equation D.2(b), calculate the power in the arc:

Using Equation D.2(d), calculate the second degree burn distance:

Or, using Equation D.2(e), calculate the second degree burn distance using an alternative method:

of 473



D.

5 Calculation

2.4 Calculation of Incident Energy Exposure Greater Than 600 V for an Arc Flash HazardAnalysis.

The equation that follows can be used to predict the incident energy produced by a three-phase arcin open air on systems rated above 600 V. The parameters required to make the calculations follow.

(1) The maximum bolted fault, three-phase short-circuit current available at the equipment.

(2) The total protective device clearing time (upstream of the prospective arc location) at themaximum short-circuit current. If the total protective device clearing time is longer than 2seconds, consider how long a person is likely to remain in the location of the arc flash. It is likelythat a person exposed to an arc flash will move away quickly if it is physically possible, and 2seconds is a reasonable maximum time for calculations. A person in a bucket truck or a personwho has crawled into equipment will need more time to move away. Sound engineeringjudgment must be used in applying the 2-second maximum clearing time, since there could becircumstances where an employee’s egress is inhibited.

(3) The distance from the arc source.

(4) Rated phase-to-phase voltage of the system.

where:

E = incident energy, cal/cm 2

F = bolted fault short-circuit current, kA

V = system phase-to-phase voltage, kV

t A = arc duration, sec

D = distance from the arc source, in.

D.3 Doughty Neal Paper

D.3.1 Calculation of Incident Energy Exposure.

The following equations can be used to predict the incident energy produced by a three-phase arc on systemsrated 600 V and below. The results of these equations might not represent the worst case in all situations. It isessential that the equations be used only within the limitations indicated in the definitions of the variables shownunder the equations. The equations must be used only under qualified engineering supervision.

Informational Note: Experimental testing continues to be performed to validate existing incident energycalculations and to determine new formulas.

The parameters required to make the calculations follow.

(1) The maximum bolted fault, three-phase short-circuit current available at the equipment and the minimumfault level at which the arc will self-sustain. (Calculations should be made using the maximum value, andthen at lowest fault level at which the arc is self-sustaining. For 480-volt systems, the industry acceptedminimum level for a sustaining arcing fault is 38 percent of the available bolted fault, three-phase short-circuit current. The highest incident energy exposure could occur at these lower levels where theovercurrent device could take seconds or minutes to open.)

(2) The total protective device clearing time (upstream of the prospective arc location) at the maximum short-circuit current, and at the minimum fault level at which the arc will sustain itself.

(3) The distance of the worker from the prospective arc for the task to be performed.

Typical working distances used for incident energy calculations are as follows:

(1) Low voltage (600 V and below) MCC and panelboards — 455 mm (18 in.)

(2) Low voltage (600 V and below) switchgear — 610 mm (24 in.)

(3) Medium voltage (above 600 V) switchgear — 910 mm (36 in.)

of 473



D.5 3 .1 Arc 2 Arc in Open Air.

The estimated incident energy for an arc in open air is as follows:

[D.5 3 .1 2 (a)]

where:

EMA = maximum open arc incident energy, cal/cm2

DA = distance from arc electrodes, in. (for distances 18 in. and greater)

tA = arc duration, sec

F = short-circuit current, kA (for the range of 16 kA to 50 kA)

Sample Calculation: Using Equation D.5.1(a), calculate the maximum open arc incident energy, cal/cm2, whereDA = 18 in., tA = 0.2 second, and F = 20 kA.

[D.5 3 .1 2 (b)]

D.5 3 .2 Arc 3 Arc in a Cubic Box.

The estimated incident energy for an arc in a cubic box (20 in. on each side, open on one end) is given in theequation that follows. This equation is applicable to arc flashes emanating from within switchgear, motor controlcenters, or other electrical equipment enclosures.

[D.5 3 .2 3 (a)]

where:

EMB = maximum 20 in. cubic box incident energy, cal/cm2

DB = distance from arc electrodes, in. (for distances 18 in. and greater)

tA = arc duration, sec

F = short-circuit current, kA (for the range of 16 kA to 50 kA)

Sample Calculation: Using Equation D.5.2(a), calculate the maximum 20 in. cubic box incident energy, cal/cm2,using the following:

(1) DB = 18 in.

(2) tA = 0.2 sec

(3) F = 20 kA

[D.5 3 .2(b)]

D.5 3 .3 Reference 4 Reference .

The equations for this section were derived in the IEEE paper by R. L. Doughty, T. E. Neal, and H. L. Floyd, II,“Predicting Incident Energy to Better Manage the Electric Arc Hazard on 600 V Power Distribution Systems,”Record of Conference Papers IEEE IAS 45th Annual Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference, September28–30, 1998.

D.

6 Calculation of Incident Energy Exposure Greater Than 600 V for an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis.

of 473



The equation that follows can be used to predict the incident energy produced by a three-phase arc in open air onsystems rated above 600 V. The parameters required to make the calculations follow.

(1) The maximum bolted fault, three-phase short-circuit current available at the equipment.

(2) The total protective device clearing time (upstream of the prospective arc location) at the maximum short-circuit current. If the total protective device clearing time is longer than 2 seconds, consider how long aperson is likely to remain in the location of the arc flash. It is likely that a person exposed to an arc flash willmove away quickly if it is physically possible, and 2 seconds is a reasonable maximum time forcalculations. A person in a bucket truck or a person who has crawled into equipment will need more time tomove away. Sound engineering judgment must be used in applying the 2-second maximum clearing time,since there could be circumstances where an employee’s egress is inhibited.

(3) The distance from the arc source.

(4) Rated phase-to-phase voltage of the system.

where:

E = incident energy, cal/cm 2

F = bolted fault short-circuit current, kA

V = system phase-to-phase voltage, kV

t A = arc duration, sec

D = distance from the arc source, in.

D.7 Basic 4 IEEE 1584 Calculation Method

D.4.1 Basic Equations for Calculating Incident Energy and Arc Flash Boundary.

This section provides excerpts from IEEE 1584 for estimating incident energy and arc flash boundaries based onstatistical analysis and curve fitting of available test data. An IEEE working group produced the data from tests itperformed to produce models of incident energy.

The complete data, including a spreadsheet calculator to solve the equations, can be found in the IEEE 1584,Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. Users are encouraged to consult the latest version of thecomplete document to understand the basis, limitation, rationale, and other pertinent information for properapplication of the standard. It can be ordered from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 445Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331.

D.7.1 System 4.1.1 System Limits.

An equation for calculating incident energy can be empirically derived using statistical analysis of raw data alongwith a curve-fitting algorithm. It can be used for systems with the following limits:

(1) 0.208 kV to 15 kV, three-phase

(2) 50 Hz to 60 Hz

(3) 700 A to 106,000 A available short-circuit current

(4) 13 mm to 152 mm conductor gaps

For three-phase systems in open-air substations, open-air transmission systems, and distribution systems, atheoretically derived model is available. This theoretically derived model is intended for use with applicationswhere faults escalate to three-phase faults. Where such an escalation is not possible or likely, or where single-phase systems are encountered, this equation will likely provide conservative results.

of 473



D.7 4 .2 Arcing 2 Arcing Current.

To determine the operating time for protective devices, find the predicted three-phase arcing current.

For applications with a system voltage under 1 kV, solve Equation D.7.2(a) as follows:

[D.7 4 .2(a)]

where:

lg= the log10

Ia= arcing current, kA

K = -0.153 for open air arcs; -0.097 for arcs-in-a-box

Ibf = bolted three-phase available short-circuit current (symmetrical rms), kA

V = system voltage, kV

G = conductor gap, mm (see Table D.7.2)

For systems greater than or equal to 1 kV, use Equation D.7.2(b):

[D.7 4 .2(b)]

This higher voltage formula is used for both open-air arcs and for arcs-in-a-box.

Convert from lg:

[D.7 4 .2(c)]

Use 0.85Ia to find a second arc duration. This second arc duration accounts for variations in the arcing current

and the time for the overcurrent device to open. Calculate the incident energy using both arc durations (Ia and

0.85 Ia ), and use the higher incident energy.

Table D.7 4 .2 Factors for Equipment and Voltage Classes

System Voltage

(kV) Type of Equipment Typical Conductor Gap (mm) Distance Exponent Factor X

Open air 10–40 2.000

0.208–1 Switchgear 32 1.473

MCCs and panels 25 1.641

Cables 13 2.000

Open air 102 2.000

>1–5 Switchgear 13–102 0.973

Cables 13 2.000

Open air 13–153 2.000

>5–15 Switchgear 153 0.973

Cables 13 2.000

of 473



D.7 4 .3 Incident Energy at Working Distance — Empirically Derived Equation.

To determine the incident energy using the empirically derived equation, determine the log10 of the normalized

incident energy. The following equation is based on data normalized for an arc time of 0.2 second and a distancefrom the possible arc point to the person of 610 mm:

[D.7 4 .3(a)]

where:

En= incident energy, normalized for time and distance, J/cm2

k1= -0.792 for open air arcs; -0.555 for arcs-in-a-box

k2= 0 for ungrounded and high-resistance grounded systems

= -0.113 for grounded systems

G = conductor gap, mm (see Table D.7 4 .2)

Then,

[D.7 4 .3(b)]

Converting from normalized:

[D.7.3 4 (c)]

where:

E = incident energy, J/cm2.

Cf = calculation factor

= 1.0 for voltages above 1 kV.

= 1.5 for voltages at or below 1 kV.

En= incident energy normalized.

t = arcing time, sec.

x= distance exponent from Table D.7 4 .2.

D= distance, mm, from the arc to the person (working distance). See Table D.7 4 .3 for typical workingdistances.

Table D.7 4 .3 Typical Working Distances

Classes of Equipment Typical Working Distance* (mm)

15-kV switchgear 910

5-kV switchgear 910

Low-voltage switchgear 610

Low-voltage MCCs and panelboards 455

Cable 455

Other To be determined in field

* Typical working distance is the sum of the distance between the worker and the front of the equipment and thedistance from the front of the equipment to the potential arc source inside the equipment.

If the arcing time, t, in Equation D.7 4 .3(c) is longer than 2 seconds, consider how long a person is likely toremain in the location of the arc flash. It is likely that a person exposed to an arc flash will move away quickly if itis physically possible, and 2 seconds is a reasonable maximum time for calculations. Sound engineeringjudgment should be used in applying the 2-second maximum clearing time, because there could becircumstances where an employee’s egress is inhibited. For example, a person in a bucket truck or a personwho has crawled into equipment will need more time to move away.

of 473



D.7 4 .4 Incident Energy at Working Distance — Theoretical Equation.

The following theoretically derived equation can be applied in cases where the voltage is over 15 kV or the gap isoutside the range:

[D.7 4 .4]

where:

E = incident energy, J/cm2


Ibf = available three-phase bolted fault current

t = arcing time, sec

D= distance (mm) from the arc to the person (working distance)

For voltages over 15 kV, arcing fault current and bolted fault current are considered equal.

D.7 4 .5 Arc Flash Boundary.

The arc flash boundary is the distance at which a person is likely to receive a second degree burn. The onset of a

second degree burn is assumed to be when the skin receives 5.0 J/cm2 of incident energy.

For the empirically derived equation,

[D.7 4 .5(a)]

For the theoretically derived equation,

[D.7 4 .5(b)]

where:

DB = distance (mm) of the arc flash boundary from the arcing point

Cf = calculation factor

= 1.0 for voltages above 1 kV

= 1.5 for voltages at or below 1 kV

En= incident energy normalized

t = time, sec

X = distance exponent from Table D.7.2

EB = incident energy in J/cm2 at the distance of the arc flash boundary


Ibf = bolted three-phase available short-circuit current

Informational Note: These equations could be used to determine whether selected personal protectiveequipment is adequate to prevent thermal injury at a specified distance in the event of an arc flash.

D.7 4 .6 Current-Limiting Fuses.

The formulas in this section were developed for calculating arc flash energies for use with current-limiting Class Land Class RK1 fuses. The testing was done at 600 V and at a distance of 455 mm, using commercially availablefuses from one manufacturer. The following variables are noted:

Ibf = available three-phase bolted fault current (symmetrical rms), kA

E = incident energy, J/cm2

of 473



(A) Class L Fuses 1601 A through 2000 A.

Where Ibf <22.6 kA, calculate the arcing current using Equation D.7.2(a), and use time-current curves to

determine the incident energy using Equations D.7 4 .3(a), D.7 4 .3(b), and D.7 4 .3(c).

Where 22.6 kA ≤Ibf ≤65.9 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(a)]

Where 65.9 kA < Ibf ≤106 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(b)]

Where Ibf >106 kA, contact the manufacturer.

(B) Class L Fuses 1201 A through 1600 A.




[D.7 4 .6(c)]


[D.7 4 .6(e)]

Where 65.9 kA <Ibf ≤106 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(f)]


(C) Class L Fuses 801 A through 1200 A.


determine the incident energy per Equations D.7 4 .3(a), D.7 4 .3(b), and D.7 4 .3(c).


[D.7 4 .6(g)]

Where 22.6 kA <Ibf ≤44.1 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(h)]


[D.7 4 .6(i)]


(D) Class L Fuses 601 A through 800 A.




[D.7 4 .6(j)]


[D.7 4 .6(k)]

Where Ibf > 106 kA, contact the manufacturer.

of 473



(E) Class RK1 Fuses 401 A through 600 A.



Where 8.5 kA ≤Ibf ≤14 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(l)]

Where 14 kA < Ibf ≤15.7 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(m)]

Where 15.7 kA < Ibf ≤22.6 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(n)]


[D.7 4 .6(o)]


(F) Class RK1 Fuses 201 A through 400 A.




[D.7 4 .6(p)]

Where 5.04 kA < Ibf ≤ 22.6 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(q)]

Where 22.6 kA <Ibf ≤ 106 kA,

[D.7 4 .6(r)]


(G) Class RK1 Fuses 101 A through 200 A.




[D.7 4 .6(s)]


[D.7 4 .6(t)]


[D.7 4 .6(u)]


of 473



(H) Class RK1 Fuses 1 A through 100 A.




[D.7 4 .6(v)]


[D.7 4 .6(w)]


[D.7 4 .6(x)]


D.7 4 .7 Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers.

The equations in Table D.7 4 .7 can be used for systems with low-voltage circuit breakers. The results of theequations will determine the incident energy and arc flash boundary when Ibf is within the range as described.

Time-current curves for the circuit breaker are not necessary within the appropriate range.

When the bolted fault current is below the range indicated, calculate the arcing current using Equation D.7 4 .2(a),and use time-current curves to determine the incident energy using Equations D.7 4 .3(a), D.7 4 .3(b), andD.7 4 .3(c).

Table D.7 4 .7 Incident Energy and Arc Flash Protection Boundary by Circuit Breaker Type and Rating

480 V and Lower 575 V–600 V

Rating

(A)Breaker

TypeTrip Unit

Type

Incident Energy

(J/cm2)a

Arc Flash

Boundary

(mm)aIncident Energy

(J/cm2)aArc Flash Boundary

(mm)a

100–400

MCCB TM or M 0.189 Ibf + 0.5489.16 Ibf +

1940.271 Ibf + 0.180 11.8 Ibf + 196

600–1200

MCCB TM or M 0.223 Ibf + 1.5908.45 Ibf +

3640.335 Ibf + 0.380 11.4 Ibf + 369

600–1200

MCCB E, LI 0.377 Ibf + 1.36012.50 Ibf +

4280.468 Ibf + 4.600 14.3 Ibf + 568

1600–6000

MCCB orICCB

TM or E, LI 0.448 Ibf + 3.00011.10 Ibf +

6960.686 Ibf + 0.165 16.7 Ibf + 606

800–6300

LVPCB E, LI 0.636 Ibf + 3.67014.50 Ibf +

7860.958 Ibf + 0.292 19.1 Ibf + 864

800–6300

LVPCB E, LSb 4.560 Ibf + 27.23047.20 Ibf +

26606.860 Ibf + 2.170 62.4 Ibf + 2930

MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

TM: Thermal-magnetic trip units.

M: Magnetic (instantaneous only) trip units.

E: Electronic trip units have three characteristics that may be used separately or in combination: L: Long time, S:Short time, I: Instantaneous.

ICCB: Insulated-case circuit breaker.

LVPCB: Low-voltage power circuit breaker.

a Ibf is in kA; working distance is 455 mm (18 in.).

b Short-time delay is assumed to be set at maximum.

The range of available three-phase bolted fault currents is from 700 A to 106,000 A. Each equation is applicablefor the following range:

where:

I1= minimum available three-phase, bolted, short-circuit current at which this method can be applied. I 1 is the

lowest available three-phase, bolted, short-circuit current level that causes enough arcing current for

of 473



instantaneous tripping to occur, or, for circuit breakers with no instantaneous trip, that causes short-timetripping to occur.

I2= interrupting rating of the circuit breaker at the voltage of interest.

To find I 1, the instantaneous trip (It ) of the circuit breaker must be found. It can be determined from the time-

current curve, or it can be assumed to be 10 times the rating of the circuit breaker for circuit breakers rated above100 amperes. For circuit breakers rated 100 amperes and below, a value of It = 1300 A can be used. When short-

time delay is utilized, It is the short-time pickup current.

The corresponding bolted fault current, Ibf , is found by solving the equation for arc current for box configurations

by substituting It for arcing current. The 1.3 factor in Equation D.7.7(b) adjusts current to the top of the tripping

band.

[D.7 4 .7(a)]

At 600 V,

[D.7 4 .7(b)]

At 480 V and lower,

[D.7 4 .7(c)]

[D.7 4 .7(d)]

D.7 4 .8 References.

The complete data, including a spreadsheet calculator to solve the equations, can be found in IEEE 1584, Guidefor Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations. IEEE publications are available from the Institute of Electrical andElectronics Engineers, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscataway, NJ 08855-1331, USA(http://standards.ieee.org/).




Submittal Date: Tue Oct 02 17:51:30 EDT 2012


CommitteeStatement:

Sections D.2 through D.8 have been renumber and retitled in order that all specific incident energy and arc flashboundary calculation methods are grouped together to provide additional clarity and useability.

ResponseMessage:

FR-169-NFPA 70E-2012



First Revision No. 170-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. D.8 ]

D.8 Direct 5 Direct -Current Incident Energy Calculations.

D.

8.1 Direct-Current Arc Flash Calculations.

of 473



D.8.1.1 Maximum 5.1 Maximum Power Method.

The following method of estimating dc arc flash incident energy that follows was presented at published in the2007 IEEE Electrical Safety Workshop IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications (see reference 2, whichfollows). This method is based on the concept that the maximum power possible in a dc arc will occur when thearcing voltage is one-half of the system voltage. Testing completed for Bruce Power (see reference 3, whichfollows) has shown that this calculation is conservatively high in estimating the arc flash value. This methodapplies to dc systems rated up to 1000 Vdc V .

where:

Iarc = arcing current , ( amperes)

Ibf = system bolted fault current , ( amperes)

IEm = estimated dc arc flash incident energy at the maximum power point , ( cal/cm2)

Vsys = system voltage , ( volts)

Tarc = arcing time , ( sec)

D= working distance , ( cm)

For exposures where the arc is in a box or enclosure, it would be prudent to use a multiplying factor of 3 for theresulting incident energy value.

D.

8

5 .

1.

2 Detailed Arcing Current and Energy Calculations Method.

A thorough theoretical review of dc arcing current and energy was

presented at

published in the

2009 IEEE PCIC Conference

IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications . Readers are advised to refer to that paper (see reference 1) forthose detailed calculations.

References:

1. “DC

arc models and incident energy calculations

-Arc Models and Incident-Energy Calculations ,” Ammerman, R.F.;

Gammon, T

et al .;

Sen, P.K.; Nelson, J.P.; Petroleum and Chemical Industry Conference, 2009, Record of Conference Papers,14–16September 2009.

IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications , Vol. 46, No.5.

2. “Arc Flash Calculations for Exposures to DC Systems,” Doan, D.R., IEEE

IAS Electrical Safety Workshop, 2007, Record of Conference Papers, March 2007.

Transactions on Industry Applications , Vol. 46, No.6.

3. " DC Arc Hazard Assessment Phase II

Copyright

", Copyrighted Material , Kinectrics Inc. , Report No. K-012623-RA-0002-R00.

D.5.3 Short Circuit Current

The determination of short circuit current is necessary in order to use Table 130.7(C)(15)(d). The arcing current iscalculated at 50% of the DC short-circuit value. The current that a battery will deliver depends on the totalresistance of the short-circuit path. A conservative approach in determining the short-circuit curren that thebattery will deliver at 25 ° C is to assume that the maximum available short-circuit current is 10 times the 1minute ampere rating (to 1.75 volts per cell at 25 ° C and the specific gravity of 1.215) of the battery. A moreaccurate value for the short-circuit current for the speciific application can be obtained from the batterymanufacturer.

References

1. IEEE 946, Recommended Practice for the Design of DC Auxiliary Powers Systems for Generating Stations.

of 473








CommitteeStatement:

The referenced paper has been published in the IEEE Transactions and the section has been updated accordingly.Section D.5.3 has been added to assist in calculating short circuit currents for stationary battery systems.Sections D.2 through D.8 have been renumbered and retitled in order that all specific incident energy and arc flashboundary calculation methods are grouped together to provide additional clarity and usability.

ResponseMessage:

FR-170-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 137-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. D.8.1.1]



First Revision No. 138-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Annex E ]

Informative Annex E Electrical Safety Program

This informative annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included for informational purposesonly.

(See 110.3 , Electrical Safety Program.)

E.

1 Typical1 Typical Electrical Safety Program Principles.

Electrical safety program principles include, but are not limited to, the following:

Inspect/evaluate(1) Inspecting and evaluating the electrical equipment

Maintain(2) Maintaining the electrical equipment’s insulation and enclosure integrity

Plan(3) Planning every job and document first-time procedures

De-energize(4) De-energizing , if possible (see 120.1 )

Anticipate(5) Anticipating unexpected events

Identify and minimize the hazard

Protect the employee(6) Identifying the electrical hazards and reduce the associated risk

(7) Protecting employees from shock, burn, blast, and other hazards due to the working environment

Use(8) Using the right tools for the job

Assess(9) Assessing people’s abilities

Audit(10) Auditing the principles

E.

2 Typical2 Typical Electrical Safety Program Controls.

Electrical safety program controls can include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) The employer develops programs, including training, and the employees apply them

of 473





(2) Employees are to be trained to be qualified for working in an environment influenced by the presence ofelectrical energy

(3) Procedures are to be used to identify the electrical hazards and to develop plans to eliminate those hazardsor to control the associated risk for those hazards that cannot be eliminated

(4) Every electrical conductor or circuit part is considered energized until

provenproved otherwise

.

No bare-hand contact is to be made with exposed energized electrical conductors or circuit parts operating at 50 voltsor more, unless the bare-hand method is properly used.

(5) De-energizing an electrical conductor or circuit part and making it safe to work on is, in itself, a potentiallyhazardous task

.

The employer develops programs, including training, and the employees apply them.

Procedures are to be used as tools to identify the hazards and to develop plans to eliminate/control the hazards.

Employees are to be trained to qualify them for working in an environment influenced by the presence of electricalenergy.

(6) Tasks to be performed on or near exposed energized electrical conductors and circuit parts are to beidentified

/and categorized

.

(7) Precautions appropriate to the working environment are to be determined and taken

(8) A logical approach is to be used to determine the

potential hazardassociated risk of each task

.

Precautions appropriate to the working environment are to be identified and used.

E.

3 Typical3 Typical Electrical Safety Program Procedures.

Electrical safety program procedures can include, but are not limited to

,determination and assessment of the following:

Purpose(1) Purpose of the task

Qualifications(2) Qualifications and number of employees to be involved

Hazardous nature and extent of task

Limits of approach

Safe(3) Identification of hazards and assessment of risks of the task

(4) Limits of approach

(5) Safe work practices to be used

Personal(6) Personal protective equipment (PPE) involved

Insulating(7) Insulating materials and tools involved

Special(8) Special precautionary techniques

Electrical

of 473



(9) Electrical single-line diagrams

Equipment(10) Equipment details

Sketches/pictures(11) Sketches or photographs of unique features

Reference(12) Reference data






CommitteeStatement:

Revisions to Annex E are made in E.2 to provide a more logical sequence of safety program controls. Revisionsare made to E.1, E.2 and E.2 to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology.

ResponseMessage:

FR-138-NFPA 70E-2012

Public Input No. 216-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. E.1]



First Revision No. 140-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Annex F ]

Annex F Hazard Analysis, Risk Estimation, and Risk Evaluation Procedure

This informative annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included for informationalpurposes only.

F.1 Risk Assessment (General).

This informative annex provides guidance regarding a qualitative approach for risk assessment, including riskestimation and risk evaluation, which can be helpful in determining the protective measures that are required toreduce the probability of harm occurring in the circumstances under consideration. In order to receive the fullbenefit of completing the risk assessment process the relationships between the source or cause of risk and theeffects of the hierarchy of controls on those causes must be understood. This annex is intended to provideguidance.

Hazard identification and risk assessment are analytical processes consisting of a number of discrete stepsintended to ensure that hazards are properly identified and analyzed with regard to their severity and theprobability of their occurrence. Once hazards have been identified and analyzed, the risk associated with thosehazards can be estimated using the parameters outlined in Figure F.2.1 . Appropriate protective measures canthen be implemented and evaluated in order to determine if adequate risk reduction has been achieved.

Hazard identification and risk assessment include a comprehensive review of the hazards, the associatedforeseeable tasks, and the protective measures that are required in order to maintain a tolerable level of risk,including the following:

(1) Identifying and analyzing electrical hazards

(2) Identifying tasks to be performed

(3) Documenting hazards associated with each task

(4) Estimating the risk for each hazard/task pair

(5) Determining the appropriate protective measures needed to adequately reduce the level of risk

Figure F.1(a) is intended to illustrate the steps to be taken and the decisions to be considered when performingan electrical work risk assessment. See 110.3 for a hazard and risk evaluation procedure. Figure F.1(b)illustrates in more detail the steps of the risk analysis, assessment, and evaluation process.

of 473



Figure F.1(a) Risk Assessment Process.

Figure F.1(b) Detailed Risk Assessment Process.

of 473



F.1.1 Responsibility.

Electrical system designers, constructors, and users have responsibilities for defining and achieving tolerablerisk. The supplier and the user either separately or jointly identify hazards, estimate risks, and reduce risks to atolerable level within the scope of their respective work activities. Although the responsibilities of the supplier andthe user differ over the life cycle of the electrical equipment, each entity should use the risk assessmentprocess.

In general, the electrical system supplier is responsible for the design, construction, and information for operationand maintenance of the electrical system, while the user is responsible for the operation and maintenance of theelectrical system.

Suppliers and users should involve qualified personnel in meeting their respective responsibilities. The supplierand user should ensure compliance with the related regulations and standards applicable to their work activity.This could include regulations and standards for a specific location, a specific application, or both.

F.2 Risk Assessment.

F.2.1 Initial Risk Estimation.

An initial estimation of risk should be carried out for each hazard. Risk related to the identified hazard should bederived by using the risk parameters that are shown in Figure F.2.1 including the following:

(1) Severity of harm, Se

(2) Probability of occurrence of that harm, which is a function of all of the following:

(3) Frequency and duration of the exposure of persons to the hazard, Fr

(4) Probability of occurrence of a hazardous event, Pr

(5) Possibilities to avoid or limit the harm, Av

Figure F.2.1 Elements of Risk.

F.2.2 Parameters Used in Risk Estimation.

In preparation for the risk assessment, parameter estimates can be entered into Table F.2.5 . These parametersshould be based on worst-case considerations for the electrical system. It may be the case that different riskreduction strategies are implemented for each hazard. The risk estimation stage is the only one at which hazardscan be eliminated, thus avoiding the need for additional protective measures, such as safeguarding orcomplementary protective measures.

F.2.3 Severity of the Possible Harm (Se).

Severity of injuries or damage to health can be estimated by taking into account reversible injuries, irreversible injuries,and death. Typically, the types of hazards to be considered include, but are not limited to, shock and electrocution,burns, and impact. Choose the appropriate value of severity from Table F.2.3 , based on the consequences of an injury,where:

(1) 8 means a fatal or a significant irreversible injury, such that it will be very difficult to continue the same work afterhealing, if at all.

(2) 6 means a major or irreversible injury, in such a way that it can be possible to continue the same work after healingand can also include a severe major but reversible injury such as broken limbs.

(3) 3 means a reversible injury, including severe lacerations, stabbing, and severe bruises, that requires attention froma medical practitioner.

(4) 1 means a minor injury, including scratches and minor bruises that require attention by first aid.

Select the appropriate row for severity of the possible harm (Se) from Table F.2.3 . Insert the appropriate number underthe Se column in Table F.2.5 .

Table F.2.3 Severity of the Possible Harm (Se) Classification

Severity (Se) Irreversible — trauma, death 8 Permanent — skeletal damage, blindness, hearing loss, third degreeburns 6 Reversible — minor impact, hearing damage, second degree burns 3 Reversible — minor laceration, bruises, first

of 473



degree burns 1

F.2.4 Probability of Occurrence of Harm.

Each of the three parameters of probability of occurrence of harm (that is, Fr, Pr, and Av) should be estimatedindependently of each other. A worst-case assumption needs to be used for each parameter to ensure that theprotective measures, determined during risk evaluation, will provide adequate risk reduction. Generally, the use ofa form of hazard/task–based evaluation is strongly recommended to ensure that proper consideration is given tothe estimation of the probability of occurrence of harm.

F.2.4.1 Frequency and Duration of Exposure (Fr).

The following aspects should be considered to determine the level of exposure:

(1) Need for access to the hazard zone based on all modes of use; for example, normal operation and maintenance

(2) Nature of access; for example, examination, repair, and trouble shooting

It should then be possible to estimate the average interval between exposures and, therefore, the average frequency ofaccess.

This factor does not include consideration of the failure of the short-circuit interruption device(s) or the failure to use theappropriate personal protective equipment.

Select the appropriate row for frequency and duration of exposure (Fr) from Table F.2.4.1 . Insert the appropriate numberunder the Fr column in Table F.2.5 .

Table F.2.4.1 Frequency and Duration of Exposure (Fr) Classification

Frequency and duration of exposure (Fr) Fr Duration > 10 min ? 1 per hour 5 > 1 per hour–? 1 per day 5 > 1 per day–? 1every 2 weeks 4 > 1 every 2 weeks–? 1 per year 3 > 1 per year 2

F.2.4.2 Probability of Occurrence of a Hazardous Event (Pr).

The occurrence of a hazardous event influences the probability of the occurrence of harm. The probability of thehazardous event occurring should describe the likelihood of the event materializing during the use or foreseeable misuse,or both, of the electrical system or process. Subjectivity may have a substantial impact on the result of the riskassessment. The use of subjective information should be minimized as far as reasonably practicable.

The probability of occurrence of the hazardous event should be estimated independently of other related parameters (Frand Av) and will typically be based on the results of the completed study of the arc flash potential. The worst-casescenario should be used for this parameter to ensure that short-circuit interruption device(s) have, where practicable, beenproperly selected and installed and will provide adequate protection.

Elements of the electrical system that are intended to ensure an intrinsically safe design shall be taken intoconsideration in the determination of the probability of the hazardous event(s) These can include, but are not limited to,the mechanical structure, electrical devices, and electronic controls integral to the system or process, or both, at thetime of the analysis. Types of components that could contribute to an inherently safe design could include, but are notlimited to, current-limiting devices, ground-fault circuit interrupters.

This parameter can be estimated by taking into account the factors that follow.

(1) The predictability of the performance of component parts of the electrical system relevant to the hazard in differentmodes of use (for example, normal operation, maintenance, fault finding).

At this point in the risk assessment process, the protective effect of any personal protective equipment and otherprotective measure should not be taken into account. This is necessary in order to estimate the amount of risk that willbe present if the personal protective equipment and other protective measures are not in place at the time of theexposure. In general terms, it must be considered whether the electrical system being assessed has the propensity toact in an unexpected manner. The electrical system performance will vary from very predictable to not predictable.Unexpected events cannot be discounted until it can be clearly demonstrated that the electrical system will perform asexpected.

Informational Note: Predictability is often linked to the complexity of the electrical system and the characteristicsof the energy supply.

(2) The specified or foreseeable characteristics of human behavior with regard to interaction with the component parts ofthe machine relevant to the hazard, which can be characterized by one or both of the following:

a. Stress (for example, due to time constraints, work task, perceived damage limitation)

b. Lack of awareness of information relevant to the hazard

Human behavior will be influenced by factors such as skills, training, experience, and complexity of themachine/process.

These attributes are not usually directly under the influence of the electrical system designer, but a task analysis willreveal activities where total awareness of all issues, including unexpected outcomes, cannot be reasonably assumed.“Very high” probability of occurrence of a hazardous event should be selected to reflect normal workplace constraints andworst-case considerations. Positive reasons (for example, well-defined application and a high level of user competence)

of 473



are required for any lower values to be used.

Any required or assumed skills, knowledge, and so forth, should be stated in the information for use.

Select the appropriate row for probability of occurrence of a hazardous event (Pr) from Table F.2.4.2 .

Indicate the appropriate risk level under the Pr column in Table F.2.5 .

Table F.2.4.2 Probability of a Hazardous Event (Pr) Classification

Pr Probability (Pr) Very high 5 Likely 4 Possible 3 Rare 2 Negligible 1

F.2.4.3 Probability of Avoiding or Limiting Harm (Av).

This parameter can be estimated by taking into account aspects of the electrical system design and its intendedapplication that can help to avoid or limit the harm from a hazard, including the examples that follow.

(1) Sudden fast or slow speed of appearance of the hazardous event; for example, an explosion caused by high faultvalues under short-circuit conditions.

(2) Spatial possibility to withdraw from the hazard.

(3) Nature of the component or system; for example, the use of touch-safe components can reduce the probability ofcontact with energized parts. Working in close proximity to high voltage can increase the probability of personnelbeing exposed to hazards due to approach to live parts.

(4) Possibility of recognition of a hazard; for example, an electrical hazard: a copper bar does not change itsappearance, whether or not it is under voltage. To recognize the presence of the hazard, one needs an instrumentto establish whether or not electrical equipment is energized; thus, both inadvertent and advertent contact need tobe considered.

Select the appropriate row for probability of avoiding or limiting harm (Av) from Table F.2.4.3 .

Insert the appropriate risk level under the Av column in Table F.2.5 .

Table F.2.4.3 Probability of Avoiding or Limiting Harm (Av) Classification

AvRisk Level Impossible 5 Rare 3 Probable 1

F.2.5 Risk Level and Probability of Harm.

Once the parameters for each hazard under consideration have been entered in Table F.2.5 , the information can beused in the first step of the risk assessment process as outlined in Figure F.1(a) .

Table F.2.5 Parameters for Determining Risk Levels and Probability of Harm (See Figure F.2.1)

Zone No. Hazard Se Fr Pr Av

F.3 Risk Reduction.

F.3.1 Protective Measures.

Once the risk prior to the application of protective measures has been estimated, all practicable efforts must bemade to reduce the risk of harm. Careful consideration of failure modes is an important part of risk reduction. Careshould be taken to ensure that both technical and behavioral failures, which could result in ineffective riskreduction, are taken into account during the risk reduction stage of the risk assessment.

Situations where hazard elimination cannot be attained typically require a balanced approach in order to reducethe probability of harm. For example, the effective control of access to an electrical system requires the use ofbarriers, awareness placards, safe operating instructions, qualification and training, and personnel protectiveequipment as required by this standard, as well as initial and refresher or periodic training for all affectedpersonnel in the area. Engineering controls alone are not sufficient in reducing the remaining risk to a tolerablelevel. Typically, all five areas of risk reduction must be implemented in order to achieve the desired result.

Consideration of all five of the items that follow is required to establish an adequate risk reduction strategy.

F.3.1.1 Engineering Controls.

Engineering controls have the potential to have a substantial impact on risk. They should, where practicable, beconsidered and analyzed. Typically, engineering controls take the form of barriers and other safeguarding devicesas described in NFPA 70 , National Electrical Code , IEC 60204-1 ed 5.1 Consol. with am 1, Safety ofMachinery — Electrical Equipment of Machines — Part 1: General Requirements, 2009 or NFPA 79, ElectricalStandard for Industrial Machinery , or a combination thereof.

F.3.1.2 Awareness Devices.

Awareness means can be used to complement the effects of engineering controls with regard to risk reduction.They should be chosen based on the design configuration for each specific application and their potentialeffectiveness during foreseen interaction. Each design and configuration could require unique awareness devicesin order to have the desired impact on risk. Typically, awareness means take the form of signs, visual alarms,audible alarms, and so forth.

of 473



F.3.1.3 Procedures.

Procedures and instructions that are required for the individual(s) to safely interact with the electrical systemshould be identified. The procedures and instructions should include descriptions of the hazards, the possiblehazardous events, hazardous situations, and the protective measures that need to be implemented. Theprocedures and instructions should also be used to communicate any foreseeable misuse of the system thatcould contribute to an increased level of risk. Typically, formal procedures should be provided in written form;however, in some cases, verbal instruction can be provided. Care should be taken in the latter case to ensure thatthe verbal instructions will have the desired impact on risk.

F.3.1.4 Training.

Training, with regard to the proper interaction and for foreseeable inappropriate interaction with the electricalsystem, must be completed. The intent of the training is to ensure that all affected personnel are able tounderstand when and how hazardous situations could arise and how to best reduce the risk associated withthose situations. Typically, training for those interacting with electrical systems will include technical informationregarding hazards or hazardous situations, or both, as well as information related to potential failure modes thatcould impact risk. This type of training generally will be provided by a trainer who has an in-depth understandingof electrical system design, as well as experience in the field of adult education. Less technical training contentcould be appropriate in situations where only awareness of electrical hazards is needed in order to ensure thatunqualified personnel do not interact with the electrical system.

F.3.1.5 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

The electrical system must be analyzed in order to determine the appropriate category of personal protectiveequipment (PPE). Once the appropriate PPE has been determined, personnel are required to maintain and use itas required in order to ensure that residual risk remains at the desired level.

F.4 Risk Evaluation.

F.4.1 Risk Evaluation.

Once the appropriate protective measures described in F.3.1 have been applied, the impact of those measures onthe elements of risk (see Figure F.2.1 ) should be taken into account. Each type of protective measure couldimpact one or more of the elements that contribute to risk. The effects on risk, or the impacts on the individualelements of risk, should be considered in the final risk estimation. The cumulative effect of the final combination ofprotective measures can then be used to estimate the residual risk. Paragraphs F.4.1.1 through F.4.1.5 provide ageneral nonexhaustive outline that can be used as a guide to the final estimation of risk.

F.4.1.1 Design — Elimination or Substitution by Design.

(a) Elimination of the hazard — impacts both severity of harm and likelihood of harm

Failure mode(s) examples:

(1) Component(s) failure

(2) Application of an incorrect construction or manufacturing specification

(3) Incorrect calculation (that is, potential energy, toxicity, strength, durability)

(4) Inadequate procurement control

(5) Incorrect or insufficient maintenance, or both

(b) Substitution — may affect severity of harm, frequency of exposure to the hazard under consideration, or thepossibility of avoiding or limiting harm, depending on which method of substitution is applied, or a combinationthereof.


(1) Unexpected or unanticipated interaction

(2) Excessive production pressure

(3) Inadequate procurement control

of 473



F.4.1.2 Design — Use of Engineering Controls.

(a) Greatest impact on the probability of a hazardous event(s) under certain circumstances

(b) No impact on severity of harm


(1) Incorrect application of construction or manufacturing specification

(2) Unanticipated tasks

(3) Incentive to circumvent or reduce effectiveness

(4) Excessive production pressure

(5) Protective system failure

F.4.1.3 Use of Systems that Increase Awareness of Potential Hazards.

(a) Potential impact on avoiding or limiting harm

(b) Potential impact on inadvertent exposure

(c) Minimal or no impact on severity of harm


(1) Too many warning signs

(2) Depreciation of effect over time

(3) Lack of understanding

F.4.1.4 Organization and Application of a Safe System of Work.

F.4.1.4.1

Personnel training.

(1) Greatest impact on avoiding or limiting harm

(2) Minimal, if any, impact on severity of harm

(3) Possible impact on the probability of a hazardous event(s) under certain circumstances


(1) Training not understood

(2) Identified hazards not clearly communicated

(3) Depreciation of effect over time

(4) Training material not current

(5) Training not consistent with instructions

(6) Training material not inclusive of detail regarding how to perform work

of 473



F.4.1.4.2

Access restrictions.

(1) Greatest impact on exposure

(2) No impact on severity of harm


(1) Work permit system does not exist

(2) Competency complacency

(3) Insufficient monitoring, control, or corrective actions, or combination thereof

F.4.1.4.3

Safe work procedures.

(1) Greatest impact on avoiding or limiting harm

(2) Minimal, if any, impact on severity of harm



(1) Inconsistent with the current culture

(2) Procedures not current or accessible

(3) Does not consider all task, hazards, or hazardous situations, or combination thereof


(5) Instructions not consistent with training content

(6) Content too general (for example, “Don’t touch the live parts, be careful.”)

F.4.1.4.4

Policies and instructions.

(1) Greatest impact on exposure


(3) Minimal or no impact on severity of harm


(1) Policies and instructions inconsistent

(2) Instructions not clearly communicated or accessible


(4) Allows personnel to make the decision to work live without adequate justification

of 473



F.4.1.5 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

(a) Greatest impact on avoiding or limiting harm

(b) Potential impact on inadvertent exposure

(c) Minimal impact on severity of harm

(d) No impact on the probability of a hazardous event(s)


(1) Reason for use not understood

(2) Creates barriers to effective completion of the work

(3) PPE specification inappropriate for the considered hazards

(4) Production pressure does not afford time to use or maintain

(5) Worker forgets to use when needed

(6) Excessive discomfort

(7) Perceived invulnerability


F.5 Risk Reduction Verification.

F.5.1 Verification.

Once the assessment has been completed and protective measures have been determined, it is imperative toensure that the protective measures are implemented prior to initiating the electrical work. While this proceduremight not result in a reduction of the PPE required, it could improve the understanding of the properties of thehazards associated with a task to a greater extent and thus allow for improvement in the implementation of theprotective measures that have been selected.

F.5.2 Auditing.

For each activity that has been assessed, it could be necessary to audit the risk reduction strategy that is applicable. Ifan audit is required, the auditing process should take place prior to commencing work on electrical systems. An exampleof a nonexhaustive audit is shown in Figure F.5.2 . Each audit process may need to be specific to the properties of theelectrical system or the task to be performed, or both.

Figure F.5.2 Sample Auditing Form.

See Attachment FR140E for revised wording and tables, and figures including global changes.



FR140E.docx This is editied Informative Annex F including global changes and edited figures.





of 473




Committee Statement: The title of Annex F is revised to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology.


Public Input No. 219-NFPA 70E-2012 [Annex F]

First Revision No. 141-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Annex G ]

Informative Annex G Sample Lockout/Tagout Procedure

This informative annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included for informational purposesonly.Lockout is the preferred method of controlling personnel exposure to electrical energy hazards. Tagout is an alternativemethod that is available to employers. To assist employers in developing a procedure that meets the requirement of 120.2of NFPA 70E , the sample procedure that follows is provided for use in lockout

orand tagout programs. This procedure can be used for a simple lockout/tagout, or as part of a complex lockout/tagout. Amore comprehensive plan will need to be developed, documented, and used for the complex lockout/tagout.

LOCKOUT (TAGOUT) PROCEDURE

FOR

ABC[ COMPANY NAME]

OR

TAGOUT PROCEDURE FOR

_____ COMPANY[COMPANY NAME]

1.

0 Purpose0 Purpose .

This procedure establishes the minimum requirements for lockout (tagout) of electrical energy sources. It is to be used toensure that conductors and circuit parts are disconnected from sources of electrical energy, locked (tagged), and testedbefore work begins where employees could be exposed to dangerous conditions. Sources of stored energy, such ascapacitors or springs, shall be relieved of their energy, and a mechanism shall be engaged to prevent the reaccumulationof energy.

2.

0 Responsibility0 Responsibility .

All employees shall be instructed in the safety significance of the lockout (tagout) procedure. All new or transferredemployees and all other persons whose work operations are or might be in the area shall be instructed in the purposeand use of this procedure. [

Include the nameName (s) of the person(s) or the job title(s) of the employee(s) with responsibility ] shall ensure that appropriate personnelreceive instructions on their roles and responsibilities. All persons installing a lockout (tagout) device shall sign theirnames and the date on the tag

([ or state how the name of the individual or person in charge will be available

)] .

3.

0 Preparation0 Preparation for Lockout (Tagout).

of 473



3.

1 Review1 Review current diagrammatic drawings (or their equivalent), tags, labels, and signs to identify and locate alldisconnecting means to determine that power is interrupted by a physical break and not de-energized by a circuitinterlock. Make a list of disconnecting means to be locked (tagged).

3.

2 Review2 Review disconnecting means to determine adequacy of their interrupting ability. Determine if it will be possible to verifya visible open point, or if other precautions will be necessary.

3.

3 3 Review other work activity to identify where and how other personnel might be exposed to

sources ofelectrical

energyhazards. Review other energy sources in the physical area to determine employee exposure to those sources of othertypes of energy. Establish energy control methods for control of other hazardous energy sources in

thearea.

3.

4 4 Provide an adequately rated

voltage detectortest instrument to test each phase conductor or circuit part to verify that they are de-energized ( see

Section11.3 ). Provide a method to determine that the

voltage detectortest instrument is operating satisfactorily.

3.

5 Where5 Where the possibility of induced voltages or stored electrical energy exists, call for grounding the phase conductors orcircuit parts before touching them. Where it could be reasonably anticipated that contact with other exposed energizedconductors or circuit parts is possible, call for applying ground connecting devices.

4.

0 Simple0 Simple Lockout/Tagout.

The simple lockout/tagout procedure will involve 1.0 through 3.0 , 5.0 through 9.0 , and 11.0 through 13.0 .

5.

0 Sequence0 Sequence of Lockout (Tagout) System Procedures.

5.

1 The1 The employees shall be notified that a lockout (tagout) system is going to be implemented and the reason therefor.The qualified employee implementing the lockout (tagout) shall know the disconnecting means location for all sources ofelectrical energy and the location of all sources of stored energy. The qualified person shall be knowledgeable of hazardsassociated with electrical energy.

5.

2 If2 If the electrical supply is energized, the qualified person shall de-energize and disconnect the electric supply andrelieve all stored energy.

5.

3 3 Wherever possible, the blades of disconnecting devices should be visually verified to be fully opened, or draw-out typecircuit breakers should be verified to be completely withdrawn to the fully disconnected position.

5.4 Lockout (tagout) all disconnecting means with lockout (tagout) devices.

of 473









Informational Note:

For For tagout, one additional safety measure must be employed, such as opening, blocking, or removing an additionalcircuit element.

5.

4 5 Attempt to operate the disconnecting means to determine that operation is prohibited.

5.

5 A voltage-detecting6 A test instrument shall be used. (

Seesee 11.3 .) Inspect the instrument for visible damage. Do not proceed if there is an indication of damage to theinstrument until an undamaged device is available.

5.

6 7 Verify proper instrument operation and then test for absence of voltage.

5.

7 8 Verify proper instrument operation after testing for absence of voltage.

5.

8 9 Where required, install a grounding equipment/conductor device on the phase conductors or circuit parts, to eliminateinduced voltage or stored energy, before touching them. Where it has been determined that contact with other exposedenergized conductors or circuit parts is possible, apply ground connecting devices rated for the available fault duty.

56 .

9 0 The equipment, the electrical source, or both are now locked out (tagged out).

6.

0 Restoring1 Restoring the Equipment, Electrical Supply, or Both to Normal Condition.

6.

1 2 After the job or task is complete, visually verify that the job or task is complete.

6.

2 3 Remove all tools, equipment, and unused materials and perform appropriate housekeeping.

6.

3 4 Remove all grounding equipment/conductors/devices.

6.

4 5 Notify all personnel involved with the job or task that the lockout (tagout) is complete, that the electrical supply isbeing restored, and that they are to remain clear of the equipment and electrical supply.

6.

5 6 Perform any quality control tests or checks on the repaired or replaced equipment, electrical supply, or both.

6.

6 7 Remove lockout (tagout) devices. The person who installed the devices is to remove them.

6.

7 8 Notify the owner of the equipment, electrical supply , or both, that the equipment, electrical supply, or both , areready to be returned to normal operation.

of 473




6.

8 9 Return the disconnecting means to their normal condition.

7.

0 Procedure0 Procedure Involving More Than One Person .

For a simple lockout/tagout , and where more than one person is involved in the job or task, each person shall install hisor her own personal lockout (tagout) device.

8.

0 Procedure0 Procedure Involving More Than One Shift.

When the lockout (tagout) extends for more than one day, it shall be verified that the lockout (tagout) is still in place atthe beginning of the next day. When the lockout (tagout) is continued on successive shifts, the lockout (tagout) isconsidered to be a complex lockout (tagout).

For a complex lockout (tagout), the person in charge shall identify the method for transfer of the lockout (tagout) and themethod of communication with all employees.

9.

0 Complex0 Complex Lockout (Tagout).

A complex lockout/tagout plan is required where one or more of the following exist:

(1) Multiple energy sources (more than one)

(2) Multiple crews

(3) Multiple crafts

(4) Multiple locations

(5) Multiple employers

(6) Unique disconnecting means

(7) Complex or particular switching sequences

(8) Lockout/tagout

continuesfor more than one shift ; that is, new shift workers

9.

1 All1 All complex lockout/tagout procedures shall require a written plan of execution. The plan shall include therequirements in 1.0 through 3.0 , 5.0 , 6.0 , and 8.0 through 12.0 .

9.

2 A2 A person in charge shall be involved with a complex lockout/tagout procedure. The person in charge shall be at theprocedure location.

9.

3 The3 The person in charge shall develop a written plan of execution and communicate that plan to all persons engaged inthe job or task. The person in charge shall be held accountable for safe execution of the complex lockout/tagout plan.The complex lockout/tagout plan must address all the concerns of employees who might be exposed, and they mustunderstand how electrical energy is controlled. The person in charge shall ensure that each person understands theelectrical hazards to which they are exposed and the safety-related work practices they are to use.

9.

4 All4 All complex lockout/tagout plans identify the method to account for all persons who might be exposed to electricalhazards in the course of the lockout/tagout.

One of the following methods is to be used:

(1) Each individual shall install his or her own personal lockout or tagout device.

(2) The person in charge shall lock his/her key in a lock box.

of 473









(3) The person in charge shall maintain a sign-in/sign-out log for all personnel entering the area.

(4) Another equally effective methodology shall be used.

9.

5 The5 The person in charge can install locks/tags or direct their installation on behalf of other employees.

9.

6 The6 The person in charge can remove locks/tags

,or direct their removal on behalf of other employees, only after all personnel are accounted for and ensured to be clear ofpotential electrical hazards.

9.

7 Where7 Where the complex lockout (tagout) is continued on successive shifts, the person in charge shall identify the methodfor transfer of the lockout and the method of communication with all employees.

10.

0 Discipline0 Discipline .

10.

1 Knowingly1 Knowingly violating this procedure will result in

_____ ([ state disciplinary actions that will be taken

)] .

10.

2 Knowingly2 Knowingly operating a disconnecting means with an installed lockout device (tagout device) will result in

_____ ([ state disciplinary actions to be taken

)] .

11.

0 Equipment0 Equipment .

11.

1 Locks1 Locks shall be

_____ ([ state type and model of selected locks

)] .

11.

2 Tags2 Tags shall be

_____ ([ state type and model to be used

)] .

11.

3 The voltage-detecting device3 The test instrument (s) to be used shall be

of 473



_____ ([ state type and model

)] .

12.

0 Review0 Review .

This procedure was last reviewed on

______[date] and is scheduled to be reviewed again on

_____[date] (not more than 1 year from the last review).

13.

0 Lockout0 Lockout /Tagout Training.

Recommended training can include, but is not limited to, the following:

(1) Recognition of lockout/tagout devices

(2) Installation of lockout/tagout devices

(3) Duty of employer in writing procedures

(4) Duty of employee in executing procedures

(5) Duty of person in charge

(6) Authorized and unauthorized removal of locks/tags

(7) Enforcement of execution of lockout/tagout procedures

Individual employee control of energy

(8) Simple lockout/tagout

(9) Complex lockout/tagout

Use(10) Use of single-line and diagrammatic drawings to identify sources of energy

Use of tags and warning signs

Release(11) Alerting techniques

(12) Release of stored energy

Personnel(13) Personnel accounting methods

Grounding(14) Temporary protective grounding equipment needs and requirements

Safe(15) Safe use of

voltage-detectingtest instruments






CommitteeStatement:

Annex G is revised to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology. Revisions are also made to correlate withchanges of the term voltage detector to “test instrument” . The visual verification of the disconnect means is addedto correlate with the lock-out tag-out procedures in Article 120.

Response FR-141-NFPA 70E-2012

of 473



Message:

Public Input No. 104-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. G.5.2]



First Revision No. 151-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. H.2 ]

H.2 Simplified Two-Category Clothing Approach for Use with Table 130.7(C)(15)(a), Table 130.7(C)(15)(b), Table 130.7(C)(15)(c), Table 130.7(C)(15)(d), and Table 130.7(C)(16).

The use of Table H.2 is a simplified approach to provide minimum personal protective equipment for electricalworkers within facilities with large and diverse electrical systems. The clothing listed in Table H.2 fulfills theminimum arc-rated clothing requirements of Table 130.7(C)(15)(a b ), Table 130.7(C)(15)(b d ), and Table 130.7(C)(16). The clothing systems listed in this table should be used with the other PPE appropriate for the hazard/riskcategory [see Table 130.7(C)(16)]. The notes to Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) , and Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) , must applyas shown in that table.

Table H.2 Simplified, Two-Category, Arc-Rated Clothing System

Clothinga Applicable Tasks

Everyday Work Clothing

Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt with Arc arc -rated pants (minimumarc rating of 8)

or

Arc-rated coveralls (minimum arc rating of 8)

All Hazard/Risk Category 1 and Hazard/RiskCategory 2 tasks listed in Table 130.7(C)(15)(a)

and Table 130.7(C)(15)(b)b

Arc Flash Suit

A total clothing system consisting of arc-rated shirt and pantsand/or arc-rated coveralls and/or arc flash coat and pants

(clothing system minimum arc rating of 40)

All Hazard/Risk Category 3 and Hazard/RiskCategory 4 tasks listed in Table 130.7(C)(15)(a)

and Table 130.7(C)(15)(b) b

a Note that other PPE required for the specific tasks listed in Table 130.7(C)(15)(a), Table 130.7(C)(15)(

b

c ), and Table 130.7(C)(16), which include arc-rated face shields or arc flash suit hoods, arc-rated hard hat liners,safety glasses or safety goggles, hard hats, hearing protection, heavy-duty leather gloves,

voltage-rated

rubber insulating gloves, and

voltage-rated

insulating or insulated hand tools, could be required. The arc rating for a garment is expressed in cal/cm 2 .

b The

assumedestimated available short-circuit current capacities and fault clearing times or arcing durations for various tasksare listed in the text of Table 130.7(C)(15)(

ab ) and

Table 130Table130 .7(C)(15)(

bd ). For tasks not listed

,or for power systems with greater than the

assumedestimated available short-circuit capacity or with longer than the assumed fault - clearing times or arcingdurations , an arc flash hazard

analysisrisk assessment is required in accordance with 130.5.

of 473








CommitteeStatement:

The notes to Table H.2 have been revised to be consistent with terminology used in the rest of the standard and toupdate the notes to reflect changes to the new hazard/risk terminology and to reflect the new terminology in therevised PPE Category Tables. Table number have been revised in the text for correlation.

ResponseMessage:

FR-151-NFPA 70E-2012

Committee Notes:

Date Submitted By

Aug 24,2012

[ Not Specified ] Revise in accordance with global changes.

Public Input No. 105-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. H.2]



H.3 Arc-Rated Clothing and Other Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for Use with a HazardAnalysisRisk Assessment of Electrical Hazards .

Table H.3(a) provides a summary of specific sections within the NFPA 70E standard describing personalprotective equipment PPE for electrical hazards. Guidance

Table H.3(b) provides guidance on the selection of arc-rated

clothing

and other

personal protective equipment

PPE for users who

conduct a hazard analysis to

determine the incident energy exposure (in cal/cm 2 )

to the worker is provided in

.

Replace Table H.3(

b).Table H.3(

a)

Summary of Specific Sections Describing Personal Protective Equipment for Electrical Hazards ShockHazard Personal Protective Equipment Applicable Section(s) Rubber insulating gloves; and

Leather protectors (unless the requirements of ASTM F 496 are met) 130.7(C)(7)(a) Rubber insulatingsleeves (as needed) 130.7(C)(7)(a) Class G or E hard hat (as needed) 130.7(C)(3) Safety glasses or goggles(as needed) 130.7(C)(4) Dielectric overshoes (as needed) 130.7(C)(8) Arc Flash Hazard PersonalProtective Equipment Applicable Section(s) Incident Energy Exposures up to and including 1.2

cal/cm 2 Clothing: non-melting or untreated natural fiber long sleeve shirt and long pants orcoverall 130.7(C)(1); 130.7(C)(9)(d) Gloves: Heavy-duty leather 130.7(C)(7)(b); 130.7(C)(10)(d) Hard hat:class G or E 130.7(C)(3) Faceshield: covers the face, neck and chin (as needed) 130.7(C)(3) Safety glassesor goggles130.7(C)(4); 130.7(C)(10)(c) Hearing protection 130.7(C)(5) Shoes or boots: heavy duty leather

(as needed) 130.7(C)(10)(e) Incident Energy Exposures >1.2 cal/cm 2 Clothing: arc-rated clothingsystem

with

an arc rating appropriate to the anticipated incident energy exposure 130.7(C)(1); 130.7(C)(2); 130.7(C)

of 473



(6); 130.7(C)(9)(d) Clothing underlayers (when used): Arc-rated or nonmelting untreated naturalfiber 130.7(C)(9)(c); 130.7(C)(11); 130.7(C)(12) Gloves: 130.7(C)(7)(b); 130.7(C)(10)(d) ?Exposures >1.2

cal/cm 2 and ?8 cal/cm 2 : Heavy-duty leather gloves ?Exposures > 8 cal/cm 2 : Rubber insulatinggloves with their leather protectors; or Arc-rated glovesHard hat: class G or E 130.7(C)(1); 130.7(C)(3) Face shield: 130.7(C)(1); 130.7(C)(3); 130.7(C)(10)(a); 130.7(C)(10)(b); 130.7(C)(10)(c) ?Exposures> 1.2

cal/cm 2 and ?12 cal/cm 2 : Arc-rated faceshield that covers the face, neck and chin and an arc-rated

balaclava or an arc-rated arc flash suit hood ?Exposures > 12 cal/cm 2 : Arc-rated arc flash suit hoodSafety glasses or goggles 130.7(C)(4); 130.7(C)(10)(c) Hearing protection 130.7(C)(5) Footwear: 130.7(C)

(10)(e) ?Exposures ?4 cal/cm 2 : Heavy-duty leather work shoes (as needed) ?Exposures> 4 cal/cm 2 :Heavy duty leather work shoes

Table H.3(b) Guidance on Selection of Arc-Rated Clothing and Other Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) forUse When Incident Exposure is Determined by a Hazard Analysis

Incident Energy Exposure Protective Clothing and PPE Less than or Equal to 1.2 cal/cm 2 Protectiveclothing, nonmelting (in accordance with ASTM F 1506-08) or untreated natural fiber Shirt (long sleeve)and pants (long) or coverall Other personal protective equipment Face shield for projectile protection(AN) Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) Hearing protection Heavy-duty leather gloves or rubber

insulating gloves with leather protectors (AN) Greater than 1.2 to 12 cal/cm 2 Arc-rated clothing andequipment with an arc rating equal to or greater than the incident energy determined in a hazardanalysis (See Note 3.) Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and arc-rated pants or arc-rated coverall or arc flashsuit (SR) (See Note 3.) Arc-rated face shield and arc-rated balaclava or arc flash suit hood (SR) (SeeNote 1.) Arc-rated jacket, parka, or rainwear (AN) Other personal protective equipment Hard hat Arc-rated hard hat liner (AN) Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) Hearing protection Heavy-duty leathergloves or rubber insulating gloves with leather protectors (SR) (See Note 4.) Leather work shoes

Greater than 12 cal/cm 2 Arc-rated clothing and equipment with an arc rating equal to or greater thanthe incident energy determined in a hazard analysis (See Note 3.) Arc-rated long-sleeve shirt and arc-rated pants or arc-rated coverall and/or arc flash suit (SR) Arc-rated arc flash suit hood Arc-ratedgloves Arc-rated jacket, parka, or rainwear (AN) Other personal protective equipment Hard hat Arc-rated hard hat liner (AN) Safety glasses or safety goggles (SR) Hearing protection Arc-rated gloves orrubber insulating gloves with leather protectors (SR) (See Note 4.) Leather work shoes

AN: As needed [in addition to the protective clothing and PPE required by 130.5(B)(1)].

SR: Selection of one in group is required by 130.5(B)(1).

Notes:

(1) Face shields with a wrap-around guarding to protect the face, chin, forehead, ears, and neck areaare required by 130.8(C)(10)(c). For full head and neck protection, use a balaclava or an arc flash hood.

(2) All items not designated “AN” are required by 130.7(C).

(3) Arc ratings can be for a single layer, such as an arc-rated shirt and pants or a coverall, or for an arcflash suit or a multi-layer system consisting of a combination of arc-rated shirt and pants, coverall, andarc flash suit.

(4) Rubber insulating gloves with leather protectors provide arc flash protection in addition to shockprotection. Higher class rubber insulating gloves with leather protectors, due to their increasedmaterial thickness ,provide increased arc flash protection.

the Table in Attachment FR151A1 and Replace Table H.3(b) and notes with the Table and Notes inAttachment FR151A2.



FR152A1.docx Edited Table H.3(a).

FR152A2.docx Edited Table H.3(b) and notes.


of 473







CommitteeStatement:

Revision to H.3 title aligns with proposed revision or “hazard analysis” with "risk assessment of electrical hazards".Revision to H.3 text provides clarity. The context indicates that the analysis referred to is an incident energyanalysis.

ResponseMessage:

FR-152-NFPA 70E-2012




H.4 Two-Level Clothing Approach for Use with Known Short-Circuit Currents and Device Clearing Times.

Table H.4(a) and Table H.4(b) can be used to determine the suitability of 8 cal/cm 2 and 40 cal/cm 2 personalprotective equipment on systems rated up to 15 kV, line-to-line. Table H.4(a) and Table H.4(b) provide therecommended limitations based on bolted, three-phase short-circuit currents at the listed fault clearing times. Thelimitations found in the tables are based on IEEE 1584 calculation methods.

Table H.4(a) Low-Voltage Systems — Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault-Current Limits at Various System Voltages

and Fault Clearing Times of Circuit Breakers for Recommended Use of 8 cal/cm 2 and 40 cal/cm 2 Personal ProtectiveEquipment in an “Arc-in-a-Box” Situation

System Voltage

(volts, phase-to-phase) Upstream Protection

Fault Clearing Time

(sec) Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault Current for Use of

8 cal/cm 2 PPE Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault Current for Use of

40 cal/cm 2 PPE 690 0.05

0.10

0.20

0.33

0.50

39 kA

20 kA

10 kA

Not recommended

Not recommended

180 kA

93 kA

48 kA

29 kA

20 kA 600

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.33

0.50

of 473



48 kA

24 kA

12 kA

Not recommended

Not recommended

200 kA*

122 kA

60 kA

36 kA

24 kA 480

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.33

0.50

68 kA

32 kA

15 kA

8 kA

Not recommended

200 kA*

183 kA

86 kA

50 kA

32 kA 400

0.05

0.10

0.20

0.33 0.50

87 kA

39 kA

18 kA

10 kA

Not recommended

200 kA*

200 kA*

113 kA

64 kA

39 kA 208

0.05

0.10

200 kA*

104 kA

Not applicable

200 kA*

*Maximum equipment short-circuit current rating available.

Notes:

(1) Three-phase bolted fault value is at the terminals of the equipment on which work is to be done.

(2) Upstream protection fault clearing time is normally the short-time delay setting on the trip unit of the low-voltage power

circuit breaker upstream of the equipment on which work is to be done. of 473



circuit breaker upstream of the equipment on which work is to be done.

(3) For application of this table, the recommended maximum setting (pickup) of either the instantaneous or short-timedelay protection of the circuit breaker’s trip unit is 30 percent of the actual available three-phase bolted fault current at thespecific work location.

(4) Working distance for the arc flash exposures is assumed to be 455 mm (18 in.).

(5) Arc flash boundary (threshold distance for a second degree skin burn) is 1.7 m (6 ft) for 8 cal/cm 2 PPE and 4.9 m

(16 ft) for 40 cal/cm 2 PPE. PPE is required for all personnel working within the arc flash boundary.

(6) An instantaneous circuit breaker trip unit(s) has no intentional time delay, and a properly installed, operated, andmaintained circuit breaker should clear the fault within 0.050 second of initiation. Application of circuit breakers with faster

clearing times, or the use of current-limiting circuit breakers or fuses, should permit the use of 8 cal/cm 2 and 40

cal/cm 2 PPE at greater fault currents than listed.

(7) Systems are assumed to be resistance grounded, except for a 208-V solidly grounded system. This assumptionresults in a conservative application if the table is used for a solidly grounded system, since the incident energy on asolidly grounded system is lower for the same bolted fault current availability.

Table H.4(b) High-Voltage Systems — Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault-Current Limits at Various System Voltages

and Fault Clearing Times of Circuit Breakers for Recommended Use of 8 cal/cm 2 and 40 cal/cm 2 Personal ProtectiveEquipment in an “Arc-in-a-Box” Situation

System Voltage

(volts, phase-to-phase) Upstream Protection Fault Clearing Time

(sec) Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault Current for Use of 8 cal/cm 2 PPE Maximum Three-Phase Bolted Fault

Current for Use of 40 cal/cm 2 PPE 15-kV class and 12-kV class 0.10

0.35

0.70

1.0 45 kA

13 kA

7 kA

5 kA 63 kA*(11.4 cal/cm 2 )

63 kA

32 kA

23 kA 5-kV class 0.10

0.35

0.70

1.0 50 kA

15 kA

8 kA

5 kA 63 kA* (10 cal/cm 2 )

63 kA*(35 cal/cm 2 )

37 kA

26 kA

* Maximum equipment short-circuit current rating available.

Notes:

(1) Upstream protection fault clearing time is the protective relaying operating time at 90 percent of the actual availablethree-phase bolted fault current at the specific work location (the time for the output contact operating the trip coil of thecircuit breaker to be closed) plus the circuit breaker operating time (upstream of the equipment on which work is to bedone).

(2) Working distance for the arc flash exposures is assumed to be 0.92 m (3 ft).

(3) Systems are assumed to be resistance grounded. This assumption results in a conservative application if the table isused on a solidly grounded system, since the incident energy on a solidly grounded system is lower.

(4) The cal/cm 2 in parentheses in the last column of the table are calculated at the maximum equipment short-circuitcurrent ratings available.

of 473






Committee Statement: Table H.4 does not add clarity to the document and is being deleted.



of 473



First Revision No. 143-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. J.1 ]

J.1 Figure J.1.

Figure J.1 illustrates considerations for an energized electrical work permit.

Informative Annex J

(Insert Attachement F143_J_1 here, which includes global changes and deletes list item 3(c) in Part IIof Figure J.1 and renumbers item 3(d) as 3(c).)

Figure J.1 Sample Permit for Energized Electrical Work.



FR143_J_1.jpg Edited Figure J.1 including global changes.






Committee Statement: Figure J.1 is revised for consistency throughout the standard.


of 473



First Revision No. 142-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. K.4 ]

K.4 Arc Blast.

The tremendous temperatures of the arc cause the explosive expansion of both the surrounding air and the metalin the arc path. For example, copper expands by a factor of 67,000 times when it turns from a solid to a vapor.The danger associated with this expansion is one of high pressures, sound, and shrapnel. The high pressurescan easily exceed hundreds or even thousands of pounds per square foot, knocking workers off ladders, rupturingeardrums, and collapsing lungs. The sounds associated with these pressures can exceed 160 dB. Finally,material and molten metal is are expelled away from the arc at speeds exceeding 1600 1120 km/hr (700 mph),fast enough for shrapnel to completely penetrate the human body.






Committee Statement: 1600 km/hr was changed to 1120 km/hr to correct a mathematical error.


of 473



First Revision No. 144-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. L.1 ]

L.1 Application of Safeguards.

This annex permits a typical application of safeguards in electrolytic areas where hazardous electrical conditionshazards exist. Take, for example, an employee working on an energized cell. The employee uses manualcontact to make adjustments and repairs. Consequently, the exposed energized cell and grounded metal floorcould present a hazardous an electrical condition hazard . Safeguards for this employee can be provided in thefollowing ways:

(1) Protective boots can be worn that isolate the employee’s feet from the floor and that provide a safeguardfrom the hazardous electrical condition hazard .

(2) Protective gloves can be worn that isolate the employee’s hands from the energized cell and that provide asafeguard.

(3) If the work task causes severe deterioration, wear, or damage to personal protective equipment, theemployee might have to wear both protective gloves and boots.

(4) A permanent or temporary insulating surface can be provided for the employee to stand on to provide asafeguard.

(5) The design of the installation can be modified to provide a conductive surface for the employee to stand on. Ifthe conductive surface is bonded to the cell, the hazardous electrical condition will be removed, and a asafeguard will be provided by voltage equalization.

(6) Safe work practices can provide safeguards. If protective boots are worn, the employee should not makelong reaches over energized (or grounded) surfaces such that his or her elbow bypasses the safeguard. Ifsuch movements are required, protective sleeves, protective mats, or special tools should be used. Trainingon the nature of hazardous electrical conditions hazards and proper use and condition of safeguards is, initself, a safeguard.

(7) The energized cell can be temporarily bonded to ground to remove the hazardous electrical condition .






Committee Statement: The text is revised in Annex L to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology.


Public Input No. 224-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. L.1]

of 473

First Revision No. 145-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. O.1 [Excluding any Sub-Sections] ]

This annex addresses the responsibilities of the facility owner or manager , or the employer having responsibilityfor facility ownership or operations management , to apply electrical hazard analysis to perform a riskassessment during the design of electrical systems and installations.






Committee Statement: Revision is made in section O.1 to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology.


Public Input No. 225-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. O.1 [Excluding any Sub-Sections]]

First Revision No. 146-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. O.1.2 ]

O.1.2

This annex does not discuss specific design requirements. The facility owner or manager , or the employer ,should choose design options that eliminate hazards or reduce exposure risks risk and enhance theeffectiveness of safety-related work practices.






Committee Statement: Revision is made in section O.1.2 to correlate with the new hazard and risk terminology.


Public Input No. 226-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. O.1.2]

of 473




O.2.1

Employers, facility owners, and managers who have responsibility for facilities and installations having electricalenergy as a potential hazard to employees and other personnel should ensure the application of 130.3(B)(1),Electrical Hazard Analysis, that electrical hazards risk assessments are perforrmed during the design ofelectrical systems and installations.






Committee Statement: Changes are made to O.2.1 to reflect the revisions to Article 130.



O.2.2

The application of 130.3(B)(1) should be used to compare design options and choices to facilitate designdecisions that serve to eliminate risk, reduce frequency of exposure, reduce magnitude or severity of exposure,enable the ability to achieve an electrically safe work condition, and otherwise serve to enhance the effectivenessof the safety-related work practices contained in this standard. Design option decisions should facilitate the abilityto eliminate hazards or reduce risk by doing the following:(1) Reducing the likelihood of exposure

(2) Reducing the magnitude or severity of exposure

(3) Enabling achievement of an electrically safe work condition






CommitteeStatement:

Revision is made for consistency of terminology through out the standard. The first sentence was deleted tocorrelate with previous revisions.

ResponseMessage:

FR-147-NFPA 70E-2012



of 473



O.2.

3 3 Arc Incident Energy Reduction

. Where a circuit breaker that is rated for, or can be adjusted to, 1000 amperes or more is used, one of thefollowing or equivalent means have provenMethods . The following methods have proved to be effective in reducing

arc flashi ncident energy:

(1) Zone-selective interlocking . A method that allows two or more circuit breakers to communicate witheach other so that a short circuit or ground fault will be cleared by the breaker closest to the fault in theminimum time. Clearing the fault in the shortest time aids in keeping the incident energy in the circuit to itslowest possible value.

(2) Differential relaying . The concept of this protection method is that current flowing into protectedequipment must equal the current out of the equipment. If these two currents are not equal, a fault mustexist within the equipment, and the relaying can be set to operate for a fast interruption. Differential relayinguses current transformers located on the line and load sides of the protected equipment and fast actingrelay.

(3) Energy-reducing maintenance switching with a local status indicator

. An energy-reducing maintenance switch allows a worker to set a circuit breaker trip unit to operate fasterwhile the worker is working within an arc flash boundary, as defined in NFPA

70E70 , and then to set the circuit breaker back to a normal setting after the potentially hazardous work iscomplete.

O.2.4 Other Methods.

(1) Energy-reducing active arc flash mitigation system. This system can reduce the arcing duration bycreating a low impedance current path, located within a controlled compartment, to cause the arcing fault totransfer to the new current path, while the upstream breaker clears the circuit. The system works withoutcompromising existing selective coordination in the electrical distribution system.

(2) Arc Flash Relay. An arc flash relay typically uses light sensors to detect the light produced by an arc-flash event. Once a certain level of light is detected the relay will issue a trip signal to an upstreamovercurrent device.

(3) High-Resistance Grounding. A great majority of electrical faults are of the phase-to-ground type. High-resistance grounding will insert an impedance in the ground return path and will typically limit the faultcurrent to 10 amperes and below (at 5 kV nominal or below), leaving insufficient fault energy and therebyhelping reduce the arc flash hazard level. High resistance grounding will not affect arc-flash energy for line-to-line or line-to-line-to-line arcs.

(4) Current-limiting devices. Current limiting protective devices reduce incident energy by clearing the faultfaster and by reducing the current seen at the arc source. The energy reduction becomes effective forcurrent above the current limiting threshold of the current limiting fuse or current limiting circuit breaker.






CommitteeStatement:

Arc Energy Reduction has been more appropriately titled to Incident Energy Reduction. Additional methods havebeen added to this section to provide a list of that can assist the user in reducing help incident energy levels.Definitions or descriptive text has been added to describe each method.

ResponseMessage:

FR-148-NFPA 70E-2012



Public Input No. 102-NFPA 70E-2012 [Annex O]



of 473




First Revision No. 149-NFPA 70E-2012 [ Section No. P.1 ]

P.1 General.

Injuries from electrical energy are a significant cause of occupational fatalities in the workplace in the UnitedStates. This standard specifies requirements unique to the hazards of electrical energy. By itself, however, thisstandard does not constitute a comprehensive and effective electrical safety program. The most effectiveapplication of the requirements of this standard can be achieved within the framework of a recognized health andsafety management system standard. ANSI/AIHA Z10, American National Standard for Health and SafetyManagement Systems , provides comprehensive guidance on the elements of an effective health and safetymanagement system and is one recognized standard. ANSI/AIHA Z10 is harmonized with other internationallyrecognized standards, including CAN/CSA Z1000, Occupational Health and Safety Managem et; ISO 14001, andOSHA 18001 Environmental Management Systems - Requirements with Guidance for Use ; and OSHAS 18001,Occupational Health and Safety Management Systems . Some companies and other organizations haveproprietary health and safety management systems that are aligned with the key elements of ANSI/AIHA Z10.

The most effective design and implementation of an electrical safety program can be achieved through a jointeffort involving electrical subject matter experts and safety professionals knowledgeable about safetymanagement systems

.

This , such collaboration can help ensure that proven safety management principles and practices applicable toany hazard in the workplace are appropriately incorporated into the electrical safety program.

This annex provides guidance on implementing this standard within the framework of ANSI/AIHA Z10 and otherrecognized or proprietary comprehensive occupational health and safety management system standards.






Committee Statement: Revisions have been made to correctly reference the OHSAS 18001 standard.


Public Input No. 54-NFPA 70E-2012 [Section No. P.1]




of 473

National Fire Protection Association 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471 Phone: 617-770-3000 • Fax: 617-770-0700 • www.nfpa.org

M E M O R A N D U M

To: NFPA Technical Committee on Electrical Safety in the Workplace

From: Kim Shea

Date: November 13, 2012

Subject: NFPA 70E First Draft TC FINAL Ballot Results (A2014)

According to the final ballot results, all ballot items received the necessary affirmative votes to pass ballot.

24 Members Eligible to Vote 0 Not Returned

The attached report shows the number of affirmative, negative, and abstaining votes as well as the explanation of the vote for each first revision.

There are two criteria necessary for each first revision to pass ballot: (1) simple majority and (2) affirmative 2/3 vote. The mock examples below show how the calculations are determined.

(1) Example for Simple Majority: Assuming there are 20 vote eligible committee members, 11 affirmative votes are required to pass ballot. (Sample calculation: 20 members eligible to vote ÷ 2 = 10 + 1 = 11)

(2) Example for Affirmative 2/3: Assuming there are 20 vote eligible committee members and 1 member did not

return their ballot and 2 members abstained, the number of affirmative votes required would be 12. (Sample calculation: 20 members eligble to vote – 1 not returned – 2 abstentions = 17 x 0.66 = 11.22 = 12 )

As always please feel free to contact me if you have any questions.

of 473

NFPA 70E Final Ballot Results ‐ November 13, 2012

FR‐10, Global Input, See FR‐10

Total Eligible to Vote: 24 Ballots Not Returned: 0

Choice Votes Comments

Affirmative with Comment 0

Negative 0

Abstain 1

David M. Wallis OSHA policy requires me to abstain from all ballots on technical issues.

Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





David M. Wallis I vote affirmative on FR‐12, as it resolves a nontechnical issue.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1

David A. Pace The intent should be to identify the hazard first then if there is a hazard to do the risk assessment.

We seem to be losing our focus on hazards and going straight to risk. This is not the way it should be

done.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


of 473

Affirmative 23





Negative 1



done.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1



done.

Abstain 1

of 473


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1



done.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

of 473

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1

David M. Wallis OSHA policy requires me to abstain from all ballots on technical issues. Note that the word "were" in

the FR should be "where."

Affirmative 23

FR‐14, Section No. 90.2, See FR‐14




Ron Widup These changes made to 90.2, both additions and deletions, are important to improving worker

safety. The highlight of safety‐related maintenance requirements and other administrative controls

coincides with industry best practice and other national consensus standards such as NFPA 70B, IEEE

3007.3, and NETA testing standards.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐132, Sections 90.3, 90.4, See FR‐132




of 473

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐23, Definition (100): Incident Energy Analysis., See FR‐23




Negative 1



done.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐15, Definition (100): Arc Flash Hazard Analysis., See FR‐15




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐16, Definition (100): Arc Rating., See FR‐16


of 473



Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐17, Definition (100): Balaclava (Sock Hood)., See FR‐17




Negative 2

Lee R. Hale The face shield with a chin cup will provide protection to the facial area as required in the ASTM

F2178 requirements. Requiring additional coverage to the nose and mouth is not required.

Louis A. Barrios No technical substantiation was provided for the change. Covering both the mouth and nose,

already covered by the arc rated face shield may restrict breating.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

FR‐168, Definition (100): Bare‐Hand Work., See FR‐168




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐18, Definition (100): Barricade., See FR‐18



of 473


Negative 1

Palmer L. Hickman We are concerned that "tape and cones" are not good examples of barricades.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐121, Definition (100): Boundary, Prohibited Approach., See FR‐121




Negative 3

Palmer L. Hickman With the deletion of the prohibited approach boundary the document loses the important concept

of arc‐over distance as described in Annex C. Rather than delete the prohibited approach boundary

with the rationale that the mandatory requirements do not identify a use for this boundary, the First

Revision should have established a use for the boundary by moving the non‐mandatory text from

Annex C.1.2.3(3) into Section 130.4.

John M. Tobias The concept of prohibited approach boundary is useful and should be retained.

David A. Pace There is a difference between being close (Restricted Approach Boundary) to an energized

uninsulated conductor and actually touching an uninsulated energized conductor (Prohibited

Approach Boundary). The purpose of the Prohibited Approach Boundary has been to emphasize the

point that "working on" energized conductors is not appropriate and should not be done. OSHA, in

1910.333(c)(2), discusses training in special precautionary techniques when working on energized

conductors. By removing this boundary the committee is stating there is no difference between

being close to an energized conductor and touching it. That is very bad signal to send.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 20

FR‐19, Definition (100): Boundary, Restricted Approach., See FR‐19


of 473



Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐26, Definition (100): Device., See FR‐26




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐20, Definition (100): Enclosure., See FR‐20




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐21, Definition (100): Energized., See FR‐21




Negative 2

Palmer L. Hickman We do not believe that this definition adequately defines an energized electrical work permit. See

the requirements of 130.2(B).

Louis A. Barrios This definition is unnecessary. Also, the proposed definition does not include additional criteria and

exceptions for when an energized electrical work permit is necessary, thus potentially introducing

confusion to the use of the term.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

FR‐27, Definition (100): Equipment., See FR‐27




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐28, Definition (100): Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC)., See FR‐28




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐1, Definition (100): Guarded., See FR‐1




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐2, Definition (100): Guarded., See FR‐2




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐22, Definition (100): Incident Energy., See FR‐22




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐29, Definition (100): Luminaire., See FR‐29




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐24, Definition (100): Qualified Person., See FR‐24




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐30, Definition (100): Raceway., See FR‐30




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐3, Definition (100): Receptacle., See FR‐3




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐4, Definition (100): Receptacle., See FR‐4




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐31, Definition (100): Service Point., See FR‐31




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐25, Definition (100): Ventilated., See FR‐25




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐32, Definition (100): Voltage, Nominal., See FR‐32




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 1

David A. Pace This change should not be accepted. It should not be the role of the employee to "assess the risk".

Assessing the risk associated with an electrical hazard is the role of supervision and management.

The electrical safety procedures that are developed should include having already performed the

risk assessment to determine what safe work practice should be used when a specific hazard is

encountered. The employee needs to be able to identify the hazard and, based on the procedures,

identify the safe work practices that should be used. Risk assessment is a process that includes

probability and severity. Employees have to be trained to understand the injuries associated with

electrical hazards Informational Note No 2 contains a requirement While the word "shall" is notAbstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 1

David A. Pace See the explanation of Negative for FR # 175 related to inclusion of assessing the risk by the

employee. We are losing focus on the hazards and shifting the focus to "risk". Probability and

severity are two of the most common elements in determining risk.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1

David A. Pace PI# 470 should have been included in this FR. The language in the PI, “The host employer shall

evaluate the contract employees' previous electrical safety training, experience, etc. before being

brought on site to determine whether or not they are considered by the host employer to be

Qualified to perform the particular tasks they are to do.” Should have been included. An electrician

that does primarily DCS or controls work would likely not be qualified for substation work, even

though they may have years of experience as a Journeyman electrician. Unless their previous level is

evaluated, people can, and have been put on jobs for which they are not qualified, and be placed at

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473

FR‐178, Section No. 110.1(C), See FR‐178




Negative 1

David A. Pace I disagree with this change. The hazards are what we have to deal with. Establishing the risk is an

element of the Electrical Safety Program. It should not be the focus of the Electrical Safety Program.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐37, Section No. 110.2(A), See FR‐37




Palmer L. Hickman In addition to replacing “who face a risk of” with “exposed to,” the First Revision should have added

the phrase “when the risk associated with that hazard” for consistency with risk assessment

principles. Hazards are not reduced; it is the likelihood of injury or the possible severity of injury

associated with hazards can be reduced. 110.2 Training Requirements. (A) Safety Training. The

training requirements contained in this section shall apply to employees exposed to an electrical

hazard when the risk associated with that hazard is not reduced to a safe level by the applicable

electrical installation requirements. Such employees shall be trained to understand the specific

hazards associated with electrical energy. They shall be trained in safety‐related work practices and

procedural requirements, as necessary, to provide protection from the electrical hazards associated

with their respective job or task assignments. Employees shall be trained to identify and understand

the relationship between electrical hazards and possible injury. Informational Note: For furtherNegative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐38, Section No. 110.2(B), See FR‐38




Lee R. Hale Classroom training is necessary to keep everyone abreast wiht industry changes. On the job is good

also but wiht on the job you tend to get the same old practice which may or may not be valid. I will

vote to the affirmative as this is somewhat better language.

Negative 1

of 473

David A. Pace Training should be a combination of on‐the‐job and classroom. People that are on‐the‐job and

provide training for others cannot pass on knowledge they don’t have. It is impossible for people

that are on‐the‐job to gain and keep up with evolving knowledge related to electrical safety unless

they receive classroom training as part of the total.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Drake A. Drobnick Add Informational Note: Removal of victims can be accomplished by de‐energizing or by using

certified rescue hooks.

Negative 1

Palmer L. Hickman We do not agree that “this first revision enhances clarity with editorial changes” as the Committee

Statement asserts. There are a number of changes that were made that are not editorial and were

not adequately substantiated. Furthermore, there are a number of changes that reduce rather than

enhance clarity. As structured, this section has several interlocking requirements that can be

confusing to identify. The First Revision should have been restructured to make the requirements

clear and readily identifiable. The CPR training requirement should be annual. (C) Emergency

Response Training. (1) Contact Release. Employees exposed to shock hazards shall be trained in

methods of safe release of victims from contact with exposed energized electrical conductors or

circuit parts (2) First Aid, Emergency Response and Resuscitation. (a) Employees responsible for

responding to medical emergencies shall be trained in first aid, emergency procedures and approved

methods of resuscitation such as cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) annually. (b) Automated

External Defibrillator (AED). Employees responsible for responding to medical emergencies shall be

trained in the use of an AED when an employer’s emergency response plan includes the use of this

d ( ) l h ll f l ll h l f f dAbstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473

FR‐39, Section No. 110.2(D)(1), See FR‐39




Negative 1

David A. Pace Before you can identify an electrical hazard you must first know what the hazards are. The first

sentence should be revised to state: "…specific work method and be trained to understand the

hazards, identify the hazards, and avoid the hazards....." See my explanation of Negative in FR# 175

related to having the employee "assess the risk"Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





William Bruce Bowman There is no other reference to or definition of "annual inpsections".

Drake A. Drobnick Add the word "employer" before "safety‐related work practices..." in the first sentence. Add new

last sentence; "Employer programs shall be updated to reflect the applicable changes found in the

current edition of the 70E document."

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473

FR‐42, Section No. 110.2(E), See FR‐42




Negative 3

Palmer L. Hickman We are concerned that a number of the items included as examples of "content of the training"

should not qualify as examples of content of training including, but not limited to, "training

objectives." We submit that the related informational note should be deleted.

William Bruce Bowman The existing 2012 edition of the standard has sufficient requirements for documenting employee

training.

David A. Pace Information Note 1 is too vague to be of any value. It is important to understand what the training

content is. A training program cannot be evaluated unless the content is available. Informational

Note 2 does not meet the intent of this section

Abstain 1


Affirmative 20





Palmer L. Hickman We are concerned the action here is incomplete. Our notes indicate language indicating when the

contractor must initiate the meeting.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





Palmer L. Hickman We are concerned the action here is incomplete. Our notes indicate language indicating when the

contractor must initiate the meeting.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐49, Section No. 110.4(A)(2), See FR‐49




Negative 1

David A. Pace The new language does not provide any clarity but instead adds confusion. The original language

should be retained.

Abstain 1

David M. Wallis OSHA policy requires me to abstain from all ballots on technical issues. Note that "where" should be

replaced by "with which" to improve the grammar.

Affirmative 22

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Rodney J. West We support the committee action but note that simply removing the words: “…that might expose an

employee to injury…” may have unintended consequences, make the requirement overly restrictive

and reduce clarity. The committee should remove these words but replace them with: “…that

creates a hazard…”. This wording keeps the intent of the inspection clear and is consistent with the

work performed by of the hazard/risk task groupNegative 2

Louis A. Barrios There was no substantiation or committee statement provided for the removal of the phrase "that

might expose an employee to injury". Equipment damage that does not expose an employee to a

hazard should not be sufficient justification for automatice removal of the equipment from service.

This could be a costly change without improving worker safety.

David A. Pace I agree with the first change, removing "might expose …." but I disagree with second change. The

repairs need to be made by qualified persons in conformance with manufacturer’s instructions. The

statement as is would lead people to believe that any person who deems themselves as qualified

could make the repairs.Abstain 1


Affirmative 20

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐53, Section No. 110.4(B)(1), See FR‐53




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Rodney J. West We support the committee action but note that simply removing the words: “…that might expose an

employee to injury…” may have unintended consequences, make the requirement overly restrictive

and reduce clarity. The committee should remove these words but replace them with: “…that

creates a hazard…”. This wording keeps the intent of the inspection clear and is consistent with the

work performed by of the hazard/risk task groupNegative 1

Louis A. Barrios There was no substantiation or committee statement provided for the removal of the phrase "that

might expose an employee from injury". Equipment damage that does not expose an employee to a

hazard should not be sufficient justification for automatice removal of the equipment from service.

This could be a costly change without improving worker safety. I support the rest of the changes.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Negative 1

David A. Pace The statement in (b) should have been deleted. Handling cords after the “connector is wet from

being immersed in water” cannot be done safely regardless of the method used. This is clearly

unsafe and this standard should not provide guidance on how to do something that cannot be done

safely. This language is left over from many years ago and should now be deleted.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐58, Sections 110.4(C), 110.4(1), 110.4(2), See FR‐58




Negative 1

Louis A. Barrios I do not believe the proposed changes as shown meet the technical committee's intent. The

combination of PIs 13, 237, 456 and 478 as shown, has resulted in inconsistent requirements for

GFCI and assured equipment grounding programs for outdoor and maintenance/construction usage.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473

FR‐56, Section No. 110.4(E), See FR‐56




Negative 1

David A. Pace The information in PI# 484 should have been incorporated into this FR. The requirements in the PI,

“Electrical Equipment Specification and Application. Individuals having responsibility for specifying

and applying electrical equipment the site shall: (1) specify equipment compliant with applicable

codes and standards 2) incorporate any advances in technology that result in safety improvements

to minimize electrical hazard potential (i.e. IEC Touch Proof components, polycarbonate barriers,

remote racking devices, GFCI’s, arc flash reduction measures, etc.). 3) use the Electrical Hazards

Identification and Risk Assessment process at each phase of the job or project, ensuring that options

chosen and choices made in the course of electrical equipment design, selection, installation and

operation will serve to eliminate risk, reduce frequency of exposure, reduce magnitude or severity

of exposure, enable the ability to achieve an electrically safe work condition, and otherwise serve to

enhance the effectiveness of the safety related work practices contained in the this standard, and 4)

make every effort to reduce the resulting electrical arc flash incident energy, regardless of the level,

and electrical shock hazards at the equipment to the lowest possible levels, including their

li i ti ll t th I d h i d t b l d id ti f l t i lAbstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Louis A. Barrios The term "test instrument" is too generic and should be changed to "voltage test instrument".

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





William Bruce Bowman The existing 2012 edition of the standard has sufficient requirements for documenting employee

training.

Negative 2

Palmer L. Hickman We are concerned that a number of the items included as examples of "content of the training"

should not qualify as examples of content of training including, but not limited to, "training

objectives." We submit that that informational note should be deleted. In addition, as structured,

this section has several interlocking requirements that can be confusing to identify. The First

Revision should have been restructured to make the requirements clear and readily identifiable. (2)

Training. All persons who could be exposed shall be trained to understand the established procedure

to control the energy and their responsibility in executing the procedure. New or reassigned

employees shall be trained to understand the lockout/tagout procedure as it relates to their new

assignments. (3) Retraining. Retraining shall be performed (a) When the established procedure is

revised; and (b) At intervals not to exceed 3 years. (4) Training Documentation. The employer shall

document that each employee has received the training required by this section. This

David A. Pace I agree with the changes except the addition of the Informational Note. Informational Note 2 does

not meet the intent of this section.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 20

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐65, Section No. 120.2(E)(2), See FR‐65




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 1

Palmer L. Hickman The wording "Article 130 provides requirements for establishing an electrically safe work condition

and electrical safety‐related work practices ..." seems to imply that establishing an electrically safe

work condition is not considered an electrical safety‐related work practice. We suggest adding the

word "other" to read as follows: "Article 130 provides requirements for establishing an electrically

safe work condition and other electrical safety‐related work practices ..."

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐72, Section No. 130.2 [Excluding any Sub‐Sections], See FR‐72




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Ron Widup This is an important addition to the document, and especially as indicated by the second bullet "the

equipment is properly maintained". This requirement has been establish by many consensus

standards such as NFPA 70B, IEEE 3007.3, and NETA testing standards. Without satisfying all of the

conditions of "normal operation" as outlined in 130.2(A)(3)an electrical worker could potentially be

put in harm's way when interacting with the equipmentPalmer L. Hickman Add a new last sentence in FR 74 before the informational note in positive text: The owner of the

electrical equipment shall be responsible for the installation, and proper maintenance of their

electrical equipment. In addition, for clarity, the First Revision should have included an explanation

of what constitutes “normal operation.” Additionally, since this requirement only makes sense if the

electrical equipment is energized the qualifier “energized” should have been used with “electrical

equipment.” Finally, “when” is a more appropriate term than “where.” (4) Normal Operation.

Normal operation of energized electric equipment shall be permitted where when all of the

following conditions are satisfied: • The equipment is properly installed • The equipment is properly

maintained • The equipment doors are closed and secured • All equipment covers are in place and

secured • There is no evidence of impending failure • The owner of the electrical equipment shall be

responsible for proper, installation, and maintenance. Informational Note 1: The phrase normal

operation means an operation that is in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Informational Note 2: The phrase properly installed means that the equipment is installed in

accordance with applicable industry codes and standards and the manufacturer's recommendations.

The phrase properly maintained means that the equipment has been maintained in accordance with

th f t ' d ti d li bl i d t d d t d d Th hDrake A. Drobnick Add to first sentence "where the employer or the equipment owner can demonstrate." Add line

item #6 A marking indicating that a maintainance inspection has been performed is displayed on the

outer cover or door

of 473

FR‐74 Continued Negative

Negative 2

Carey J. Cook New material "(4) Normal Operation" should be removed for the following reasons: (1) It's a

nonsequitur in the sense that copy describing normal operation appears under the section

"Energized Work". Unless the title is changed to "Normal Operation of Energized Equipment. (2) A

electrical worker is not qualified to know if equipment is installed or maintained properly. Nor is he

/she qualified enough to determine if there is or is not evidence of impending failure. Especially

since the criteria for determining impending failure (last sentence of the informational note) cannot

d l b l d f h d d l d/ l d dDavid A. Pace An additional item needs to be added to this list. "6. Where required, the appropriate PPE has been

identified and used." Any person who walks up to a piece of electrical equipment cannot determine

if the items are listed. It would also be very unlikely the person would know if a piece of equipment

is about fail. New equipment fails. Only arc venting equipment is designed and built to direct arc

flash energy away from the operator of the equipment in the event of a failure. Arc flash PPE may be

required even with the equipment that is capable of redirecting the arc flash energy, and that poses

a hazard. This requirement should include a demonstration of the elements stated that are used as

the basis for the conclusions made. Without some demonstration of evidence, the conclusion would

Abstain 1


Affirmative 18

of 473





Palmer L. Hickman : In addition to the changes, the First Revision should have restructured this section for clarity. (1)

When Required. An energized electrical work permit shall be required: (a) When working within the

restricted approach boundary; or (b) When the employee interacts with the equipment where

conductors or circuit parts are not exposed but an increased likelihood of injury from an exposure to

an arc flash hazard existsNegative 2

David A. Pace Section 1. should not be added. Adding this section would require the operation of any electrical

equipment with incident energy above 5 cal/cm2 to have an energized electrical work permit.

Having this section creates a conflict with 130.2 (A)(4).

Drake A. Drobnick The conditions for 130.2 (B)(1) should be the same as those agreed upon by the Committee action

on FR#72.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 20

of 473





Palmer L. Hickman We suggest replacing "130.3(A)" with "130.7(E)" in the following requirement: (6) Means employed

to restrict the access of unqualified persons from the work area [see 130.3(A)] In addition, the First

Revision should have added voltage to the list items in item (4) to correlate to 130.4. (2) Elements of

Work Permit. The energized electrical work permit shall include, but not be limited to, the following

items: (1) Description of the task, circuit and equipment to be worked on and their location (2)

Justification for why the work must be performed in an energized condition [see 130.2(A)] (3)

Description of the safe work practices to be employed [see 130.3(B)] (4) Results of the shock hazard

analysis [see 130.4(A)] a. Voltage to which personnel will be exposed a b. Limited approach

boundary [see 130.4(B), Table 130.4(C)(a), and Table 130.4(C)(b)] b c. Restricted approach boundary

[see 130.4(B), Table 130.4(C)(a), and Table 130.4(C)(b)] c d. Necessary personal and other protective

equipment to protect against the hazard [see 130.4(C), 130.7(C) (1) through (C)(16), Table

130.7(C)(15)(b ), Table 130.7(C)(15)(d ), Table 130.7(C)(16) , and 130.7(D)] (5) Results of the arc flash

hazard analysis [see 130.5] a. Available incident energy at a specified working distance or hazard/risk

category [see 130.5 ] b. Necessary personal protective equipment to protect against the hazard [see

130.5(B) , 130.7(C) (1) through (C)(16), Table 130.7(C)(15)(b), Table 130.7(C)(15)(d), Table

130.7(C)(16), and 130.7(D)] c. Arc flash boundary [see 130.5(A)] (6) Means employed to restrict the

access of unqualified persons from the work area [see 130.7(E) ] (7) Evidence of completion of a job

Negative 1

David A. Pace The removal of the Prohibited Approach Boundary is inappropriate. See my Explanation of Negative

in FR# 121.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Lee R. Hale This FR provides clarity to the requirements of the electrical work permit.

Drake A. Drobnick Remove the boundary requirement in item #2. The standard has requirements when using

conductive objects. We do not require a permit for direct contact when voltage testing.

Negative 2

Palmer L. Hickman We suggest deleting Informational Note No. 1. All of the tasks in Table 130.7(C)(15)(a) are not

examples of tasks for which there are no arc flash hazards. In addition, referring to other examples

of tasks where are no arc flash hazards that are not already exempted in this requirement is

irrelevantDavid A. Pace The revision adds tasks that should not be added. The existing requirements and wording was clear

and should be retained. There are two primary reasons for implementing an energized electrical

work permit process. 1) To eliminate jobs from being done that don’t need to be and doing the work

energized cannot be justified. 2) If the decision is made to do the work energized, it forces a formal

hazards analysis, review by those doing the work and approval from management that it can be

done safely. The decision on when a permit is required and when it is not is based on the job to be

done and the associated hazard and risk. This is not dependent on shock or arc flash boundaries. If

the work is being done while energized, clearly people will be inside these boundaries. The question

is whether or not the type work is minor repair, normal testing and troubleshooting, routine work or

if it is repair and/or replacement work. Exemptions should not include requirements related toAbstain 1


Affirmative 19

of 473





Palmer L. Hickman This section should have been revised to refer to shock risk assessment and arc flash risk assessment

in accordance with the global revisions to shock hazard analysis and arc flash hazard analysis. Safety‐

related work practices shall be used to safeguard employees from injury while they are exposed to

electrical hazards from electrical conductors or circuit parts that are or can become energized. The

specific safety‐related work practices shall be consistent with the electrical hazards and the

associated risk. Appropriate safety‐related work practices shall be determined before any person is

exposed to the electrical hazards involved by using both shock risk assessment and arc flash risk

assessment. Only qualified persons shall be permitted to work on electrical conductors or circuit Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 1

David A. Pace See my comment on FR# 80 as related to the removal of 130.3(B)(1). The relocation of 130.3(B)(2)

seems appropriate. PI 480 should have been incorporated into this FR. The language of the PI,

“When the predicted incident energy exceeds 8 cal/cm2, and the work to be done is such that PPE is

required, an additional person shall be present to respond in the event of an incident. This person

shall be trained in emergency procedures, or shall be in direct contact with someone who is trained

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22


of 473




Palmer L. Hickman See separate attachment for Palmer's Affirmative Comment on FR110.

Negative 1

David A. Pace See my Explanation of Negative in FR# 121

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Vincent J. Saporita Class 2 circuits' power limitations, based on NEC Chapter 9 Table 11(B), recognize electric shock

threshold to be 60V dc (continuous) when current exceeds 0.005 A in dry locations. These limits are

recognized in many UL standards. Therefore 50V dc is lower than the operating point of many Class

2 powered products, including some portable equipment, IT equipment, products covered by NEC

Article 725 and low‐voltage lighting products covered by UL2108 & UL8750.

Drake A. Drobnick The removal of the Prohibited Approach Boundary makes PI#93 more useful than before. Table

130.4(C)(a) Delete row 50V‐300V and expand row 3 to include 50V‐750V. Substantiation: The

expansion of the range removes the nebulous concept of "Avoid Contact." Currently, this term

causes confusion and is based upon experience from household, not commercial/industrial systems.

Negative 1

Palmer L. Hickman Retain "as during live‐line bare‐hand work" in the following requirement or remove all of "(3)"

entirely: (3)The qualified person is insulated from any other conductive object as during live‐line

bare‐hand work.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 20

of 473





Ron Widup For assurances that all necessary data is communicated for an arc flash risk assessment, and for

additional clarity, suggestion for the following at the end of Informational Note 4 or as a new

Informational Note: Providing a local indication of the condition of maintenance on equipment,

including date of test and equipment status, and provides assurances the equipment meets

performance criteria as established by national consensus standards. Refer to NFPA 70B or NETA

d d f dd l dPalmer L. Hickman See separate attachment for Palmer's Affirmative Comment on FR110.

Vincent J. Saporita I am voting affirmative, based upon the text in the "Hide Markup" copy which cleary shows that the

last sentence beginning with "The owner" and ending with "marked label." has been included. The

text in the Legislative text format is incorrect as it shows the sentence beginning with "The owner"

and ending with "marked label." as being deleted. The Committee did not delete that sentence.

FR‐110 Continued

Drake A. Drobnick Add the following items to the Equipment Labeling list in the first sentence: Safety Switch,

Adjustable Speed Drives,Combination Motor Controller, Busways. Additional items added for

document clarity. COMMITTEE NOTE: An example of an equipment label using ANSI Z535 criteria

needs to be created at the Comment stage. A visual example is needed to provide public guidance.

Negative 1

David A. Pace The existing wording should be retained. The proposed wording is confusing. It is critically important

to define what is required as part of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis. The analysis must determine both

the incident energy and arc flash boundary. Nowhere in the document do we define what an arc

flash risk assessment is and what the products are of the assessment.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 18

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐117, Section No. 130.6(C)(1), See FR‐117




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐118, Section No. 130.6(D), See FR‐118




Negative 2

David A. Pace This change is inappropriate. Again we are removing requirements associated with the limited

approach boundary

Drake A. Drobnick End the sentence after the word "worn." By inserting only shock requirements we discount the arc

flash boundary and provide document inconsistancy. During an arc flash event conductive jewelry

becomes a "heat sink" leading to thermal skin burns.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

FR‐188, Section No. 130.6(G), See FR‐188




Palmer L. Hickman We suggest that FR‐188 be located at the end of 130.6. This will make FR‐189 unnecessary.

Carey J. Cook Add comma before "required" and after "standards". Otherwise it's not clear that it is the working

space that shall not be used for storage.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473

FR‐189, Sections 130.6(H), 130.6(I), 130.6(J), 130.6(K), See FR‐189




David M. Wallis I vote affirmative on FR‐189, as it resolves a nontechnical issue.

Negative 1

Palmer L. Hickman We suggest that FR‐188 be located at the end of 130.6. This will make FR‐189 unnecessary.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 22

FR‐119, Section No. 130.6(L), See FR‐119




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐120, Section No. 130.6(L), See FR‐120




Negative 1

David A. Pace This adds confusion and sets an expectation that will not be understood. When working in the field

and a breaker trips, it is not the design of the circuit that needs to be examined. Adding this wording

could lead to people just believing that the design of the circuit is faulty and just reset the breaker

instead of investigating whether there is a fault condition.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473

FR‐71, Section No. 130.7(C)(7)(a), See FR‐71




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 2

David A. Pace The use of the term overshoes is the correct term. Dielectric shoes are subject to damage because

they are worn constantly. Overshoes can be put on at the location of the work and removed once

the task is complete.

Drake A. Drobnick I agree with David Pace. The term "overshoe" best describes the concept of DI protection according

to ASTM 1117.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Louis A. Barrios The committee action refers to a non NFPA standard (ASTM 1506) in mandatory text. I believe this

violates the NEC Style Manuel.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Lee R. Hale A very different approach than prior cycles but makes the table method very easy to understand and

I must agree with the committee action.

Palmer L. Hickman Replace the word "of" with "and" in the last sentence of the following informational note to retain

the intent from the 2012 edition: Informational Note No. 1: The PPE category, work tasks, and

protective equipment provided in Table 130.7(C)(15)(a), Table 130.7(C)(15)(b), Table 130.7(C)(15)(c),

and Table 130.7(C)(15)(d) were identified and selected, based on the collective experience of the

NFPA 70E Technical Committee. The PPE category and the protective clothing and equipment is

generally based on determination of the estimated exposure level.Rodney J. West We support the committee action but note that in the proposed language for Table 130.7(C)(15)(c),

under the “Equipment Condition” column, there are 3 places where the words “Any of the

following:” should be: “All of the following:”.

of 473

Fr‐68 Continued ‐ Affiramtives

Drake A. Drobnick Remove "or other equipment" from Panelboard equipment type. Substantiation: Panelboard is a

defined term. Other equipment is not described within this section and causes confusion. Insert new

equipment category: Other 250V class (208V‐250V, nominal)equipment. This addition covers

equipment currently not considered by the Tables. Insert Note to Table(b)to define current limiting

as "1/2 cycle fault clearing time or less."Negative 2

Carey J. Cook This applies to Tables 130.7 (C)(15)(a), 130.7(C)(15)(b), 130.7(C)(15)(c), and 130.7(C)(15)(). A

electrical worker is not qualified to know if equipment is installed or maintained properly. Nor is he

/she qualified enough to determine if there is or is not evidence of impending failure. Especially

since the criteria for determining impending failure (last sentence of the informational note) cannot

adequately be evaluated if the doors and covers are closed/in place and secured. Delete bullets

referencing installation, maintenance, and impending failure. The remainder is accurate: If the door

David A. Pace This change is not appropriate. There is so little difference between (15)(a) & (b) there is no need to

separate them. The process of whether there is an arc flash hazard or not is based on faulty

concepts. Just looking at a piece of equipment you cannot tell if it is installed per the NEC, if it has

been maintained, nor you can tell if the equipment is facing impending failure. New equipment can

and does fail without warning. The arc flash hazard is determined by performing an arc flash hazard

analysis. If there is a hazard then people need to be protected from it. The deletion of requirements

related to rubber insulating gloves from the tables is OK for the purpose the tables now serve but

those requirements need to show up somewhere in the standard. For example, the requirement for

use of rubber insulating gloves while inserting or removing an individual starter bucket, as indicated

in the existing table needs to appear somewhere in the standard. The title of the third column” Arc

Flash Hazard” should be replaced with “PPE Required”. The question is not if there is an arc flash

hazard. Unless you have affected one or more of the factors that determine an arc flash hazard, it

has not been changed. The question is whether or not the hazard analysis/risk assessment process

results in not be comfortable doing the job without PPE In many cases in the proposed new tableAbstain 1

David M. Wallis OSHA policy requires me to abstain from all ballots on technical issues. I note that the revised tables

address issues from the HRC and task tables in previous editions of NFPA70E.

Affirmative 16

of 473





Palmer L. Hickman We suggest deleting Informational Note 1 and renumbering the remaining informational notes: (16)

Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Once the PPE category has been identified from Table

130.7(C)(15)(b) or Table 130.7(C)(15)(d) (including associated notes) and the requirements of

130.7(C)(15), Table 130.7(C)(16) shall be used to determine the required PPE for the task. Table

130.7(C)(16) lists the requirements for PPE based on PPE Categories 1 through 4. This clothing and

equipment shall be used when working within the arc flash boundary. Informational Note No. 1: See

Negative 1

David A. Pace While I agree with the removal of Category 0, this section needs to work in conjunction with the

sections covered in FR# 68. I cannot agree with changes made by this FR. See my Explanation of

Negative on FR# 68. PI# 469 should have been incorporated into this FR. Heavy duty leather boots

should be required while inside the arc flash boundary. If “shoes” or “footwear” is used, that will

i l d h Sh d t id t ti f th kl d l lAbstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Negative 2

David A. Pace This section further removes requirements associated with the limited approach boundary. There

seems to be an intentional effort to remove any requirements associated with the limited approach

boundary thus making it unnecessary. I disagree with this. Anytime a person is within arm’s reach of

exposed energized conductors there is a hazard and it needs to be addressed

Drake A. Drobnick Insulated tools are required to be used by OSHA 1910.335 when "working near." The 70E equivalent

term for this concept is the Limited Approach Boundary. Currently, insulated tools are required at

42" when exposed to 208V. Under the new requirement we do not identify a linear distance for

requiring these tools using the same 208V exposure.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐115, Section No. 130.7(F), See FR‐115




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐130, Section No. 130.8(F)(3), See FR‐130




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐171, Section No. 130.8(F)(3), See FR‐171




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Ron Widup 200.1(2) While Chapter 2 does not prescribe specific maintenance methods or procedures, it would

be beneficial to provide, in the form of an Annex, additional information to the user of the

document procedures and recommended frequency of test for overcurrent protective devices. It is

critical that OCPD's operate as designed and intended, and providing safety‐related maintenance

guidance will help ensure worker safety. Informational Note The Informational Note in 200.1 is very

important to the overall arc flash risk assessment The application of local indication as to conditionNegative 1

Louis A. Barrios While I support the informational note, it is in the wrong location. It does not belong in the scope.

The informational note should be relocated to after 205.3 or 205.4.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21





Ron Widup Same comment as 200.1, but might be more appropriate here. While Chapter 2 does not prescribe

specific maintenance methods or procedures, it would be beneficial to provide, in the form of an

Annex, additional information to the user of the document procedures and recommended

frequency of test for overcurrent protective devices. It is critical that OCPD's operate as designed

Negative 1

David A. Pace I disagree with the changes of the wording in the first sentence. The existing wording is clear and

appropriate. The revised wording will only create confusion. Risk assessment is an important

element. It is the hazard that hurts people and that is where we need to remain focused. I agree

with the addition of the second sentenceAbstain 1


Affirmative 21

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐159, Section No. 205.14 [Excluding any Sub‐Sections], See FR‐159




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐158, Section No. 205.14(1), See FR‐158




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Carey J. Cook Change "and" to "or" in the underlined copy. You typically repair something or you replace

something. Is's a nonsequitur to repair and then then replace something.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 1

David A. Pace The existing wording is correct. There are fire and explosion hazards that could result from having

combustible materials within the arc flash boundary of electrical equipment.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1

David A. Pace Some of the items listed in 250.1(1) through (14) are required to be tested at intervals of less than 3

years. This revision is confusing and sets up a contradiction. The reference to ASTM standards is

necessary.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐83, Definition (310.2): Battery Effect., See FR‐83




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1

David M. Wallis OSHA policy requires me to abstain from all ballots on technical issues. However, I note that the

language "shall be advised of the electrical hazards" is vague. It is unclear how simply advising an

unqualified employee of hazards will provide adequate safety. The language does not seem to

Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Louis A. Barrios "Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Procedure" should be changed to "Arc Flash Risk Assessment" in order to

be consistent with other actions taken in the Standard.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Carey J. Cook Change "shall be" in the underlined copy to "are". This makes more sense gramatically.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐97, Definition (320.2): Prospective Fault Current., See FR‐97




Carey J. Cook Change "protection" to "protective". This is the more common usage of this term.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Palmer L. Hickman We suggest the following revision in (B)(1)(1) changing "or" to "and.": (B) Electrolyte Hazards. (1)

Batteries with Liquid Battery Activities That Include Handling of Liquid Electrolyte. The following

protective equipment shall be available to employees performing any type of service on a battery

with liquid electrolyte: (1) Goggles and face shield appropriate for the electrical hazard and the

chemical hazard

of 473

FR‐99 Continued

Drake A. Drobnick Insert into line item #1 CHEMICAL goggles AND ARC RATED face shield....

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐101, Sections 320.3(D), 320.3(E), See FR‐101




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐123, Definition (330.2): Fail Safe., See FR‐123




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 1

David A. Pace Many other safety competencies require the operator to have in their possession proof of

qualification. The use of lasers is one of those areas where the owner should not have to call the

home office to find out is the person is qualified. The person needs to have it on them.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Negative 1

David A. Pace The objective should always be to reduce or eliminate the hazard first, then if a hazard still exists,

then to reduce the risk associated with the hazard

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐129, Definition (350.2): Competent Person., See FR‐129




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

of 473

FR‐131, Section No. A.1, See FR‐131




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐111, Section No. A.3.2, See FR‐111




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐113, Section No. A.3.5, See FR‐113




Negative 1

David A. Pace IEEE 1584 needs to be retained as a reference. There are other references listed that are not part of

a mandatory requirement. IEEE is the primary method for performing an arc flash study and incident

energy analysis

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐133, Annex B, See FR‐133




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐134, Annex C, See FR‐134




Drake A. Drobnick Annexes' provide examples of concepts from the body of the standard. Annex C describes section

130.4. By including words not found within this section we create additional non‐mandatory

requirements that add confusion to the document. C.1.2.2 Item 2: The word "plan" has not been

defined and section 130.4 contains no requirement to have one and should be deleted. Add

Insulated Tools as a line item to this sectionNegative 1

David A. Pace Elimination of the Prohibited Approach Boundary is inappropriate. See my Explanation of Negative

on FR# 121

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

FR‐137, Section No. D.1, See FR‐137




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐169, Sections D.2, D.3, D.4, D.5, D.6, D.7, See FR‐169




Negative 0

Abstain 1


of 473

Affirmative 23

FR‐170, Section No. D.8, See FR‐170




Rodney J. West We agree with the committee action but note that the suggested approach may not always yield

accurate results. Therefore, the following proposed language: “A conservative approach in

determining the short‐circuit current that the battery will deliver at 25° C is to assume that the

maximum available short‐circuit current is 10 times the 1 minute ampere rating (to 1.75 volts per

cell at 25° C and the specific gravity of 1.215) of the battery. A more accurate value…” should be

deleted and simply replaced with: “A value…”.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐138, Annex E, See FR‐138




Negative 1

David A. Pace I disagree with changing "hazard" to "risk" in E.2(8) and the addition of the "assessment of the risk"

in E.3(3). We are losing focus on the hazard elimination. That is the first step. If we cannot eliminate

the hazard then we do the risk assessment.

Abstain 1


of 473

Affirmative 22

FR‐140, Annex F, See FR‐140




Negative 1

David A. Pace Removal of levels of frequency in Table F.2.4.3 and probability in Table 2.5 are inappropriate. This

dilutes the risk assessment process.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22

FR‐141, Annex G, See FR‐141




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐151, Section No. H.2, See FR‐151




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Drake A. Drobnick Table H.3(b) cal.cm2 breakpoints should be <1.2, 1.2‐12, and >12 as burns occur at and within the

arc flash boundary. Tables H.3(a)&(b) should define Hearing Protection as ear canal inserts to be

consistant with Table 130.7(c)(16) and FR69B.

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 22





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐143, Section No. J.1, See FR‐143




Negative 1

David A. Pace I disagree with the removal of the Prohibited Approach Boundary. See my Explanation of Negative

for FR# 121

Abstain 1


of 473

Affirmative 22

FR‐142, Section No. K.4, See FR‐142




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐144, Section No. L.1, See FR‐144




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

FR‐145, Section No. O.1 [Excluding any Sub‐Sections], See FR‐145




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

FR‐146, Section No. O.1.2, See FR‐146




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23





Carey J. Cook Delete the "s" in hazards. Should read "electrical hazard risk assessments . . ."

Negative 1

David A. Pace In the design phase we are trying to reduce the hazards. If we cannot eliminate the hazards then a

risk assessment can be done.

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21





Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473





Carey J. Cook Section O 2.4 is NEW material entitled, "Other methods". The committee statement says that

"additional methods have been added . . . " Yet the copy is shown as struck through. Is this an

editorial staff mistake? Should this copy be underlined rather than struck through?

Rodney J. West We support the revisions being suggested by the committee. We suggest the committee consider

the following language be deleted from the ZSI definition in O.2.3(1): “… fault in the minimum time.

Clearing the fault in the shortest time aids in keeping the incident energy in the circuit to its lowest

possible value." and replace it with the following: “…fault will be cleared by the circuit breaker

closest to the fault with no intentional delay in order to minimize incident energy. “

Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 21

FR‐149, Section No. P.1, See FR‐149




Negative 0

Abstain 1


Affirmative 23

of 473

Chairman’s Report for TC or CMP: NFPA 79 Signature:

1.) List date(s) and location of meeting: August 13 - 17, 2012 Double Tree, Denver, CO

2.) List names of guests in attendance: See attached list.

3.) List names of guests addressing the Panel, the subject of their address, and the length of time they spoke: N/A

4.) Number of Pubic Inputs or Comments acted upon: 115 5.) Number of First Revisions created: 99 6.) Number of Panel or TC generated First Revisions or Comments: 7.) Appointments of any Task Groups that will be working on any Panel or TC subject, subsequent to the First Draft Meeting, along with the names of members of the Task Group(s): Parenthetical References TG and Control Systems Incorporating Software- and Firmware-Based Controllers TG. See attached list of TG members and scopes.

7. List any request contained in a Panel or TC Statement that requires NEC Correlating Committee attention: Although not contained in any TC statement, I would ask the NEC Correlating Committee to look at PI- 94, Log 114. The submitter was asking to include information in 11.5 that would identify that the working space requirements for an enclosure containing the supply conductors was covered by the NEC. The TC rejected this essentially noting the space was covered by NFPA 79. Article 670 covers the supply conductors to the machine and includes an informational note following 670.1 that points readers of the NEC to 110.26 for the working space requirements when the equipment contains the supply conductors. This same informational note also states to see NFPA 79 for the workspace requirements for machine power and control equipment. The supply conductor terminals are often located in the machine control cabinet so it is not clear which document applies. Section 1.1.1 of NFPA 79 states the Standard starts at point of connection of the supply conductors to the machine which supports the TC decision to not revise 11.5 as recommended in

of 473

PI 94. Considering the Informational Note in 670.1 and the text of 1.1.1, for example a supply circuit to a machine control cabinet with a remote disconnect. I would apply 110.26 to the remote disconnect and 11.5 to the machine control cabinet where the supply conductors terminate. A recommendation from the NEC CC would be greatly appreciated.

8. List any Panel or TC actions that, in your opinion, need to be referred to another Panel(s) for correlation:

9. List any Public Inputs or Comments that should be referred to the Toxicity Advisory Committee:

10. List all Public Inputs or Comments related to combustibles in plenums or other air handling spaces:

11. List any general Panel or TC requests for information or assistance from the NEC Correlating Committee:

12. List any additional information that you feel would be helpful to the NEC Correlating Committee, staff, or to the process in general: I am sure the new process will work well over time with knowledge gained, but using the Terra system at this meeting was challenging. Special appreciation to Mark Cloutier, NFPA Staff Liaison, for the extra effort regarding the use of the system. Unfortunately NFPA Staff that were familiar with Terra system were unable to attend the meeting. Some issues I noted with the Terra system were:

• Because information was being transferred between File Maker and Terra, the time between when the public inputs were received by the committee members and the actual first draft meeting was limited. Therefore it was challenging for task group assignments and productive work.

• The small size font was difficult to read on the screen and there were no real options for

staff to make changes or to be able scroll left to right so the members could see the entire statement.

of 473

• The hierarchy of changes to a section when there are first and second level subdivisions

involved. It was difficult to make changes to the opening paragraph (parent text) after a first revision had been made to a subdivision.

• It was not easy for the committee members to track the sections being worked on. The

Terra display screen did include the Log number or PI being worked on along with the FR number if applicable. That information should be provided on one of the upper corners of the window.

13. Were any units of measure "Accepted" by the Panel or TC that are not listed in Annex C of the NEC Style Manual? If so, please list the section number(s) and proposal/comment number(s) below:

14. Identify any issues that should be brought to the attention of the NFPA Research Foundation for their input and assistance:

of 473


1/133submittals.nf pa.org/TerraViewWeb/ViewerPage.jsp

First Revision No. 50-NFPA 79-2012 [ Global Input ]

Delete the parenthetical terms used to describe IEC terms that follow terms used in NFPA79 such as "protective bonding". Add information in Annex A explaining the IEC term. Alsodelete terms in Chapter three that only define parenthetical terms in the standard. Thelocations are:

The following sections must have the parenthetical terms removed:

remove from 6.4.1.1 (2); 8.1.2; 8.2; 8.2.1; 8.2.1.1; 8.2.1.2; 8.2.2; 8.2.3; 8.2.3.1; 8.2.3.2;8.2.3.5.1; 8.2.3.5.2; 8.2.4, 8.4.2; 9.1.1.2; 13.2.2.1; 13.4.5.3(1) &(2); 15.1.1(5); 18.1; 18.2 -(2); 18.3; 18.4; Table 18.2; A.3.3.9; A.3.3.77






CommitteeStatement:

The present use of parenthetical terms is confusing to the user of the standard. Theterms described do not always match the term they follow as many times they arenot directly interchangeable. The base for NFPA 79 is the NEC and its use shouldbe based on the terms from the NEC where they are provided. The committeedecided to add a separate annex to make it easier for the user to compare theterms in one location.

ResponseMessage:

FR-50-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff liaison will create a FR for each section identified.

Public Input No. 80-NFPA 79-2012 [Global Input]

of 473



First Revision No. 97-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 1.3.1.1 ]

1.3.1.1 2

When changes other than repairs are made to machines that do not comply withthe provisions of this standard, the changes shall conform to the provisions of thisstandard.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently located does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style.

ResponseMessage:

FR-97-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 11-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 1.3.1.1]

of 473

3/133

First Revision No. 98-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 1.3.2 ]

1.3.2 3

This standard shall not apply to the following:

(1) Fixed or portable tools judged under the requirements of a testing laboratoryacceptable to the authority having jurisdiction

(2) Machines used in dwelling units






CommitteeStatement:

This section is being renumbered as a result of the Editorial Task Grouprecommendations to align the 2015 Edition of NFPA 79 with 1.8.1 of the NFPAManual of Style.

ResponseMessage:

FR-98-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 13-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 1.3.2]

of 473




2.3.6 UL Publications.


ANSI/UL 50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, 2007.

ANSI/UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment, 1999, Revised 2010.

UL 508A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels, 2001, Revised 2010.

ANSI/UL 870, Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings,2008.

ANSI/UL 1063, Standard for Machine-Tool Wires and Cables, 2006.

ANSI/UL 1581, Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables and FlexibleCords, 2001, Revised 2009 2011 .






Committee Statement: The reference standard was updated to the most recent edition.

Response Message: FR-38-NFPA 79-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 39-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 3.1 ]

3.1 General.

The definitions contained in this chapter shall apply to the terms used in thisstandard. Where terms are not defined in this chapter or within another chapter,they shall be defined using their ordinarily accepted meanings within the context inwhich they are used. Merriam - Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th edition, shallbe the source for the ordinarily accepted meaning.






CommitteeStatement:

The change reflects the proper dictionary to be referenced when a term is notdefined in the document. This editorial change is necessary to comply with section2.3.1.3.1 of the Manual of Style for NFPA Technical Committee Documents.

ResponseMessage:

FR-39-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Oct 24,2012

Mark Cloutierper production

The MOS has been updated and Merriam should stay

Public Input No. 23-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 3.1]

of 473

6/133


3.3.3.1 Actuator 4 Actuator , Machine.

A power mechanism used to effect motion of the machine.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. This section is beingrenumbered as a result of the Editorial Task Group recommendations to align the2015 Edition of NFPA 79 with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style.

ResponseMessage:

FR-99-NFPA 79-2012


of 473

11/9/12



3.3.9 * Bonding 9 Bonding (Bonded).

Connected to establish electrical continuity and conductivity. [70:100]






CommitteeStatement:

The asterisk was removed from this definition and the associated annex note wasremoved by FR-55 because the annex information referenced 3.3.77 (protectivebonding circuit definition) which was removed by PI-88, FR-51.

ResponseMessage:

FR-54-NFPA 79-2012


3.3.34 Earth.

See 3.3.47 , Ground.






CommitteeStatement:

Delete this term as it is already used in the definition of "ground" and isunnecessary.

ResponseMessage:

FR-5-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




3.3.50 Grounding Conductor.

A conductor used to connect equipment or the grounded circuit of a wiring systemto a grounding electrode or electrodes.






CommitteeStatement:

Delete this definition. The term has been deleted in the 2011 NEC and replaced witheither the equipment grounding conductor, bonding conductor or groundingelectrode conductor. NFPA 79 should correspond with the use of terms in the NECwhere possible.

ResponseMessage:

FR-3-NFPA 79-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 40-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after 3.3.55 ]

3.3.x Industrial Control Panel. An assembly of two or more components consisting of: power circuit components only, such as motor controllers overload relays, fuseddisconnect switches, and circuit breakers; or control circuit components only, such as pushbuttons, pilot lights, selector switches,timers, switches, and control relays; or a combination of power and control circuit components. These components, with associated wiring and terminals, are mounted on or containedwithin an enclosure or mounted on a subpanel. The industrial control panel does not includethe controlled equipment.






CommitteeStatement:

This term is used in the Standard but a definition does not exist. Adding thisdefinition will add clarity to the Standard. This is the definition of industrial controlpanel from NEC 409.2.

ResponseMessage:

FR-40-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Oct 24,2012

Mark Cloutier The MOS does not permit lists in definitions. the definition was edited based on this

Public Input No. 114-NFPA 79-2012 [New Section after 3.3.55]

of 473


submittals.nf pa.org/TerraViewWeb/ViewerPage.jsp


3.3.x Overcurrent Protective Device, Branch-Circuit. A device capable of providingprotection for service, feeder, and branch circuits and equipment over the full range ofovercurrents between its rated current and its interrupting rating. Branch-circuit overcurrentprotective devices are provided with interrupting ratings appropriate for the intended use butno less than 5000 amperes.






CommitteeStatement:

This term is used in several sections of the Standard, but is not currently defined.This definition is from the 2011 NEC and will provide the proper definition for thisterm.

ResponseMessage:

FR-15-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 115-NFPA 79-2012 [New Section after 3.3.71]

of 473




3.3.74 Positive Opening Operation (of a contact element).

The achievement of contact separation as the direct result of a specified movementof the switch actuator through nonresilient members (e.g., not dependent uponsprings).






CommitteeStatement:

Direct Opening operation (3.3.30) is used in the standard. There should not betwo terms essentially identically defined.

ResponseMessage:

FR-41-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




3.3.77 * Protective Bonding Circuit.

The whole of the protective conductors and conductive parts used for protectionagainst electric shock in the event of an insulation failure.






CommitteeStatement:

The term was deleted from Chapter 3 and will be relocated to a new annex as it isonly used as a parenthetical term. Using multiple terms in the same document tomean similar things adds confusion. Due to FR-50 on PI 80 (global) theparenthetical terms are being removed therefore a definition for this term is notneeded. The associated annex information will also be deleted. Additionally, thisparenthetical reference definition 3.3.77 (Protective Bonding Circuit) was removed byPI 88, Log # 112, FR-51 and the associated annex information (A.3.3.77) will alsobe removed by FR-52.

ResponseMessage:

FR-51-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Remove associated annex information A.3.3.77


of 473




3.3.78 Protective Conductor.

A conductor required by some measures for protection against electric shock forelectrically connecting exposed conductive parts, extraneous conductive parts, ormain earthing terminal.






CommitteeStatement:

The term was deleted from Chapter 3 and will be relocated to a new annex as it isonly used as a parenthetical term. Using multiple terms in the same document tomean similar things adds confusion. Due to FR-50 on PI 80 the parenthetical termsare being removed therefore a definition for this term is not needed.

ResponseMessage:

FR-53-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




3.3.98 Subassembly.

An assembly of electrical devices connected together that forms a simple functionalunit.






CommitteeStatement:

Subassembly is a defined term, but is not currently used in the requirements ofthe standard. As such the definition is not needed.

ResponseMessage:

FR-44-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




3.3.100* Supplementary Overcurrent Protective Device, Supplementary .

A device intended to provide limited overcurrent protection for specific applicationsand utilization equipment such as found within industrial machines. This limitedprotection is in addition to the protection provided in the required branch circuit bythe branch circuit overcurrent protective device.






CommitteeStatement:

This term is revised to correlate with how it is shown in the NEC. The definitionremains slightly modified from the definition in the NEC with regards to types ofutilization equipment to be relevant to industrial machines.

ResponseMessage:

FR-21-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




Surge-Protective Device (SPD). A protective device for limiting transient voltages bydiverting or limiting surge current; it also prevents continued flow of follow current

while remaining capable of repeating these functions and is designated as follows:

Type 1: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation between the secondary ofthe service transformer and

the line side of the service disconnect overcurrent device.

Type 2: Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of theservice disconnect overcurrent device, including SPDs located at the branch panel.

Type 3: Point of utilization SPDs.

Type 4: Component SPDs, including discrete components, as well as assemblies. [70:100]






CommitteeStatement:

This new definition was added to correlate with FR-18 on Section 7.8 Log # 42 PI111 as a companion resolution to correlate this definition with the term "surgeprotection devices" (SPDs) used in the requirement.

ResponseMessage:

FR-19-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




4.4.2.1

Transient suppression, isolation, or other appropriate means shall be providedwhere the equipment generates electrical noise or transients, which can affect theoperation of equipment.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style.

ResponseMessage:

FR-85-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




5.3.1.3

The supply circuit disconnecting means other than attachment plugs andreceptacles shall be mounted within the control enclosure or immediately adjacentthereto.

Exception Exception (1) : Externally mounted supply circuit disconnecting means,whether interlocked or not interlocked with the control enclosure, supplyingmachines totaling 2 hp or less shall be permitted to be mounted up to 6 m (20 ft)away from the enclosure providing that the disconnecting means is in sight fromand readily accessible to the operator.

Exception (2): A supply circuit disconnecting means mounted in a separateenclosure and interlocked in accordance with 6.2.3 with the control enclosure(s)it supplies shall be permitted to be mounted up to 6 m (20 ft) away providing thatthe disconnecting means is in sight from the control enclosure(s) and readilyaccessible to the operator. The control enclosure(s) shall be marked indicatingthe location of the disconnecting means. The disconnecting means shall bemarked indicating the industrial machine it supplies.






CommitteeStatement:

The new exemption language will broaden permitted use of a separated mountedsupply disconnecting means. Due to concerns of arc-flash and shock hazards, it isbecoming increasingly desirable to locate the supply disconnecting means in aseparate enclosure to ensure that absolutely no power is present in the main panelduring maintenance activities after the disconnecting means is turned off andlockout procedures applied. However, as it is now common for the controlenclosure(s) to be located on a machine rather than a freestanding separateenclosure, it is often not possible to mount the supply disconnect immediatelyadjacent to the main enclosure. Marking requirements were added to avoidconfusion and improve safety for the worker. The addition of the reference to 6.2.3clarifies the interlocking requirements.

ResponseMessage:

FR-45-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




5.3.

2 Type2 Type .

The supply circuit disconnecting device shall be

one of the following types:

(1) A listed motor circuit switch (switch disconnector) rated in horsepower

(2) A listed rated ,

branch circuit–rated,molded case circuit breaker

(3) A listed molded case switch

(4) An instantaneous trip circuit breaker that is part of a listed combination motorcontroller

(5) A listed self-protected combination controller limited to single motor applications

(6) An attachment plug and receptacle (plug/socket combination) for cordconnection






CommitteeStatement:

The committee made the change to correlate with PI 122 which deletes the term"rated". Deletion of the term "branch circuit" was made because all listed moldedcase circuit breakers are branch circuit overcurrent protective devices.

ResponseMessage:

FR-23-NFPA 79-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 100-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 5.3.3.2.1 ]

5.3.3.2.1 3

In addition to the requirements in 5.3.3.2, an additional switching device on themachine shall be provided for routine power switching operations of the machine onand off.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-100-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 17-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 5.3.3.2.1]

of 473

21/133


6.1 General 1* General .

Electrical equipment shall provide protection of persons from electric shock, fromdirect and indirect contact, and from warn of potential arc-flash hazards.






CommitteeStatement:

The current language could be interpreted to require that the equipment must bedesigned to protect person(s) from arc flash hazards. The revised languagecoincides with the committee discussions from the ROC meeting in Milwaukee, WIto warn a person(s) of arc flash hazard potential. The asterisk was added to pointthe user to the annex to provide information that the requirements of Chapter 6inherently reduce the likelihood that a arc-flash event will occur.

ResponseMessage:

FR-46-NFPA 79-2012



of 473



6.2.2.1 Direct 3 Direct Contact from Outside an Enclosure.

Equipment enclosures and enclosure openings shall meet the requirements ofANSI/UL 508, UL 508A, ANSI/UL 50, or NEMA 250. (See Figure 6.2.2 3 . 1. )

Figure 6.2.2.1 Jointed 3 Jointed Test Finger.

Exception Exception : In the absence of a rated enclosure, the determination ofthe suitability of an enclosure as protection from electrical shock shall bedetermined by using a test finger as described in Figure 6.2.2 3 . 1. The testfinger shall be applied, with only minimal force, in every opening in the enclosureafter removal of all parts of the enclosure that are capable of being removedwithout the use of a tool. The test finger shall not encounter live parts in anydirection.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-101-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




6.4.1.1 2

PELV circuits shall satisfy all of the following conditions:

(1) The nominal voltage shall not exceed the following:

(a) 30 volts ac (rms value) or 60 volts dc (ripple-free) when the equipment isused in normally dry locations and when large area contact of live partswith the human body is not expected

(b) 6 volts ac (rms value) or 15 volts dc ( ripple-free) in all other cases

(2) One side of the circuit or one point of the source of the supply of that circuitshall be connected to the equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit.

(3) Live parts of PELV circuits shall be electrically separated from other livecircuits. Electrical separation shall be not less than that required between theprimary and secondary circuits of a safety isolating transformer.

(4) Conductors of each PELV circuit shall be physically separated from those ofany other circuit. When this requirement is impracticable, the insulationprovisions of 13.1.3 shall apply.

(5) Attachment plugs and receptacles (plugs and socket combinations) for aPELV circuit shall conform to the following:

(a) Attachment plugs (plugs) shall not be able to enter receptacles (socket-outlets) of other voltage systems.

(b) Receptacles (socket-outlets) shall not admit plugs of other voltagesystems.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee agreed to remove all parenthetical terms to avoid confusion for theuser. Additionally, the section as currently numbered does not comply with theNFPA Manual of Style which states that all subdivisions shall contain at least twosubdivisions. This change is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the2012 document for compliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style.

ResponseMessage:

FR-74-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




6.6 Protection Against Arc 6 Arc Flash Hazard Warning .

A safety sign shall be provided in accordance with 16.2.3.






CommitteeStatement:

The change in the title of the section will clarify the purpose of this section. Thepurpose is to require an arc flash warning sign to warn qualified person(s) of apotential arc flash hazard. It is not to provide protection against an actual arc flash.This language is consistent with the actions taken in the 2011 NEC where the titleof 110.16 was changed to identical language.

ResponseMessage:

FR-48-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.1.2

All overcurrent protective devices shall be selected and applied with properconsideration being given to, but not limited to, the following:

(1) System maximum available fault current at the point of application

(2) Interrupting rating of the overcurrent protective device

(3) Voltage rating of the system

(4) Load and circuit characteristics

(a) Normal operating current

(b) Inrush characteristics

(c) Thermal withstand capability (I 2 t)

(d) Magnetic withstand capability (Ip )

(5) Current-limiting ability of the overcurrent protective device

(6) Coordination of the overcurrent protective devices to each other






Committee Statement: Addition of “overcurrent” adds clarity.



of 473




7.2.4.2.5

Control circuit conductors supplied by the secondary side of a single-phasetransformer having a 2-wire (single-voltage) secondary shall be considered protectedby overcurrent protection provided on the primary (supply) side of the transformer, ifthis protection is in accordance with 7.2.7 and does not exceed the valuedetermined by multiplying the secondary conductor ampacity by the secondary-to-primary voltage ratio. Transformer secondary conductors (other than 2-wire) areshall not considered be considered to be protected by the primary overcurrentprotective device.






CommitteeStatement:

The change makes the document clear that conductors other than those from 2 wiresecondary transformers are not permitted to be protected by the primary overcurrentprotective device. The proposed language change is also consistent with 240.4(f) ofNFPA 70. Lastly, the change provides mandatory text in accordance with 2.3.3.1and 2.3.3.2 of the Manual of Style which does not permit non mandatory text in thebody of the standard and requires the terms shall and shall not to be used toindicate mandatory requirements.

ResponseMessage:

FR-13-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.7.1

Transformers for motor control circuits shall be protected in accordance with Article430, Part VI, of NFPA 70. Transformers for other than motor control circuits shall beprotected in accordance with Article 450, Part I, of NFPA 70.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-103-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.8 Location of Overcurrent Protective Devices.

An overcurrent protective device shall be located at the point where the conductor tobe protected is connected to the supply except as follows:

(1) Overcurrent protection at the supply shall not be required if all of the followingconditions are met:

(a) The current-carrying capacity of each of the conductors is at least equalto that required for their respective load, in accordance with Section12.5.

(b) Each connecting conductor to the overcurrent protective devices is nolonger than 3 m (10 ft).

(c) The conductor is suitably protected from physical damage.

(d) The conductor does not extend beyond the control panel enclosure.

(e) The conductor terminates in a single branch circuit–rated circuitovercurrent protective device.

(2) Overcurrent protection at the supply shall not be required if all of the followingconditions are met:

(a) The conductor has an ampacity of at least one-third that of the conductorfrom which it is supplied.

(b) The conductor is suitably protected from physical damage.

(c) The conductor is not over 7.5 m (25 ft) long, and the conductorterminates in a single branch circuit–rated circuit overcurrent protectivedevice.






CommitteeStatement:

Deletion of “rated” and addition of “overcurrent” adds clarity. An acceptable branchcircuit overcurrent protective device is determined by the requirements of Chapter 7.

ResponseMessage:

FR-14-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.10.1.1

A listed self-protected combination controller shall be permitted in lieu of thedevices specified in Table 7.2.10.1 for branch circuit and overload protection of asingle motor circuit. Where the

7.2.10.1.2 Where a listed self-protected combination controller has an adjustable,instantaneous trip setting, the setting shall not exceed 1300 percent of full-loadmotor current for other than Design B energy efficient motors and not more than1700 percent of full-load motor current for Design B energy efficient motors.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. The committee separated thetwo requirements in one section into two sections

ResponseMessage:

FR-2-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.10.2

Several motors, each not exceeding 1 hp in rating, shall be permitted on a nominal120-volt branch circuit protected at not over 20 amperes or a 600-volt nominal orless branch circuit, protected at not over 15 amperes, where all of the followingconditions are met:

(1) The full-load rating of each motor does not exceed 6 amperes.

(2) The rating of the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective devicemarked on any of the controllers is not exceeded. The short-circuit andground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker orsingle set of fuses.

(3) Individual overload protection conforms to Section 7.3.






CommitteeStatement:

This addition clarifies the type of protective device required and correlates with NEC430.53(A) and similar requirements in NFPA 79 7.2.10.4. Note that in NEC 430.53 alast sentence was added to clarify that an inverse time circuit breaker or fuses arerequired in case of 430.53(A).

ResponseMessage:

FR-17-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.10.3

Where the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protective device is selectednot to exceed that allowed by 7.2.10.1 for the smallest rated motor, two or moremotors or one or more motors and other load(s), with each motor having individualoverload protection, shall be permitted to be connected to a branch circuit where itcan be determined that the branch-circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protectivedevice will not open under severe normal conditions of service that might beencountered. The short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a singleinverse time circuit breaker or single set of fuses.






CommitteeStatement:

This addition clarifies the type of protective device required and correlates with NEC430.53(B) and similar requirements in NFPA 79 7.2.10.4. Note that in NEC 430.53 alast sentence was added to clarify that an inverse time circuit breaker or fuses arerequired in case of 430.53(B).

ResponseMessage:

FR-16-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




7.2.11.

3 3 The additional overcurrent protective devices shall be all of the following:

(1) Installed within or on the machinery or provided as a separate assembly

(2) Accessible (but need not be readily accessible)

(3) Suitable for A branch-circuit protection overcurrent protective device






CommitteeStatement:

The revision will align with the changes in PI 122, FR-14 and PI 46, FR-26.


of 473




7.3.1 General.

Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor controller, andbranch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor overloads or failureto start.

7.3.

1.

1 Motors.

Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with Article 430, Part III,of NFPA 70 .






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-84-NFPA 79-2012



7.

8 Protection8 Protection Against Overvoltages Due to Lightning and Switching Surges.

7.8.

1 Overvoltage1 Overvoltage Surge Protection Devices (SPDs) .

SPDs Protective devices shall be permitted to be provided to protect against the effects of

of 473



overvoltages due to lightning or switching surges.

7.8.

2 Lightning2 Lightning Overvoltage Suppression Connections .

Where provided, SPDs devices for the suppression for overvoltages shall be connected inaccordance with product markings and installation instructions.

7.8.

3 Surge3 Surge Switching Overvoltage Suppression Equipment Protection .

Where provided, SPDs devices for the suppression of overvoltages due to switching surgesshall be connected across the terminals of all equipment requiring such protection.

7.8.4 SPD Type and Location. The type of SPD provided shall be suitable for theinstallation location of the industrial machinery. Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3 SPDs shall belisted devices.

7.8.4.1 Type 1 SPD. Where the SPD is located on the line side of the service disconnectovercurrent protection, a Type 1 SPD shall be provided,

7.8.4.2 Type 2 SPD. Where the SPD is located on the load side of the service disconnectovercurrent protection, feeder circuit, or separately derived system, a Type 1 or Type 2 SPDshall be provided. Where Type 2 SPDs are provided, the SPD shall be on the load side of anovercurrent protective device.

7.8.4.3 Type 3 SPD. Where the SPD is located on the load side of the branch-circuitovercurrent protective device, a Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3 SPD shall be provided. WhereType 3 SPDs are provided and where included in the manufacturer’s instructions, the Type 3SPD connection shall be a minimum of 10 m (30 ft) of conductor distance from the service orseparately derived system disconnect.

7.8.4.4 Type 4 SPD. Where a Type 4 SPD is used within the industrial control panel ofindustrial machinery, it shall be identified for use in Type 1, Type 2, or Type 3 applicationsand be suitable for the location of the industrial machinery.

7.8.5 Short-Circuit Current Rating. The SPD shall be marked with a short-circuit currentrating and shall not be installed at a point on the system where the available fault current isin excess of that rating.






Committee

Statement:

Revision correlates with the UL 1449, 3rd Edition changes to clarify the devices arenow called “Surge Protection Devices”. In addition, the revised text helps clarify theinstallation requirements for these devices, whether for protection of lighting orswitching surges. In either case, SPDs must be installed per productmarkings/instructions and connected to protect all equipment requiring protection.

Additionally, new text has been added to require a specific Type of SPD that is of 473



Statement: Additionally, new text has been added to require a specific Type of SPD that is

suitable for the installation location of the industrial machinery and correlates withNEC Article 285. The proposed text was revised to split new 7.8.4 into sections toaddress each Type of SPD separately, to additionally allow the use of Type 4 SPDsand to include requirements for a short circuit current rating.

ResponseMessage:

FR-18-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 14,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

This section was completely rewritten by the Chapter 7 task group to address concerns by the task group and checked for accurac. see task group rewrite for accuracy against edited version. This note is to verify the correct edit by staff and to verify the submitters intent.


of 473




7.9 Power Factor Correction Capacitors.

7.9.1 Overcurrent

Capacitor Overcurrent Protection.

Where capacitors are installed for motor power factor correction on circuitsof 600 volts, nominal, and under, overcurrent protection for the conductorsshall be provided. Each capacitor cell or capacitor bank shall be protectedagainst rupture of the individual cells. Protection included as a part of thecapacitor assembly shall be permitted.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-86-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 17,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The title should read: Power Factor Correction Capacitor Overcurrent Protection. The paragraph should follow directly.

Aug 20,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

he paragraph that follows should not be in Bold type. The editor would not remove the bold type


of 473




8.1 * General 1 General .

8.1. 1 Applicability

1 Applicability .

This chapter provides the requirements for grounding, bonding, and for the groundedconductor.

8.1.

2 Connections

2 Connections .

Grounded conductors shall not be connected to the equipment grounding

(protective bonding)

circuit, except for separately derived systems.

Transformer mounting

8.1.3 Mounting. Mounting hardware shall not be used for

either

terminating conductors used for grounding or bonding

terminations

.






CommitteeStatement:

The asterisk was deleted from 8.1 therefore the associated annex information wasremoved. The committee agreed to remove all parenthetical terms to avoid confusionfor the user and added a separate annex to make it easier for the user to comparethe terms in one location. Therefore, adding an asterisk and associated Annex Ainformation was not needed.

ResponseMessage:

FR-57-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




8.2 Equipment Grounding (Protective Bonding) Circuit.

8.2.1 Grounding Circuit Parts.

The equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit shall consist of the following:

(1) Equipment grounding (protective) conductor terminal(s)

(2) Equipment grounding (protective) conductors and equipment bonding jumpers

8.2.1.1 Grounding Circuit Stress.

All parts of the equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit shall be capable ofwithstanding the highest thermal and mechanical stress that can be caused byfault currents flowing in that part of the circuit. All exposed conductive parts of theelectrical equipment and the machine(s) shall be connected to the equipmentgrounding (protective bonding) circuit.

Exception Exception : Small parts such as screws, rivets, and nameplates thatare not likely to become energized shall not be required to be grounded.

8.2.1.2 Equipment Grounding.

The machine and all exposed, non-current-carrying conductive parts, material, andequipment likely to be energized shall be effectively grounded. Where electricaldevices are mounted on metal mounting panels that are located within nonmetallicenclosures, the metal mounting panels shall be effectively grounded. Wherespecified by the manufacturer, components and subassemblies shall be bonded tothe equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

8.2.1.3* Equipment Grounding (Protective) Conductor Terminal.

8.2.1.3.1

For each incoming supply circuit, an equipment grounding (protective) conductorterminal shall be provided in the vicinity of the associated phase conductorterminals.

8.2.1.3.2

All of the items in 8.2.1.2 shall be interconnected to the equipment grounding(protective) conductor terminal.

8.2.1.3.3

The equipment grounding (protective) conductor terminal shall accommodate anequipment grounding conductor sized in accordance with Table 8.2.2.3.

8.2.1.3.4* of 473



8.2.1.3.4*

The equipment grounding (protective) conductor terminal shall be identified with theword “GROUND,” the letters “GND” or “GRD,” the letter “G,” the color GREEN, orthe symbol in Figure 8.2.1.3.4. In addition to the required marking, the letters PEshall also be permitted to identify this terminal.

Figure 8.2.1.3.4 Grounding Symbol.

8.2.1.3.5

Where an auxiliary grounding electrode is specified, the terminal shallaccommodate this additional grounding electrode conductor.

8.2.2 Equipment Grounding (Protective) Conductors and BondingJumpers.

Equipment grounding (protective) conductors and bonding jumpers shall beidentified in accordance with 13.2.2.

8.2.2.1

Conductors used for grounding and bonding purposes shall be copper. Stipulationson stranding and flexing as outlined in Chapter 12 shall apply.

Exception: Machine members or structural parts of the electrical equipment shallbe permitted to be used in the equipment grounding circuit provided that the cross-sectional area of these parts provide the same or better conductivity as theminimum cross-sectional area of the copper conductor required. The crosssectional area shall be in accordance with one or more of the following:

1) Steel –10 times that of copper

2) Iron – 6 times that of copper

3) Aluminum – 2 times that of copper

8.2.2.2

Equipment grounding conductors and bonding jumpers shall be insulated, covered,or bare and shall be protected against physical damage.

of 473



8.2.2.3

Equipment grounding conductors and bonding jumpers of the wire type shall not besmaller than shown in Table 8.2.2.3, but shall not be required to be larger than thecircuit conductors supplying the equipment.

Table 8.2.2.3 Minimum Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors andBonding Jumpers

Rating or Setting of Automatic Overcurrent Device inCircuit Ahead of the Equipment

(Not Exceeding Amperes)

CopperConductor Size

(AWG or kcmil)

10 16

15 14

20 12

30 10

40 10

60 10

100 8

200 6

300 4

400 3

500 2

600 1

800 1/0

1000 2/0

1200 3/0

1600 4/0

2000 250

2500 350

3000 400

4000 500

5000 700

6000 800

8.2.3 Continuity of the Equipment Grounding (Protective Bonding) Circuit.

of 473



8.2.3.1

The continuity of the equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit shall beensured by effective connections through conductors.

8.2.3.2

Removing a device shall not interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding(protective) circuit.

8.2.3.3

Bonding of equipment with bolts or other identified means shall be permitted ifpaint and dirt are removed from the joint surfaces or the bonded members areeffectively penetrated.

8.2.3.4

Raceways, wireways, and cable trays shall not be used as equipment grounding orbonding conductors.

8.2.3.5 Doors or Covers.

8.2.3.5.1

Where electrical devices are mounted on conductive doors or covers, an equipment(protective) bonding jumper shall be installed.

8.2.3.5.2

Where required, an equipment (protective) bonding jumper shall connect theconductive door or cover to the equipment enclosure or to an equipment grounding(protective bonding) terminal within the enclosure.

8.2.3.6

Portable, pendant, and resilient-mounted equipment shall be bonded by separateconductors. Where multiconductor cable is used, the bonding conductor shall beincluded as one conductor of the cable.

8.2.4* Exclusion of Switching Devices.

The equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit shall not contain anyswitches or overcurrent protective devices. Separable connections such as thoseprovided in drawout equipment or attachment plugs and mating connectors andreceptacles shall provide for first-make, last-break of the equipment groundingconductor. First-make, last-break shall not be required where interlockedequipment, plugs, receptacles, and connectors preclude energization withoutgrounding continuity.

8.2.5 Equipment Grounding (Protective) Conductor Connecting Points.

8.2.5.1

All equipment grounding (protective) conductors shall be terminated in accordancewith 13.1.1. The equipment grounding (protective) conductor connecting pointsshall have no other function.

8.2.5.2*

The equipment grounding conductor connecting points, other than the equipmentgrounding terminal, shall be identified by the color GREEN, by the bicolorcombination of GREEN-AND-YELLOW, or by use of the symbol shown in Figure8.2.1.3.4.





of 473




CommitteeStatement:

The committee agreed to remove all parenthetical terms to avoid confusion for theuser. The use of the machine members as part of the equipment grounding circuitwas removed from the 2007 and 2012 edition of NFPA 79 and has been re-instatedto be permitted under the prescribed conditions in the new exception to 8.2.2.1.This action was in response to PI-86, Log # 111 FR-75. Factors were added formaterials other than copper to provide methods for determining electricalequivalency. Additionally, the term grounding conductor was deleted on Log #109,(PI 84) because it was deleted in the NEC. Adding the word electrode makes this acorrect term for this conductor.

ResponseMessage:

FR-75-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




8.3 Control Circuits.

Control circuits shall be permitted to be grounded or ungrounded.

8.3.1

Where grounding is provided, that side of the circuit common to the coils shall begrounded at the secondary winding of the control transformer if alternating current orat the power supply terminal if direct current.

Exception No. 1: Exposed control circuits as permitted by Section 6.4 shall begrounded.

Exception No. 2: Overload relay contacts shall be permitted to be connectedbetween the coil and the grounded conductor where the conductors between suchcontacts and coils of magnetic devices do not extend beyond the controlenclosure.

8.3.1 2

Ungrounded control circuits shall be provided with an insulation-monitoring devicethat either indicates a ground (earth) fault or interrupts the circuit automatically aftera ground (earth) fault.

Exception Exception : Class 2 low-voltage circuits in Article 725 of NFPA 70,shall not require insulation monitoring.






Committee Statement: The change was made to comply with the MOS.


of 473




8.4.2

Where the lighting circuit is supplied by a separate isolation transformer, oneterminal of the secondary of the transformer shall be directly connected to theequipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit.


Submitter Full Name:Mark Cloutier




CommitteeStatement:

This FR is a companion FR to the global PI 80 to remove all parentheticalterms using the term protective bonding

ResponseMessage:

FR-107-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




9.1.1.2

Where dc control circuits are connected to the equipment grounding (protectivebonding) circuit, they shall be supplied from a separate winding of the ac controlcircuit transformer or by another control circuit transformer or a listed dc powersupply.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee agreed to remove all parenthetical terms to avoid confusionfor the user

ResponseMessage:

FR-76-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




9.1.4.2

Contacts shall not be connected in parallel where the purpose is to increaseampacity.

9.2* Control Functions. Where control circuits perform safety-related functions,they shall meet the safety performance requirements determined by the riskassessment of the machine and the applicable functional safety standards.






CommitteeStatement:

The submitted text from PI 58 Log 98 was revised and relocated to 9.2 which isfocused on control functions. The annex note was updated to include examples ofsafety related functions and content incorporated from A9.4.1 to provide guidanceon pertinent standards. The suggested text on stop functions and reset was notincluded as it already is covered in other sections. The reference to ANSI B11.TR3was changed to ANSI B11.0 to reflect changes in latest standards.

ResponseMessage:

FR-63-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff must locate text as part of 9.2. Terra would not allow addition of text to 9.2 without affecting all FR's and PI's under 9.2

of 473

11/9/12



9.2.2 Stop 2* Stop Functions.

Stop functions shall operate by de-energizing that relevant circuit and shall overriderelated start functions. The reset of the stop functions shall not initiate anyhazardous conditions. The three categories of stop functions shall be as follows:

(1) Category 0 is an uncontrolled stop by immediately removing power to themachine actuators.

(2) Category 1 is a controlled stop with power to the machine actuators availableto achieve the stop then remove power is removed when the stop is achieved.

(3) Category 2 is a controlled stop with power left available to the machineactuators.






CommitteeStatement:

The current text requires that stop functions operate by de-energization. This islikely possible in stop categories 0 and 1 but not necessarily in stop function 2. Therevised text provided would permit the required functionality. An asterisk was addedand a annex note will be included for information.

ResponseMessage:

FR-24-NFPA 79-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 59-NFPA 79-2012 [ Sections 9.2.5.3.1, 9.2.5.3.2 ]

Sections 9.2.5.3.1, 9.2.5.3.2

9.2.5.3.

1

Each machine shall be equipped with a Category 0 stop.

9.2.5.3.2

Category 0

1* Category 0 , Category 1, and/or Category 2 stops shall be provided

where indicated by an analysis of

as determined by the risk assessment and the functional requirements of themachine. Category 0 and Category 1 stops shall be operational regardless ofoperating modes, and Category 0 shall take priority.






CommitteeStatement:

9.2.5.3.1 was deleted as the requirement for a Category 0 stop is redundant withthe requirements of 9.5.3.2 and aligns with similar requirements in IEC 60204-1. Theannex note was added to clarify this and is consistent with similar language in IEC60204-1. The change from “where” to “as” clarifies that stop(s) be provided andaligns with similar language in IEC 60204-1.

ResponseMessage:

FR-59-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Wordsmith the edited text to appear correctly

Public Input No. 52-NFPA 79-2012 [Sections 9.2.5.3.1, 9.2.5.3.2]

of 473



First Revision No. 25-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 9.2.5.4.2.1 ]

9.2.5.4.2.1

Emergency switching off shall be permitted as follows under any of the followingconditions :

(1) Where protection against direct contact (e.g., with collector wires, collectorbars, slip-ring assemblies, control gear in electrical operating areas) isachieved only by placing out of reach or by obstacles

(2) Where other hazards or damage caused by electricity are possible






CommitteeStatement:

The revised text clarifies that any or all of the conditions listed are acceptablefor use of emergency switching off.

ResponseMessage:

FR-25-NFPA 79-2012, PI 9

Public Input No. 9-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 9.2.5.4.2.1]

of 473




9.3.6 Protective Interlock.

Where doors or guards have interlocked switches used in circuits with safety-related functions, the interlocking devices shall be listed, have either positive (direct ) opening operation , or provide similar reliability, and prevent the operationof the equipment when the doors or guards are open (difficult to defeat or bypass).






CommitteeStatement:

The committee deleted the definition of "positive opening operation", therefore theuse of the term was deleted to be consistent with the existing defined term "directopening operation".

ResponseMessage:

FR-42-NFPA 79-2012


9.4.1 * General Requirements.

Where failures or disturbances in the electrical equipment cause ahazardous condition or damage to the machine or the work in progress,measures shall be taken to minimize the probability of the occurrence ofsuch failures or disturbances. The electrical control circuits shall have anappropriate level of performance that has been determined from the riskassessment of the machine.

9.4.1 Risk Reduction Measures .

1 *

of 473



Measures to reduce these risks shall include, but are not limited to, one ormore of the following:

(1) Protective devices on the machine (e.g., interlock guards, tripdevices)

(2) Protective interlocking of the electrical circuit

(3) Use of proven circuit techniques and components

(4) Provisions of partial or complete redundancy or diversity

(5) Provision for functional tests






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. A title was added to identifythe contents of the subsection and to be consistent with other 1st and 2nd levelsubdivisions in 9.4.

ResponseMessage:

FR-67-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Oct 24,2012

Mark Cloutier The editor did not unbold the text and it still looked as bold in the hide markup mode. selecting bold just made the text more bold


of 473




9.4.3.2 * Memory 2 Memory Retention and Protection.

9.4.3.2.1

Means shall be provided to prevent memory alteration by unauthorized persons.

9.4.3.2.2

Loss of memory shall not result in a hazardous condition.

9.4.3.2.3

Power supplies for electronic equipment requiring memory retention shall havebattery backup of sufficient capacity to prevent memory loss for a period of at least72 hours.






CommitteeStatement:

Delete reference to improper annex note. The note pertains to design of controlsystem using software and firmware based controllers (9.4.3.4.2). This proposalwas developed as part of the NFPA 79 Chapter 9 Control and Technology taskgroup.

ResponseMessage:

FR-26-NFPA 79-2012


of 473


9.4.3.4 Use 4* Use in Safety-Related Functions.

9.4.3.4.1

Software- and firmware-based controllers to be used in safety-related functions shallbe listed for such use.

9.4.3.4.2

Control systems incorporating software- and firmware-based controllers performingsafety-related functions shall be self-monitoring and conform to all of the following:

(1) In the event of any single failure, the failure shall:

(a) Not lead to the loss of the safety-related function(s)

(b) Lead to the shutdown of the system in a safe state

(c) Prevent subsequent operation until the component failure has beencorrected

(d) Prevent unintended startup of equipment upon correction of the failure

(2) Provide protection equivalent to that of control systems incorporatinghardwired/hardware components

(3) Be designed in conformance with an approved standard that providesrequirements for such systems






CommitteeStatement:

The annex note is incorrectly referenced to 9.4.3.2. Section 9.4.3.4 which dealswith software and firmware based controllers is the correct location for the annexnote.

ResponseMessage:

FR-66-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




10.3.1.1 2 Indicator Light Circuits for Warning or Danger.

Indicator light circuits used for warning or danger lights shall be fitted with facilitiesto check the operability of these lights.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. In addition, a title has beenadded to be consistent with the other subdivisions under 10.3.

ResponseMessage:

FR-1-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




10.7.4.1

The supply disconnecting means shall be permitted to be locally operated to servethe function of emergency stop as follows:

(1) Where it is readily accessible to the operator

(2) Where it is of the type described in 5.3.2 (1) , through 5.3.2 (2), or 5 .3.2(3 )






CommitteeStatement:

All of the supply disconnecting means identified in 5.3.2(1) - 5.3.2 (5) can beequipped with suitable external operatings means to serve as an emergency stop.Only where it is a plug and cord should it not be permitted. This proposal wasdeveloped as part of the NFPA 79 Chapter 9 Control and Technology task group.

ResponseMessage:

FR-62-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




11.2.1.5.1

Steel subplate thickness shall provide engagement of at least 2 full threads.

Exception: A screw with 32 threads per 25.4 mm ( 32 threads per in.) shall bepermitted into a 1.35 mm (0.053 in.) thick steel subplate.






CommitteeStatement:

UL 50 defines these thread engagements as suitable to attach covers. UL 508A66.1.9 defines this thread engagement as suitable for mounting equipment to subpanels.

ResponseMessage:

FR-34-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 15,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The specified dimensions need to be retained.


of 473

11/9/12



11.3.2

Enclosures of control equipment shall provide a the degree of protection requiredfor the environment. A minimum degree of protection of at least NEMA Type 1 isrequired .

Exception Exception : Where removable collectors on collector wire or collectorbar systems are used and NEMA Type 1 enclosures are not practicable, suitableprotection shall be provided (e.g., elevation, guarding).






CommitteeStatement:

The addition of "required for the environment" adds clarity. The committee did notaccept the other proposed language as it is already covered in 11.3.1.

ResponseMessage:

FR-32-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




11.4.2

Where corrosion protection beyond normal requirements is needed, nonmetallicenclosures identified for the purposes shall be permitted if they meet therequirements of ANSI/UL 508 50 and UL50E .






CommitteeStatement:

ANSI UL 50 and UL50E Enclosures for Electrical Equipment provide the basestandard guidance for evaluating the structural considerations and environmentintegrity for long term exposures of nonmetallic enclosures, specifically polymericenclosures located in UL50 6.6 and UL50E 7.1.

ResponseMessage:

FR-33-NFPA 79-2012



11.5 Spaces Around Control Cabinets and Compartments.

Access and working space for control cabinets and compartments operating at 600volts, nominal, or less to ground and likely to require examination, adjustment,servicing, or maintenance while energized shall comply with the provisions ofChapter 11. Sufficient access and working space shall be provided and maintainedaround all control cabinets and compartments to permit ready and safe operationand maintenance of such control cabinets and compartments.

11.5.1 Working Space.

The working space shall permit at least 90-degree opening of control cabinet andcompartment doors or hinged panels.

of 473



11.5.1.1

The depth of the working space in the direction of access to live parts shallnot be less than indicated in Table 11.5.1.1 . Distances shall be measuredfrom the control cabinet or compartment front or opening.

Table 11.5.1.1 Working Space Depth

Nominal Voltage to GroundMinimum Clear Distance

Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3

0–150 914 mm (3 ft) 914 mm (3 ft) 914 mm (3 ft)

151–600 914 mm (3 ft) 1.07 m (3 1

?

2 ft) 1.22 m (4 ft)

Note: Where the conditions are as follows:

Condition 1 — Exposed live parts on one side and no live or groundedparts on the other side of the working space, or exposed live parts on bothsides effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or insulatedbusbars operating at not over 300 volts to ground shall not be considered liveparts.

Condition 2 — Exposed live parts on one side and a grounded surface onthe other side. Concrete, brick, or tile walls shall be considered asgrounded.

Condition 3 — Exposed live parts on both sides of the working space (notguarded as provided in Condition 1) with the operator between.

Exception No. 1: Work ing space shall not be required in back or sides ofcontrol cabinets or compartments, where there are no renewable oradjustable parts on the back or sides and where all connections areaccessible from locations other than the back or sides. Where rearaccess is required to work on de-energized parts on the back of enclosedcontrol cabinet and compartment, a minimum work ing space of 762 mm

(2 1

?

2 ft) horizontally shall be provided.

Exception No. 2: By special permission, work ing space clearance depth of

762 mm (2 1

?

/ 2 ft) or less shall be permitted where all uninsulated parts are at avoltage no greater than 50 volts rms ac or 60 volts dc.

Exception No. 3: Condition 2 work ing clearance depth shall be permittedbetween control cabinets or compartments located across the aisle fromeach other or across from

nonmachinery

of 473



non machinery -associated switchgear, panelboards, or motor controlcenters where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure thatwritten procedures have been adopted to prohibit the affected equipmentdoors on both sides of the aisle from being open at the same time andqualified persons who are authorized will service the installation.

Exception No. 4: Condition 1 work ing clearance depth shall be permittedbetween control cabinets or compartments located across the aisle fromeach other, or across from a grounded surface,

and

where all associated control cabinet or compartment devices andequipment operating at greater than 50 volts rms ac or 60 volts dc areseparately enclosed, guarded, or constructed so that openings to liveparts of the devices and equipment will not permit the entry of a 12.5 mm(0.5 in.) diameter rod.

Exception No. 5: By special permission, the minimum work ing space

clearance depth of 762 mm (2 1

?

2 ft) shall be permitted where all of the following conditions are met:

(1) The control cabinet or compartment is operating at not over 150 voltsline-to-line or line-to-ground.

(2) The conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that onlyqualified persons will service the installation.

(3) The control cabinet and compartment require a tool to open.

(4) Where only diagnostic troubleshooting and testing on live parts areinvolved.

(5) The door(s) of the control cabinet and compartment open at least 90degrees or are removable.

11.5.1.2

The width of the working space in front of control cabinets andcompartments shall be the width of the opening into the control cabinet orcompartment, or

750

762 mm (

2 1 ? 2 ft

30 in. ), whichever is greater.

11.5.1.3

The working space height shall be clear and extend from the grade, floor, or

platform to a height of 2.0 m (6 1

?

ft). Within the height requirements of Section 11.5 , other equipment of 473



2 ft). Within the height requirements of Section 11.5 , other equipmentassociated with the machine located above or below the control cabinet orcompartment shall be permitted to extend not more than 150 mm (6 in.)beyond the front of the electrical control cabinet or compartment.

11.5. 1.4 The working space shall permit at least 90-degree opening ofcontrol cabinet and compartment doors or hinged panels.

11.5. 2 Access.

At least one entrance of sufficient area shall be provided to give access tothe working space around control cabinets or compartments.

11.5.2.1

Working space required by Section 11.5 shall not be used for storage.

11.5.2.2

When enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or servicing, theworking space, if in a passageway or general open space, shall be suitablyguarded.

11.5.3

Doors in gangways and for access to electrical operating areas shall be at

least 0.7 m (2 ft 4 in.) wide and 2.0 m (6 1

?

2 ft) high, open

outwards

outward , and have a means (e.g., panic bolts or panic bars) to allowopening from the inside without the use of a key or tool.






CommitteeStatement:

Section 11.5 requires “sufficient access and working space” be provided around allcontrol cabinets and compartments, and subsection 11.5.1 defines the sufficientworking space. However, the sentence immediately following the heading ofsubsection 11.5.1 implies (1) the entire subsection applies only to working spacesin front of doors and hinged panels, and (2) compartments with bolted or screwed-oncovers are not subject to the minimum working space requirements stated inSubsection 11.5.1 even if they are “likely to require examination, adjustment,servicing or maintenance while energized”. Moving the sentence immediatelyfollowing the subsection 11.5.1 heading into its own paragraph would clarify thescope and intent of the subsection. The change to 11.5.1.2 was made because theaccessible opening into control cabinets or compartments is typically less than theoverall width of the control cabinet or compartment because of flanges and non-removable portions of the cabinets and compartments. The existing requirement isover restrictive as it implies the working space width shall is based upon the overallwidth of the control cabinet or compartments and not the actual accessible opening.Additionally the minimum width requirements of 750 mm (2-1/2 ft.) is not inalignment with the more precise SI value of 762 mm (30 in.) as stated in the

requirements of the NEC Article 110.26(A)(2). In Exception No. 4 the word "and" of 473



requirements of the NEC Article 110.26(A)(2). In Exception No. 4 the word "and"was replaced by the word "where" for clarity. By making this editorial change it willclarify the parameters of the specific conditions that exception #4 applies to. Thechange makes the terminology consistent with the other exceptions.

ResponseMessage:

FR-35-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 17,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The changes that PI-55 required which the TC accepted were incorporated into FR-35 so that two FR's on the same section would be avoided.



12.5.5

of 473



Where ampacity derating is required for ambient temperature correction for otherthan 30°C (86°F) or adjusted for more than three current-carrying conductors in araceway or cable, the factor(s) shall be taken from Table 12.5.5(a) and Table12.5.5(b). Sizing of conductors within control enclosures in wiring harnesses orwiring channels shall be based on the ampacity in cable or raceway. These factorsshall apply to NFPA 70, Article 725, Class 1, control conductors, only if theircontinuous load exceeds 10 percent of the conductor ampacity.

Table 12.5.5(a) Ambient Temperature Correction Factors

Ambient Temperature

(°C)

Correction Factor

75°C

Ambient Temperature

(°F)

21–25 1.05 70–77

26–30 1.00 78–86

31–35 0.94 87–95

36–40 0.88 96–104

41–45 0.82 105–113

46–50 0.75 114–122

51–55 0.67 123–131

56–60 0.58 132–140

61–70 0.33 141–158

Table 12.5.5(b) Adjustment Factors for More Than Three Current-CarryingConductors in a Raceway or Cable

Number of Current-Carrying Conductors

Percent of Values in Table 12.5.5(a) as Adjusted forAmbient Temperature If Necessary

4–6 80

7–9 70

10–20 50

21–30 45

31–40 40

41 and above 35


FileName

Description

79FR11Table1255a.docxTable 12.5.5(a) the TC accepted to resolve PI 3 and PI 41 which will add a 60 and 90 degree C columns.






of 473



CommitteeStatement:

With the addition of 90 degree C conductor ampacities, the lack of correspondingcorrection factors is an apparent oversight. Termination temperatures will continueto be limited by the general reference to the NEC in Section 1.4. There is notechnical reason why the correction factors for 75 degree conductors should beapplied to 90 degree conductors. There are many high temperature applications forconductors in industrial machines and the correct provisions should be available forwiring on the machines just as it is for premises wiring. The committee added the60 degree correction factors to 12.5.5(a). See the committee statement andresolution from PI 41 and FR 12 for addition of the correction factors for the 90degree column. The Tc added the 60 degree correction factors from NEC 2011Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) and added a 60 degree column to original Table 12.5.5(a).Terra did not have the correct table the submitter proposed although the PI packagehad the correct table in PI 3. The correct table is attached. FR-12-NFPA 79-2012the correct table is attached.

ResponseMessage:

FR-11-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 14,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The incorrect Table was copied from the NEC into Terra on this PI. Bring over the correction factors from the 90 degree C column in Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) in the 2011 NEC and create a new column in Table 12.5.5(a).

Aug 22,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Add the 60 degree correction factors from NEC 2011 Table 310.15(B)(2)(a) and add a 60 degree column to original Table 12.5.5(a). Terra did not have the correct table the submitter proposed although the PI package had the correct table in PI 3.



of 473

65/133

12.6.1.1

16 AWG shall be permitted if part of a jacketed multiconductor cable assembly orflexible cord, or individual conductors used in a cabinet or enclosure, under thefollowing conditions:

(1) Non-motor power circuits of 8 amperes or less, provided all the followingconditions are met:

(a) Circuit is protected in accordance with Chapter 7.

(b) Overcurrent protection does not exceed 10 amperes.

(c) Overcurrent protection is provided by one of the following:

i. A branch circuit–rated listed molded-case circuit breaker listedand marked for use with 16 AWG wire

ii. Branch circuit–rated Listed fuses listed and marked for use with16 AWG wire

iii. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses

(2) Motor power circuits with supplying a motor having a full-load ampacitycurrent rating of 8 amperes or less, provided all the following conditions aremet:


(b) Circuit is provided with Class 10 overload protection.





(3) Motor power circuits with supplying a motor having a full-load ampacitycurrent rating of 5.5 amperes or less, provided all the following are met:










Submittal Date: Tue Aug 14 17:57:52 EDT 2012 of 473





CommitteeStatement:

This change clarifies the meaning of “full-load ampacity” in 12.6.1.1 (2), 12.6.1.1(3),12.6.1.2(2) and 12.6.1.2(3). The use of “full-load” with “ampacity” is unclear becausefull-load refers to motor ratings, while ampacity refers to the current-carryingcapacity of conductors (see 3.2.5.1 of 2011 NEC Style Manual). The proposed textuses the full-load current rating of the motor load because the Substantiation for13.6.1 in the 2002 ROP states “Guidelines were selected for…maximum full loadcurrent rating of motors …The criteria for determining the maximum full load currentrating was …(10 sec for class 10, etc.)…This then derived the FLC ...” Additionally,accept proposal except delete the word “load” after "motor" in both 12.6.1.1 (2) and12.6.1.1(3) The changes to remove the term "rated" were to align with the changesin PI 122 Log 54. Changes were also made to delete the term "branch circuit" whichcorrelates with FR-23.

ResponseMessage:

FR-10-NFPA 79-2012 companion PI and FR to PI 54



12.6.1.2

18 AWG shall be permitted if part of a jacketed multiconductor cable assembly orflexible cord, or individual conductors used in a cabinet or enclosure, under thefollowing conditions:

(1) Non-motor power circuits of 5.6 amperes or less, provided all the followingconditions are met:


(b) Overcurrent protection does not exceed 7 amperes.





(2) Motor power circuits with circuits supplying a motor having a full-loadampacity current rating of 5 amperes or less, provided all the followingconditions are met:



of 473




i. A

branch circuit–rated

ii. listed molded-case circuit breaker

listed and

iii. marked for use with 18 AWG wire

Branch circuit–rated

iv. Listed fuses

listed and

v. marked for use with 18 AWG wire

vi. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses

(3) Motor power circuits with supplying a motor having a full-load ampacitycurrent rating of 3.5 amperes or less, provided all the following are met:




i. A

branch circuit–rated

ii. listed molded-case circuit breaker

listed and

iii. marked for use with 18 AWG wire

Branch circuit–rated

iv. Listed fuses

listed and

v. marked for use with 18 AWG wire

vi. Class CC, Class J, or Class T fuses






CommitteeStatement:

Substantiation: This change clarifies the meaning of “full-load ampacity” in 12.6.1.1(2), 12.6.1.1(3), 12.6.1.2(2) and 12.6.1.2(3). The use of “full-load” with “ampacity” isunclear because full-load refers to motor ratings, while ampacity refers to thecurrent-carrying capacity of conductors (see 3.2.5.1 of 2011 NEC Style Manual).The proposed text uses the full-load current rating of the motor load because theSubstantiation for 13.6.1 in the 2002 ROP states “Guidelines were selected for…maximum full load current rating of motors …The criteria for determining the

of 473

maximum full load current rating was …(10 sec for class 10, etc.)…This thenderived the FLC ...” Additionally, Accept proposal except delete the word “load” afterthe word "motor" in both 12.6.1.2 (2) and 12.6.1.2(3) The changes to remove theterm "rated" were to align with the changes in PI 122 Log 54. Changes were alsomade to delete the term "branch circuit" which correlates with FR-23.

ResponseMessage:

FR-9-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 15,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff needs to correct the additional iii,iv, v that were created the FR text shown does not match the edited version. Refer to changes to 12.6.1.1 for correct subsection identification



of 473



12.9.2

Appliance wiring material (AWM) shall be permitted as follows under any of thefollowing conditions :

(1) Where part of an assembly that has been identified for the intended use

(2) Where the AWM has been identified for use with approved equipment and isused in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s instructions

(3) Where its construction meets all applicable requirements of Section 12.2through Section 12.6 with modifications as follows:

(a) Stranded conductors with wire sizes smaller than those listed in 12.2.2shall have a minimum of seven strands.

(b) Conductor insulation and cable jacket materials not specified in 12.3.1shall have flame-resistant properties in compliance with applicablestandards for intended use such as FT2 (horizontal wire) flame test orVW-1 (vertical wire) flame test in accordance with ANSI/UL 1581.

(c) Minimum insulation thicknesses for single- conductor AWM shall be asspecified in 12.3.2. Minimum insulation thickness for conductors that arepart of a multiconductor jacketed AWM cable shall be as specified bythe AWM style number and by the marked voltage rating of the cable.

(d) AWM shall be marked in accordance with 12.4.1, 12.4.3, and 12.4.4.The legend shall include manufacturer’s name or trademark, AWM stylenumber, voltage rating (unless marking is prohibited by 12.4.2), wiregauge(s), temperature rating, and flame resistance. Additional markingsfor properties such as oil, water, UV, and chemical resistance identifiersshall be permitted where in compliance with applicable standards forintended use. Where markings alone are insufficient to identify for theintended application, suitable information shall be included with themachine technical documentation.






CommitteeStatement:

The revised language clarifies the intent of the 2012 change that any of theconditions of 1,2, or 3 can be applied to demonstrate acceptable use of AWM.

ResponseMessage:

FR-73-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




13.1.4 Conductors Supplied from Separate Disconnects.

Where the equipment is supplied from has two or more sources of power orfrom two or more independent disconnecting means, the power wiring from eachsupply source or from each disconnecting means shall be run in

separate racewayraceways and shall not terminate in or pass through common junction boxes.






CommitteeStatement:

The proposed changes will clarify the separation requirements of this section applyto the supply circuits to the machine. This section has been mistakenly applied tocircuits the originated on the load side of machine supply disconnecting meanswhich can occupy the raceway unless prohibited elsewhere in the Standard. Similarrequirements for motors exist in 14.1.1. This language originated in the JICStandards and was related to applications where there were multiple supplies ormultiple supply disconnecting means that were not interlocked with each other. Therequirements were clearly related to the supply circuits. In the current edition ofNFPA 79, the interlocking requirements are covered in Chapter 6 and the supplydisconnecting means requirements are located in Chapter 5.

ResponseMessage:

FR-90-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




13.2.2.1*

The color GREEN with or without one or more YELLOW stripes shall be used toidentify the equipment grounding conductor where insulated or covered. This coloridentification shall be strictly reserved for the equipment grounding (protectivebonding) conductor.

Exception No. 1: In multiconductor cable-connected assemblies where equipmentgrounding is not required, the solid color GREEN shall be permitted for other thanequipment grounding.

Exception No. 2: It shall be permitted to use conductors of other colors, providedthe insulation or cover is appropriately identified at all points of access.

Exception No. 3: For grounded control circuits, use of a GREEN insulatedconductor with or without one or more YELLOW stripes or a bare conductor fromthe transformer terminal to a grounding terminal on the control panel shall bepermitted.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-77-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




13.4.5.3

Attachment plug and receptacle (plug/socket) combinations shall be designed sothat both of the following occur:

(1) The equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit connection is madebefore any current-carrying connections are made.

(2) The equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit connection is notdisconnected until all current-carrying connections in the plug aredisconnected.

Exception Exception : Connections used in PELV circuits or the connectors usedonly to facilitate assembling and disassembling (multipole connectors) shall notbe required to meet these requirements.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-78-NFPA 79-2012

of 473


13.5.10.1 11 Cords in Cable Trays.

Cords shall not be installed in cable trays.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. In addition, a title has beenadded to be consistent with the other 1st level subdivisions in 13.5.

ResponseMessage:

FR-105-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




14.1.1 Conductors 2 Conductors Supplied from Separate Disconnects.

Where the equipment has two or more sources of power or two or moreindependent disconnecting means, power wiring from each disconnecting meansshall be run in separate raceway raceways and shall not terminate in or passthrough common junction boxes.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-106-NFPA 79-2012


of 473




15.1.1 Receptacles for Accessory Equipment.

Where the machine or its associated equipment is provided with receptacle outletsto be used for accessory equipment (e.g., handheld power tools, test equipment),the following conditions shall apply:

(1) Receptacles mounted external to the enclosure shall be ground-fault circuit-interrupter (GFCI) - protected.

(2) Receptacles shall be supplied from a grounded 120 volt ac source.

(3) Receptacles shall be of the parallel blade grounding type, 125-volt, single-phase, 15- or 20-ampere configuration and listed for the applied voltage.

(4) Receptacles with their associated attachment plugs (plug/sockets) shall be inaccordance with 13.4.5.3.

(5) The continuity of the equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit to thereceptacle outlet shall be verified by Section 18.2.

Exception Exception : Verification is not required for PELV circuits inaccordance with Section 18.2.

(6) All ungrounded (unearthed) conductors connected to the receptacle outletshall be protected against overcurrent in accordance with the provisions of7.2.5, and these circuits shall not be connected to other machine circuits.

(7) Where the power supply to the receptacle outlet is not disconnected by thesupply disconnecting device for the machine or section of the machine, thesafety sign requirements of 5.3.5.4 shall apply.

(8) Receptacles shall be suitable for the environment. Receptacles mountedexternal to the enclosure and subject to dirt, dust, oil, or other contaminantsshall be provided with a means to cover the receptacle when the plug isremoved.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-79-NFPA 79-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 88-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. 16.2.3 [Excluding any

Sub-Sections] ]

Electrical equipment for industrial machines, such as industrial control panels andthe enclosures of disconnecting devices, shall be marked with a safety sign inaccordance with ANSI Z535.4 to warn qualified persons of potential electric shockand arc flash hazards.






CommitteeStatement:

To assure that any warning sign for shock and arc flash hazards comply with theguidance for such signs as provided by ANSI Z535.4.

ResponseMessage:

FR-88-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 57-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. 16.2.3 [Excluding any Sub-Sections]]

of 473




16.4.1

Control equipment shall be legibly and durably marked in a way that is plainlyvisible after the equipment is installed. A nameplate giving the following informationshall be attached to the outside of the enclosure, or on the machine immediatelyadjacent to the enclosure:

(1) Name or trademark of supplier

(2) Serial number, where applicable

(3)

(4) Ampere rating of the largest motor or load

(5) Maximum ampere rating of the short-circuit and ground-fault protective device,where provided

(6) Short-circuit current rating of the industrial control panel

(7) Electrical diagram number(s) or the number of the index to the electricaldrawings






CommitteeStatement:

The revisions to this section correlate with 4.8. The asterisk was removed becausethe resolution on Log # 50, PI 119 was to reject which if accepted would have addedan annex note.

ResponseMessage:

FR-89-NFPA 79-2012


* Rated voltage, number of phases and frequency (if ac), and full-load currentfor each supply

of 473




18.1* General.

The verification of the continuity of the equipment grounding (protective bonding)circuit shall be conducted and documented. When the electrical equipment ismodified, the requirements in Section 18.7 shall apply. Applicable tests shall beperformed where deemed necessary in accordance with the references in thefollowing list:

(1) Verification that the electrical equipment is in compliance with the technicaldocumentation (see Chapter 17)

(2) Insulation resistance test (see Section 18.3)

(3) Voltage test (see Section 18.4)

(4) Protection against residual voltages test (see Section 18.5)

(5) Functional test (see Section 18.6)






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-80-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




18.2* Continuity of the Equipment Grounding (Protective Bonding) Circuit.

One of the following methods shall be used to verify the continuity of the equipmentgrounding circuit:

(1) Use an impedance measuring device, take into account any impedance in themeasuring circuit. The measured impedance shall be 0.1 ohm or less.

(2) Apply a current of at least 10 amperes, 50 Hz or 60 Hz, derived from a SELVsource. The tests are to be made between the equipment grounding (PE)terminal and relevant points that are part of the equipment grounding(protective bonding) circuit; the measured voltage between the equipmentgrounding (PE) terminal and the points of test is not to exceed the valuesgiven in Table 18.2.

Table 18.2 Verification of Continuity of the Equipment Grounding(Protective Bonding) Circuit

Minimum Equipment Grounding (Protective Bonding)Conductor Cross-Sectional Area of the Branch Under Test

(AWG)

MaximumMeasured

VoltageDrop*

(V)

18 3.3

16 2.6

14 1.9

12 1.7

10 1.4

>8 1.0

*Values are given for a test current of 10 amperes.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-81-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




18.3 Insulation Resistance Tests.

The insulation resistance measured at 500 volts dc between the power circuitconductors and the equipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit shall not beless than 1 megohm. The test shall be permitted to be made on individual sectionsof the machine.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-82-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




18.4* Voltage Tests.

The machine shall withstand without breakdown a test voltage gradually appliedfrom 0 to 1500 volts ac or 2121 volts dc and held at the maximum value for a periodof at least 1 second between the conductors of all primary circuits and theequipment grounding (protective bonding) circuit. The test voltage shall be suppliedfrom an isolated power supply with a minimum rating of 500 volt amperes.Components that are not rated to withstand the test voltage shall be disconnectedduring testing.






CommitteeStatement:


ResponseMessage:

FR-83-NFPA 79-2012

of 473




19.1 Overload 1 Overcurrent Protection for Servo Drives and Motors.

19.1.1 Branch-Circuit Overcurrent Protection.

Branch-circuit overcurrent protection shall be provided for servo drives and motors inaccordance with manufacturer’s markings and instructions.

19.1.2 Overload Protection .

Overload protection shall be provided for each motor.

19.1.1 Motor 3 Motor Amplifier/Drive.

Where the amplifier/drive is marked to indicate that motor overload protection isincluded, additional overload protection shall not be required.

19.1.2 Multiple 4 Multiple Motor Applications.

For multiple motor applications, individual motor overload protection shall beprovided.






CommitteeStatement:

The revised text indicates that branch-circuit overcurrent protection, not justoverload protection is required for servo drives and motors. The manufacturer’sinstructions for servo drives and motors indicate the type and size of branch-circuitovercurrent protection that is required in accordance with UL 508C. In addition, UL508A already considers servo drives SCCR in the determination of the industrialcontrol panel SCCR.

ResponseMessage:

FR-87-NFPA 79-2012


of 473

First Revision No. 55-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. A.3.3.9 ]

A.3.3.9 Bonding (Bonded).

See 3.3.77 , Protective Bonding Circuit.






CommitteeStatement:

The asterisk was deleted from Chapter 3 definition therefore the associatedannex information was removed.

ResponseMessage:

FR-55-NFPA 79-2012


A.3.3.32 Duct.

Conduits, cable trunking systems (see 3.3.14 15 ), and underfloor channels aretypes of duct. ( See also 3.3.80 , Raceway .)






CommitteeStatement:

Section 3.3.14 refers to Cable Tray Systems. The reference should be section3.3.15 as it references Cable Trunking Systems. This editorial change will clarify thedocuments reference

ResponseMessage:

FR-95-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 28-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. A.3.3.32]

of 473




A.3.3.77 Protective Bonding Circuit.

See 3.3.9 , Bonding.






CommitteeStatement:

The definition of the term "Protective Bonding Circuit" was deleted from Chapter 3therefore the associated annex information is no longer necessary.

ResponseMessage:

FR-52-NFPA 79-2012


A.3.3.85 Risk.

One reference Examples of references to risk assessment is include ANSIB11.TR3 0 and ISO 12100 .






CommitteeStatement:

The text was revised to reflect latest changes to reference documents and addedthe additional reference to the ISO standard for risk assessment. See the resolutionand committee statement on PI#60 and PI#66.

ResponseMessage:

FR-69-NFPA 79-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 8-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. A.4.1 ]

A.4.1

A sample inquiry form is provided in Annex B for use in facilitating an agreementbetween the supplier and the user.

Hazardous situations can result from, but are not limited to, the following causes:

(1) Failures or faults in the electrical equipment resulting in the possibility ofelectrical shock, flash hazard, or electrical fire

(2) Failures or faults in control circuits (or components and devices associatedwith these circuits) resulting in malfunctioning of the machine

(3) Disturbances or disruptions in power sources as well as failures or faults inthe power circuits, resulting in the malfunctioning of the machine

(4) Loss of continuity of circuits that depend upon sliding or rolling contacts,resulting in a failure of a safety-related function

(5) Electrical disturbances (e.g., electromagnetic, electrostatic, or radiointerference) either from outside the electrical equipment or internallygenerated, resulting in the malfunctioning of the machine

(6) Release of electrical or mechanical stored energy, resulting in, for example,electric shock or unexpected movement that can cause injury

(7) Audible noise at levels that cause health problems to persons

(8) Surface temperatures that can cause injury

Safety measures are a combination of the measures incorporated at the designstage and those measures required to be implemented by the user.

Design and development should be the first consideration in the reduction of risks.Where this is not possible, safeguarding should be considered. Safeguardingincludes the use of safeguards, awareness means, and safe working procedures.

One reference Examples of references to risk assessment is include ANSI B11-TR3 .0 and ISO 12100

Flash hazard analysis, calculation methods, and ways to address the hazard arefound in NFPA 70E.

One reference to recommended practices on static electrictiy is NFPA 77.






The committee added the reference to NFPA 77 to provide guidance on themitigation of static electricity. See committee statement and resolution on FR-7.

of 473



CommitteeStatement:

The text A.4.1 was revised to reflect the latest changes to reference documents andadded the additional reference to the ISO standard for risk assessment. See

committee statement and resolution on FR-30.

ResponseMessage:

FR-8-NFPA 79-2012 refer to FR 7, FR 30


A.5.4.3

The selection of other means is dependent on many factors, taking into accountthose persons for whom its use is intended. ( See ANSI B11

-TR3.0 and ISO

1412112100 . )






CommitteeStatement:

The text was revised in A.5.4.3 to reflect the latest changes to referencedocuments. See committee statement and resolution on FR-30.

ResponseMessage:

FR-70-NFPA 79-2012, FR-30

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff needs to fix edits for correct format. Copy and paste and edit versus saved look different.

of 473



First Revision No. 47-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after A.6.2 ]

A.6.1 The requirements of Chapter 6 reduce the likelihood that an arc flash event willoccur. Only enclosures listed as arc resistant are evaluated for providing protection fromarc flash events.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee intends that this annex note be labeled as A.6.1 and not A.6.2. Theannex note is added to provide information to clarify the requirements of 6.1 as theypertain to arc-flash.

ResponseMessage:

FR-47-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The committee intends that this annex note be labeled as A.6.1 and not A.6.2

of 473



First Revision No. 56-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. A.6.3.1.1 ]

A.6.3.1.1

Ripple-free is conventionally defined for a sinusoidal ripple voltage as a ripplecontent of not more than 10 percent rms. For additional information on isolatingtransformers, refer to IEC 60742 and IEC 61558-1. In addition, the followingmeasures need to be considered:

(1) The type of supply and grounding system

(2) The impedance values of the different elements of the

protective bonding system (

(3) equipment grounding system

)

(4)

(5) The characteristics of the protective devices used to detect insulation failure






CommitteeStatement:

The present use of parenthetical terms is confusing to the user of the standard. Theterms described do not always match the term they follow as many times they arenot directly interchangeable. The committee decided to add a separate annex tomake it easier for the user to compare the terms in one location.

ResponseMessage:

FR-56-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The edit showing is not what appears when saved. Staff needs to fix the final version as paren 1,2 and 3

of 473




A.8.1

The terms protective earthing conductor, protective bonding conductor, protectiveconductor, neutral, and earth are used in other countries.






CommitteeStatement:

The asterisk was deleted from 8.1 therefore the associated annex information wasremoved.The committee decided to add a separate annex to make it easier for theuser to compare the terms in one location. Therefore, adding an asterisk andassociated Annex A information was not needed.

ResponseMessage:

FR-58-NFPA 79-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 61-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after A.9.2 ]

A.9.2.2 For removal of power it can be sufficient to remove the power needed to generate atorque or force. This can be achieved by declutching, disconnecting, switching off, or byelectronic means (see 9.2.5.4.1.4). When stop functions are initiated it can be necessaryto discontinue machine functions other than motion.






CommitteeStatement:

A new annex note provides guidance on stop functions and use of disconnecting orswitching off. The committee agreed that recommended addition of types ofCategory 0 stop would be confusing as stated in PI 4. See the committeestatement and resolution in FR-59 and FR-61 for use of a disconnecting means as aCategory 0 Stop.

ResponseMessage:

FR-61-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff needs to correctly number the annex note as A.9.2.2.

of 473




A.9.

2 Information on the2 Some examples of safety-related

aspects of control functions is under consideration within IEC 62061 andfunctions can be emergency stopping, interlocking, temperature or speed control,etc. IEC 62061, ISO 13849-1

(revision)., ISO 13849-2, ANSI B11.0, ANSI B11-TR4, and ANSI B11-TR6 are examples ofapplicable functional safety standards.






CommitteeStatement:

The annex note was updated to include examples of safety related functions andcontent incorporated from A9.4.1 to provide guidance on pertinent standards. Thesuggested text on stop functions and reset was not included as it is alreadycovered in other sections. The reference to ANSI B11.TR3 was changed to ANSIB11.0 to reflect changes in the latest standards.

ResponseMessage:

FR-64-NFPA 79-2012

of 473



First Revision No. 60-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after A.9.2.3.3 ]

A.9.2.5.3.1 The supply circuit disconnecting means when opened achieves a Category 0stop.






Committee Statement: See the committee resolution and FR on PI-52, Log # 88.


Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

Staff needs to correctly number the annex note as A.9.2.5.3.1.

of 473




A.9.4.1 .1

More information on these risk reduction techniques can be found in Annex J H .In general, only single failures need to be regarded. In the event of higher levels ofrisk, it can be necessary to ensure that more than one failure cannot result in ahazardous condition. Where memory retention is achieved, for example, by the useof battery power, measures should be taken to prevent hazardous situations arisingfrom failure or removal of the battery. Means should be provided to preventunauthorized or inadvertent memory alteration by, for example, a key, an accesscode, or a tool.






CommitteeStatement:

The annex note needs to be assigned to A.9.4.1 (not A.9.4.2) based on action onPI#30 and PI#73. The text was revised to correct the reference to Annex H forguidance on risk reduction techniques and minimizing the probability of controlfunction failure.

ResponseMessage:

FR-68-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 74-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. A.9.4.1.1]

of 473




A.9.4.3.2 4

IEC 62061, ISO 13849-1, and ISO 13849-2 provide requirements for the design ofcontrol systems incorporating the use of software- and firmware-based controllers toperforming safety-related functions. IEC 61508 provides requirements for the designof software- and firmware-based safety controllers. IEC 61800-5-2 and IEC 61508give guidance to the drive manufacturer on the design of drives intended to providesafety functions.






CommitteeStatement:

The annex note is incorrectly referenced to 9.4.3.2. 9.4.3.4 which deals withsoftware and firmware based controllers. This proposal was developed as part of theNFPA 79 Chapter 9 Control and Technology task group.

ResponseMessage:

FR-65-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 45-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. A.9.4.3.2]

of 473




A.14.1

For additional information related to motor standards, refer to ANSI/ UL 1004-1 ,NEMA MG-1, IEEE 841, or IEC 60034-1.

The protection requirements for motors and associated equipment are given inSection 7.2 for overcurrent protection, in Section 7.3 for overload protection, and inSection 7.6 for overspeed protection.






CommitteeStatement:

The reference to UL 1004 was deleted and replaced with ANSI/UL 1004-1.


Public Input No. 6-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. A.14.1]

of 473

11/9/12


First Revision No. 72-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. C.5 ]

C.5 Material-Handling Machines.

Examples of material-handling machines are as follows:

(1) Industrial robots

(2) Transfer machines

(3) Sortation machines

(4) Conveyors and conveying machines






CommitteeStatement:

Adding the terms Conveyors and conveying machines adds further clarity to typesof equipment meeting the description "Material-Handling Machinery".

ResponseMessage:

FR-72-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 98-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. C.5]

D.1 [ ]

D.1

Figure D.1(a) through Figure D.1(q) are not intended to be (design) guidelines. They areincluded only to illustrate documentation methods.

Figure D.1(a) Cover Sheet and Sheet Index.

of 473



Figure D.1(b) System Layout and Installation Diagram.

Figure D.1(c) Block (System) Diagram.

Figure D.1(d) Interconnection Diagram.

Figure D.1(e) Elementary Schematic.

Figure D.1(f) PLC Input Diagram.

of 473



Figure D.1(f) Continued

of 473


Figure D.1(g) PLC Output Diagram.

Figure D.1(g) Continued

of 473



Figure D.1(h) Sample Enclosure Layout — Interior.

Figure D.1(i) Sample Enclosure Layout — Exterior.

of 473



Figure D.1(j) Sequence of Operations — Graphical.

Figure D.1(k) Sequence of Operations — Descriptive Graphical.

Figure D.1(l) Sample Servo Diagram.

of 473


Figure D.1(l) Continued

Figure D.1(m) Sample PLC Network — Station Layout.

of 473



Figure D.1(m) Continued

Figure D.1(n) Sample Operator Station.

of 473



Figure D.1(n) Continued

Figure D.1(o) Sample Parts List.

Figure D.1(p) ISO (A2) Drawing Standard Framework.

of 473



Figure D.1(q) Selections from ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315A Symbol Table.




Submittal Date:


Committee Statement:

Response Message:

Public Input No. 76-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. D.1]

of 473



First Revision No. 91-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. D.1 ]

D.1

Figure D.1(a) through Figure D.1(q) are not intended to be (design) guidelines. They areincluded only to illustrate documentation methods.

Figure D.1(a) Cover Sheet and Sheet Index.

Figure D.1(b) System Layout and Installation Diagram.

Figure D.1(c) Block (System) Diagram.

Figure D.1(d) Interconnection Diagram.

of 473



Figure D.1(e) Elementary Schematic.

Figure D.1(f) PLC Input Diagram.

Figure D.1(f) Continued

of 473



Figure D.1(g) PLC Output Diagram.

Figure D.1(g) Continued

of 473



Figure D.1(h) Sample Enclosure Layout — Interior.

Figure D.1(i) Sample Enclosure Layout — Exterior.

of 473



Figure D.1(j) Sequence of Operations — Graphical.

Figure D.1(k) Sequence of Operations — Descriptive Graphical.

Figure D.1(l) Sample Servo Diagram.

of 473

11/9/12


Figure D.1(l) Continued

Figure D.1(m) Sample PLC Network — Station Layout.

of 473



Figure D.1(m) Continued

Figure D.1(n) Sample Operator Station.

of 473



Figure D.1(n) Continued

Figure D.1(o) Sample Parts List.

Figure D.1(p) ISO (A2) Drawing Standard Framework.

of 473



Figure D.1(q) Selections from ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315A Symbol Table.



79fD-01g1FR91.jpg

79fD-01g2FR91.jpg





of 473


CommitteeStatement:

The committee agrees that the term "input" needs to be replaced by the term"output". The figures in the annex are provided as examples. The term "module"was retained because it represents typical information provided by design software.PI's affected by this revision are PI-72 and PI-87 which were rejected and resolvedhere..

ResponseMessage:

FR-91-NFPA 79-2012, PI-72, PI-87, PI-76

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 17,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

On Annex D Figure D.1(g) PLC output diagram change "input" to "output" from the phrase "120 VAC input module" between line indicator 401 and 402 on page 67 and between 423 and 424 on page 68.


of 473



First Revision No. 92-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. F.2 ]

F.2 Rating for Electrical Enclosures.

F.2.1

Electrical enclosures are type-rated according to NEMA 250, ANSI/UL 50, andANSI/UL 508 or IP-rated according to IEC 60529 based upon the degree ofprotection provided.

F.2.1 2

Type-rated and IP-rated electrical enclosures have only the following in common:

(1) A degree of protection for persons from hazardous components inside theenclosure

(2) A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress of solidforeign objects, including dust

(3) A degree of protection for equipment inside the enclosure from ingress ofwater






CommitteeStatement:

The changes were made for clarity and to be in compliance with theMOS.


of 473



First Revision No. 104-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. F.5.3.1 ]

F.5.3.1

Where more than one supplementary letter is used, the following alphabeticsequence applies:

(1) IPXXA. Protected against access with the back of hand

(2) IPXXB. Protected against access with finger

(3) IPXXC. Protected against access with a tool

(4) IPXXD. Protected against access with a wire

These letter designations (A, B, C, D) can be used for referencing the protection oflive parts while the enclosure is accessed. There is not a comparable NEMA 250type - rating to this application.






CommitteeStatement:

The section as currently numbered does not comply with the NFPA Manual of Stylewhich states that all subdivisions shall contain at least two subdivisions. Thischange is the result of the Editorial Task Group review of the 2012 document forcompliance with 1.8.1 of the NFPA Manual of Style. In this case the sectionnumber was removed as opposed to renumbering in sequence. The informationprovided is directly related to the text above and therefore a second level subdivisionis not necessary.

ResponseMessage:

FR-104-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 92-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. F.5.3.1]

of 473



First Revision No. 31-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after F.5.4 ]

Table F.5.4 Enclosure Type Selection


FileName

Description

TABLE110.28.docxThis is table 110.28 from the NEC it may need formatting. Production should get the table from their files on the NEC to ensure the correct placement and formatting






CommitteeStatement:

Annex F provides a IP table definition and a Type rating versus IP ratingcomparison, but it does not provide a reference to the Type rating definition andwhat criteria would be used to select an Enclosure Type rating.

ResponseMessage:

FR-31-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 105-NFPA 79-2012 [New Section after F.5.4]

of 473



First Revision No. 43-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. H.2 ]

H.2 Measures to Minimize Risk in the Event of Failure.

Use of proven circuit techniques and components measures to minimize risk in theevent of failure include the use of proven circuit techniques and components. Thesemeasures include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) Bonding of control circuits for operational purposes (see 9.4.2.1)

(2) One terminal of the control device (i.e., the operating coil) connected to thebonded conductor and all switching elements (e.g., contacts) connected tothe non-earthed (grounded) side of the control supply (see 9.1.4)

(3) Stopping by de-energizing (see 9.2.2)

(4) Switching of all live conductors to the device being controlled

(5) Use of switching devices having positive direct opening operation (see IEC60947-5-1)

(6) Circuit design to reduce the possibility of failures causing undesirableoperations






CommitteeStatement:

The committee deleted the definition of "positive opening operation", therefore theuse of the term was deleted to be consistent with the existing defined term "directopening operation".

ResponseMessage:

FR-43-NFPA 79-2012

First Revision No. 49-NFPA 79-2012 [ New Section after H.5 ]

Annex J:

This annex is not a part of the requirements of this NFPA document but is included forinformational purposes only.

Electrical Terms Defined

of 473



This Annex contains definitions from various standards to help users understand thedifferences between terminologies used by different standards developing organizations

NEC Terms

Bonded (Bonding). Connected to establish electrical continuity and conductivity. [70,2011]

Bonding Conductor or Jumper. A reliable conductor to ensure the required electricalconductivity between metal parts required to be electrically connected. [70, 2011]

Bonding Jumper, Equipment. The connection between two or more portions of theequipment grounding conductor. [70, 2011]

Bonding Jumper, Supply-Side. A conductor installed on the supply side of a service orwithin a service equipment enclosure(s), or for a separately derived system, that ensuresthe required electrical conductivity between metal parts required to be electricallyconnected. [70, 2011]

Bonding Jumper, System. The connection between the grounded circuit conductor andthe supply-side bonding jumper, or the equipment grounding conductor, or both, at aseparately derived system. [70, 2011]

Effective Ground-Fault Current Path. An intentionally constructed, low-impedanceelectrically conductive path designed and intended to carry current under ground-faultconditions from the point of a ground fault on a wiring system to the electrical supplysource and that facilitates the operation of the overcurrent protective device or ground-faultdetectors on high-impedance grounded systems. [70, 2011]

Ground. The earth. [70, 2011]

Ground Fault. An unintentional, electrically conducting connection between anungrounded conductor of an electrical circuit and the normally non–current-carryingconductors, metallic enclosures, metallic raceways, metallic equipment, or earth. [70,2011]]

Grounded (Grounding). Connected (connecting) to ground or to a conductive body thatextends the ground connection. [70, 2011]

Grounded, Solidly. Connected to ground without inserting any resistor or impedancedevice. [70, 2011]

Grounded Conductor. A system or circuit conductor that is intentionally grounded. [70,2011]

Ground-Fault Current Path. An electrically conductive path from the point of a groundfault on a wiring system through normally non–current-carrying conductors, equipment, orthe earth to the electrical supply source. [70, 2011]

Informational Note: Examples of ground-fault current paths could consist of anycombination of equipment grounding conductors, metallic raceways, metallic cablesheaths, electrical equipment, and any other electrically conductive material such as metalwater and gas piping,steel framing members, stucco mesh, metal ducting, reinforcing steel,shields of communications cables, and the earth itself. [70, 2011]

Grounding Conductor, Equipment (EGC). The conductive path(s) installed to connectnormally non–current-carrying metal parts of equipment together and to the systemgrounded conductor or to the grounding electrode conductor, or both. [70, 2011]

Informational Note No. 1: It is recognized that the equipment grounding conductor alsoperforms bonding.

Informational Note No. 2: See 250.118 for a list of acceptable equipment groundingconductors.

of 473

121/133

Grounding Electrode. A conducting object through which a direct connection to earth isestablished. [70, 2011]

Grounding Electrode Conductor. A conductor used to connect the system groundedconductor or the equipment to a grounding electrode or to a point on the groundingelectrode system. [70, 2011]

Metal Wireways. Sheet metal troughs with hinged or removable covers for housing andprotecting electrical wires and cable and in which conductors are laid in place after thewireway has been installed as a complete system.[70, 2011]

Neutral Conductor. The conductor connected to the neutral point of a system that isintended to carry current under normal conditions. [70, 2011]

Neutral Point. The common point on a wye-connection in a polyphase system or midpointon a single-phase, 3-wire system, or midpoint of a single-phase portion of a 3-phase deltasystem, or a midpoint of a 3-wire, direct-current system. [70, 2011]

Informational Note: At the neutral point of the system, the vectorial sum of the nominalvoltages from all other phases within the system that utilize the neutral, with respect to the

neutral point, is zero potential.

Separately Derived System. A premises wiring system whose power is derived from asource of electric energy or equipment other than a service. Such systems have no directconnection from circuit conductors of one system to circuit conductors of another system,other than connections through the earth, metal enclosures, metallic raceways, orequipment grounding conductors. [70, 2011]

Service. The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utilityto the wiring system of the premises served. [70, 2011]

Ungrounded. Not connected to ground or to a conductive body that extends the groundconnection.[70, 2011]

Terms and definitions used in IEC 60204-1 relating to protective and functionalbonding extracted from the draft of the 2nd CD for the 6th edition.

3.24

equipotential bonding

provision of electric connections between conductive parts, intended to achieveequipotentiality

[IEV 195-1-10]

3.25

exposed conductive part

conductive part of electrical equipment, which can be touched and which is not live undernormal operating conditions, but which can become live under fault conditions

[IEV 826-12-10, modified]

3.26

extraneous conductive part

conductive part not forming part of the electrical installation and liable to introduce apotential, generally the earth potential


NOTE Examples of extraneous conductive parts can include ladders, handrails, pipes,machine parts, etc.

of 473



” that appear with this definition.

3.29

fault protection

protection against electric shock under single-fault conditions

[195-06-02]

3.30

functional bonding

equipotential bonding necessary for proper functioning of electrical equipment

3.36

live part

conductor or conductive part intended to be energized in normal use, including a neutralconductor, but, by convention, not a PEN conductor

NOTE This term does not necessarily imply a risk of electric shock.

3.40

neutral conductor

N

conductor electrically connected to the neutral point of a system and capable ofcontributing to the distribution of electrical energy


3.46

protective bonding

equipotential bonding for protection against electric shock

NOTE Measures for protection against electric shock can also reduce the risk of burns orfire.

3.47

protective bonding circuit

protective conductors and conductive parts connected together to provide protection againstelectric shock in the event of an insulation failure

3.48

protective conductor

conductor required for protective bonding by some measures for protection against electricshock for electrically connecting any of the following parts:

– exposed conductive parts;

– extraneous conductive parts;

– main earthing terminal (PE)




Organization: [ Not Specified ] of 473






CommitteeStatement:

The annex was added to help users understand definitions from various standardsand to understand the differences between terminologies used by differentstandards developing organizations. Because IEC terms are being removed fromChapter 3 and where used as parenthetical terms they are being retained in thisnewly added annex. The committee recommends the chair establish a task groupto explain how the terms are used and submit a public comment for the seconddraft.

ResponseMessage:

FR-49-NFPA 79-2012

Committee Notes:

Date SubmittedBy

Aug 16,2012

[ NotSpecified ]

The committee added a new annex. Create a new annex with the text provided here in the correct location before annex J. It is currently located here because it was not clear how to add a new annex.

of 473



First Revision No. 7-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. J.1.1 ]

J.1.1 NFPA Publications.


NFPA 70 ®, National Electrical Code ®, 2011 edition.

NFPA 70E ®, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace ®, 2012 edition.

NFPA 77, Recommended Practice on Static Electricity , 2007 edition.






CommitteeStatement:

The committee agreed to add this reference as an informational reference forguidance on static electricity.

ResponseMessage:

FR-7-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 62-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. J.1.1]

First Revision No. 30-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. J.1.2 ]

J.1.2 Other Publications.

of 473

J.1.2.1 ANSI Publications.

American National Standards Institute, Inc., 25 West 43rd Street, 4th Floor, NewYork, NY 10036.

ANSI B11-TR3, Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction — A Guide to Estimate,Evaluate and Reduce Risks Associated with Machine Tools , 2000 .0, Safety ofMachinery - General Requirements and Risk Assessment, 2010 .

ANSI B11-TR4, Selection of Programmable Electronic Systems (PES/PLC) forMachine Tools, 2004.

ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels , 2007.

J.1.2.2 EN Publications.

European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC), 35,Rue de Stassartstraat, B-1050 Brussels, Belgium. CENELEC Online InfoService: [email protected]

EN 60204, Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment of machines —Part 1: General requirements, 2006.

EN 61010-1, Safety requirements for electrical equipment formeasurement, control, and laboratory use — Part 1: General requirements,2006.

J.1.2.3 IEC Publications.

International Electrotechnical Commission, 3, rue de Varembé, P.O. Box131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland.

IEC 60034-1, Rotating electrical machines — Part 1: Rating andperformance , 1999-

08

2008 .

IEC 60072-1, Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines— Part 1: Frame numbers 56 to 400 and flange numbers 55 to 1080 , 1991-

03

2003 .

IEC 60204-1, Ed. 4.1 Safety of machinery — Electrical equipment ofmachines — Part 1: General requirements , 2000-

05

2005 .

IEC 60332-1, Tests on electric cables under fire conditions — Part 1: Teston a single vertical insulated wire or cable , 1993-

04

2004 .

IEC 60364-4-1, Electrical installations of buildings — Part 4-41: Protectionfor safety — Protection against electric shock , 2001-

08

2008 .

IEC

60364–5–53

of 473



60364-5-53 , Electrical Installations of Buildings — Part 5-53: Selectionand Erection of Electrical Equipment — Isolation, Switching and Control ,2002-

06

2006 .

IEC 60417-1, Graphical symbols for use on equipment — Part 1: Overviewand application , 2000-

05

2005 .

IEC 60417-2, Graphical symbols for use on equipment — Part 2: Symboloriginals , 1998-

08

2008 .

IEC 60529, Ed. 2.1 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IPCode) , 2001-

02

2002 .

IEC 60621-3, Electrical installations for outdoor sites under heavyconditions (including open-cast mines and quarries). Part 3: Generalrequirements for equipment and ancillaries , 1979-

01

2001 .

IEC 60742, Ed. 1.0 Isolating transformers and safety isolatingtransformers , 1983.

IEC 60870-5-1, Telecontrol equipment and systems. Part 5: Transmissionprotocols — Section One: Transmission frame formats , 1990-

02

2002 .

IEC 60947-4, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1:Contactors and motor-starters— Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters , 2000-

11

2011 .

IEC 60947-5-1, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 5-1: Controlcircuit devices and switching elements — Electromechanical control circuitdevices , 2000-

03

2003 .

IEC 60947-7-1, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 7: Ancillaryequipment — Section 1: Terminal blocks for copper conductors , 1999-

08

of 473



2008 .

IEC 61010-1, Safety requirements for electrical equipment formeasurement, control, and laboratory use — Part 1: General requirements ,2001.

IEC 61310-1, Safety of machinery — indication, mark ing and actuation —Part 1: Requirements for visual, auditory and tactile signals , 1995.

IEC 61310-3, Safety of machinery — indication, mark ing and actuation —Part 3: Requirements for the location and operation of actuators , 1999.

IEC 61508, [Series] Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmableelectronic safety-related systems , 1998-

00

2000 .

IEC 61558-1, Safety of power transformers, power supply units and similar— Part 1: General requirements and tests , 1998-

07

of 473



2007 .

IEC 61800-5-2, Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems — Part 5-2: Safety Requirements — Functional, 2006.

IEC 62061, Safety of machinery — Functional safety of electrical,electronic and programmable control systems , 2005.

NOTE : The IEC publishes consolidated editions of its publications with allthe amendments and corrigenda included with the base document.

Edition 1.0 is a base document without any amendments.

Edition 1.1 is the base 1.0 edition consolidated with one amendment.

Edition 1.2 is the base 1.0 edition consolidated with two amendments.

Edition 2.0 is the second edition of a base document. This may include newinformation combined as well as amendments from edition 1.x.

Edition 2.1 is the second edition of a document consolidated withamendment 1 to that edition.

J.1.2.4 IEEE Publications.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Three Park Avenue, 17thFloor, New York, NY 10016-5997.

IEEE 100, The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standard Terms , 7thedition, 2000.

ANSI Y32.2/IEEE 315/315A, IEEE Graphic Symbols for Electrical andElectronics Diagrams (Including Reference Designation Letters) , 1993.

IEEE 841, Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry, Severe DutyTotally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors up toand Including 500 HP , 1994.

J.1.2.5 ISO Publications.

International Organization for Standardization, 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse,Case postale 56, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland.

ISO 7000, Graphical symbols for use on equipment — Index and synopsis ,1989.

ISO 12100, Safety of machinery — Basic concepts, general principles fordesign — Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology , 2003.

ISO 13849-1, Safety of machinery — Safety-related parts of controlsystems — Part 1: General principles for design , 1990.

ISO 13849-2, Safety of machinery — Safety-related parts of controlsystems — Part 2: Validation , 2003.

ISO 13850, Safety of machinery — Emergency stop — Principles fordesign , 1996.

ISO 14121, Safety of machinery — Principles of risk assessment , 1999.

J.1.2.6 NEMA Publications.

of 473



National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 North 17thStreet, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209.

NEMA MG-1, Motors and Generators , 2003.

NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 VoltsMaximum) , 2003.

J.1.2.7 SEMI Publications.

Semiconductor Equipment and Materials International, 3081 ZankerRoad, San Jose, CA 95134.

SEMI S2, Environmental, Health, and Safety Guideline forSemiconductor Manufacturing Equipment , 2003.

SEMI S9, Safety Guideline for Electrical Design Verification Testsfor Semiconductor Manufacturing Equipment , 2001.

SEMI S22, Safety Guideline for the Electrical Design ofSemiconductor Manufacturing Equipment , 2006.

J.1.2.8 UL Publications.

of 473



Underwriters Laboratories Inc., 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL60062-2096.

ANSI/UL 50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment ,2007.

ANSI/UL 62, Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire , 2006.

ANSI/UL 248-14, Standard for Low-Voltage Fuses — Part 14:Supplemental Fuses , 2000, Revised 2005.

ANSI/UL 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures, 2009.

ANSI/UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles ,2001, Revised 2009.

ANSI/UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment , 1999,Revised 2010.

UL 508A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels , 2001, Revised2010.

ANSI/UL 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVCConduit , 2005, Revised 2008.

ANSI/UL 758, Appliance Wiring Material , 2006, Revised 2009.

UL 1004, Standard for Electric Motors , 1994, Revised 2006.

ANSI/UL 1077, Standard for Supplementary Protectors for Use inElectrical Equipment , 2005, Revised 2009.

ANSI/UL 1682, Plugs, Receptacles, and Cable Connectors of thePin and Sleeve Type, 2007.

ANSI/UL 60950-1, Information Technology Equipment — Part I:General Requirements , 2007.

UL Subject 2237, Outline of Investigation for Multi-PointInterconnection Power Cable Assemblies for Industrial Machinery ,2006.

IEC/UL 61010A-1, Electrical Equipment for Laboratory Use — Part1: General Requirements , 2002.






Committee

ANSI B11.TR3, Risk Assessment and Risk Reduction, A Guide to Estimate,Evaluate and Reduce Risks Associated with Machine Tools, 2000 has been rolledinto ANSI B11.0, Safety of Machinery - General Requirements and RiskAssessment, 2010. ANSI B11.0, 2010 provides the needed guidance to machinebuilders, modifiers, and end users. The reference to ANSI Z535.4 was also deletedto resolve PI-63. ISO 13849-1 and ISO 12100 have been updated and are the current

of 473



Statement: international standards in use today. The revised dates will provide current neededguidance regarding functional safety, safety circuit design requirements and therelated risk assessments to machine builders, modifiers, and end users. ISO 14121was deleted as this document has been incorporated into the new revision of ISO12100.

ResponseMessage:

FR-30-NFPA 79-2012

Public Input No. 66-NFPA 79-2012 [Section No. J.1.2]

First Revision No. 94-NFPA 79-2012 [ Section No. J.1.2.8 ]

of 473



J.1.2.8 UL Publications.


ANSI/UL 50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, 2007.

ANSI/UL 62, Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire, 2006 2010 .

ANSI/UL 248-14, Standard for Low-Voltage Fuses — Part 14: Supplemental Fuses,2000, Revised 2005 2010 .

ANSI/UL 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches,and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures, 2009.

ANSI/UL 498, Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles, 2001, Revised2009.

ANSI/UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment, 1999, Revised 2010.

UL 508A, Standard for Industrial Control Panels, 2001, Revised 2010.

ANSI/UL 651, Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit, 2005, Revised2008.

ANSI/UL 758, Appliance Wiring Material, 2006, Revised 2009.

ANSI/ UL 1004 -1 , Standard for

Electric Motors, 1994

Rotating Electrical Machines , 2008 , Revised

2006

2011 .

ANSI/UL 1077, Standard for Supplementary Protectors for Use in ElectricalEquipment, 2005, Revised 2009 2010 .

ANSI/UL 1682, Plugs, Receptacles, and Cable Connectors of the Pin and SleeveType, 2007.

ANSI/UL 60950-1, Information Technology Equipment — Part I: GeneralRequirements, 2007, Revised 2011 .

UL Subject 2237, Outline of Investigation for Multi-Point Interconnection PowerCable Assemblies for Industrial Machinery, 2006 2011 .

IEC/UL 61010A-1, Electrical Equipment for Laboratory Use — Part 1: GeneralRequirements, 2002.






CommitteeStatement:

The reference to UL 1004 was deleted and replaced with ANSI/UL 1004-1. Theother standards were updated to the most current editions.

Response FR-94-NFPA 79-2012

of 473

National Fire Protection Association

2/3

2/3

of 473

NFPA 79 A2014 (EEI AAA) FD BALLOT FINAL

FR 50, Global Input, See FR 50

Eligible to Vote:23

Choice Comments Votes


Mark R. Hilbert Continue to create the revision as recommended by the meeting actions.

Relocating the parenthetical terms to a new annex and creating a cross

reference for the US and IEC terms along with additional explanatory

material will benefit all readers of the Standard as well as the harmonization

process. The Grounding and Bonding Task Group is continuing to work on

comments for the development of the new Annex. There is an opportunity

for the public as well as committee members to provide comments that will

help explain the similarities and differences between the US and the IEC

grounding and bonding terms and applications. Recommendations in

comments would be appreciated.

Negative 1

Page 1

of 473


David R. Carpenter I certainly agree with the submitter concerning the nomenclature of

understanding between the IEC and NFPA standards. I also agree that the

NFPA 70 is the base standard for NFPA 79. However,that does not negate the

need for understanding the IEC terms which are needed to properly install,

maintain and troubleshoot industrial machines located in the US and are

designed based on the IEC standards. Electricians, engineers and inspectors

are increasingly faced with Industrial Machines which are designed based on

IEC standards. It is imperative that they have guidance to prevent potential

hazards which can, and has resulted in shock hazards, fire hazards and the

destruction of equipment. A few examples of past problems: color codes

difference between IEC and NFPA concerning neutral applications, schematic

difference concerning interlocks, and transformer characteristics that change

grounding techniques and overcurrent protection application. This is

especially troublesome when troubleshooting and installation. Most often

seen when an IEC design is feed by a US system. The aforementioned is

similar discussion to why IEC clarification terms were put in this standard.

Industrial Machines have certain nuances which are not germane to facilities

and should have some application difference as is needed. See my comments

FR 15

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 2

of 473


FR 97, Section No. 1.3.1.1, See FR 97

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter comply with the NFPA Manual of Style

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

FR 98, Section No. 1.3.2, See FR 98

Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter reference update

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 3

of 473


FR 39, Section No. 3.1, See FR 39

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Reference update

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 1

Page 4

of 473


David R. Carpenter Bonding the asterisk should not be removed because it leaves the reader

with less information to determine how to correlate with IEC designed

systems using the term "protective bonding circuit" definition ..See my

comments FR 50... the asterisk does not complicate the standard but gives

needed information with out complicating the flow of sentence structure.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 5

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Change needed

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Agree in principle

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

FR 40, New Section after 3.3.55, See FR 40

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman This term should apply globally throughout the document. This is a

recommendation to do so and have it included in the First Draft for public

review and comment.

David R. Carpenter Agree to be consistent with acceptably definition to all NFPA standards

Daniel R. Neeser The term should be consistent throughout the document. In some cases the

term that is used is “control panel” and these should be changed to

“industrial control panel”.

Page 6

of 473


Jay Tamblingson While it is useful to add the definition of industrial control panel, there are a

number of uses of similar terms within the standard (control panel, control

enclosure, main enclosure, etc) which should either be included as reference

within this definition or those sections revised to use the defined term as

appropriate.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15

Page 7

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter The term needs constancy but clarification in relation to Industrial Machines.

Branch Circuits have certain nuances indigenous to industrial machines which

are not to facilities

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 8

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 0

Abstain 1

David R. Carpenter Not sure I fully understand the reasoning behind this change

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revision. See my ballot comment on FR 50.

Negative 1

David R. Carpenter See comments on FR 50

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revision. See my ballot comment on FR 50.

Negative 1

David R. Carpenter See comments on FR 50

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 9

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Not needed

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 10

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter much needed and should be in other NFPA standards

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed for clairification

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky The entire section number appears to be struck through on the ballot. The

submitter did not strike through the entire number and I believe intended

the section be numbered 4.4.2.


Page 11

of 473


Jay Tamblingson The existing requirements of 4.4.2 for providing EMC mitigation are likely

unenforceable as they give no specific guidance regarding electrical noise and

transient levels permitted and when suppression must be provided. This

section should be revised to reference appropriate standards, manufacturer

requirements, and application considerations.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed

Jay Tamblingson The requirements in 5.3.1.4 need to be revised to align with the new

permitted use of separately mounted disconnecting means and asscociated

interlocking requirements contained in the revised text.

Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revision. With the increasing awareness of electrical

hazards in the workplace and the desire to create safe work practices for

electrical workers in the United States it is common to locate the supply

circuit disconnecting means in a separate enclosure. This new exception

maintains the interlocking requirements of 6.2.3 while allowing the electrical

hazard reduction strategies formally limited to machines totaling 2 hp or less.

Page 12

of 473


J. B. Titus The new text from the committee action does not take into account random

events such as material handling, staged tooling and other situations that

could temporarily block immediate access to the disconnecting means. I

suggest inserting..... "and always readily accessible to the operator."

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15

Page 13

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky The committee statement indicates that the term "rated" was deleted

elsewhere therefore should be deleted here but it appears in underlined

format in (2). I believe it needs to be removed.

David R. Carpenter clarification

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 100, Section No. 5.3.3.2.1, See FR 100

Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed information which does not need to be in the body of the text

Page 14

of 473


Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revision. The requirements of Chapter 6 are intended

to warn a worker of a potential arc flash hazard. The requirement in 6.1

mirrors the National Electrical Code which already requires control cabinets

to be field labeled to warn workers of a potential arc flash hazard. Keeping

this requirement in NFPA 79 will be a benefit those working on electrical

equipment of industrial machinery in cases where NFPA 79 is the only

document used.

Page 15

of 473


Negative 3

Paul Dobrowsky This change should not be made. Placing live parts in an enclosure inherently

reduces the likelihood of an arc flash event occurring. An indirect contact

electric shock incident can occur as a result of an insulation failure if the

enclosure integrity or the effective fault current path is compromised.

Electrical equipment does not warn of potential arc flash hazards and

marking requirements seem to belong in Chapter 16. First Revision No. 47

added Annex material to .6.2 that supports this concept.

Palmer L. Hickman The submitter of the Public Input has recommended a significant reduction in

personnel protection without technical substantiation. The assertion is made

that "Current language could be interpreted to require that the equipment

must be designed to protect person(s) from arc flash hazards." The present

requirements are clear. They do require protection against arc flash hazards.

See present requirements below: Electrical equipment shall provide

protection of persons from electric shock, from direct and indirect contact,

and from arc flash hazards.

Daniel R. Neeser Providing protection from direct contact or indirect contact does provide a

degree of protection from arc flash hazards, and as such it is more than just

“warn of potential” of arc flash hazards, as indicated in the new annex A.6.1.

Therefore the change would reduce the level of safety.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 14


Eligible to Vote:23

Page 16

of 473




David R. Carpenter compliance with the NFPA Manual of Style

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 17

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed to be consistant concerning arc flash with other NFPA standards

Jay Tamblingson The reference here to 16.2.3 is too limiting. Subsection 16.2.7 also references

the requirement for warning against arc flash hazards. Should not 16.2.7 be

also referenced in 6 6? What is missing is some lower limit of the arc flash

hazard which could exclude those devices or assemblies for which the

warning is not needed. As of now the only exclusion is found in 16.2.3.2

which excludes items too small to place a label on.

Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revision. See my ballot statement on FR 46.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

Page 18

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter correct wording for application

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 19

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter correlation with NEC and style manual

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky Transformers and overload device requirements are provided with

references to the NEC. A similar requirement should be included for motor

controllers possibly as part of 7.2.10. Motor controllers shall be provided in

accordance with Article 430, Part VII of NFPA 70.


Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter clarifies application

Negative 0

Page 20

of 473


Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 21

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter consistancy and clarification of other articles/sections

Daniel R. Neeser Recommend deleting "ground fault" since this is redundant a ground fault is

a type of short circuit.

Jay Tamblingson It would be better, structure wise, if the added sentence was inserted as a

new listed item. If not, an "and" should be inserted before the two clauses so

the listed item (2) would be one sentence.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter consistancy and clarification of other articles/sections

Daniel R. Neeser Recommend deleting "ground fault" since this is redundant a ground fault is

a type of short circuit.

Jay Tamblingson The "is" in the last sentence should be "shall be"

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23

Page 22

of 473




Paul Dobrowsky The opening phase should be improved for clarity such as "shall meet all the

following requirements" or "shall be:"


Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 23

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23




Stephen W. Douglas Is it necessary to include “motor controller”? Some may read this to mean

the overlaod protection needs to be installed ahead of the motor controller. I

recommend we remove “motor controller” from this requirement.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky Delete new 7.8.3 Where provided, SPDs shall be connected across the

terminals of all equipment requiring such protection. I understand this is an

existing requirement but SPD's are installed by choice so why shouldn't the

designer or installer be permitted to decide where to connect them.

David R. Carpenter Needed information to properly install, inspect or troubleshoot

Page 24

of 473


Jay Tamblingson The new language appears to mandate that only devices classified as SPD's

can be used for surge suppression of switching transients, but does not

differentiate between transients in power circuits vs. control circuits. It is

common practice to use diodes on dc inductive loads to suppress switching

transients, but it is unclear if these are classified under as SPD's. In addition,

accessories for industrial components that provide suppression are not listed

as SPD's but as motor controller accessories.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed information and clarification

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Page 25

of 473


Paul Dobrowsky Removing the parenthetical terms is a good change and should improve

clarity. In addition replacing the phrase "equipment grounding circuit" with

"equipment grounding conductor", "bonding conductor" or "equipment

bonding jumper" might be more appropriate.

Jay Tamblingson Rather than deleting the the annex note reference under 8.1, it should be

retained and the annex note changed to refer to the new annex J on

grounding and bonding terminology.

Negative 1

David R. Carpenter See FR 50 comments This especially applies to industrial machines and

should not be treated as facilities type language. There are times when the

two do overlap.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

Page 26

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 3

Mike Soter Exception allows the use of machine members for establishing the continuity

of a ground path. This is not an acceptable practice(regardless of machine

member size)for multiple reasons: 1. The resistivity of that path (based on

the number of bolted connections)may not be the least resistive path to the

source. 2. The path then becomes a "function" of non qualified individuals.

ie. Personnel familiar with electrical installations lose "functional" control of

the ground path integrity. 3. Non Electrical maintenance personnel may

inadvertantley break, or add resistance to that unlabeled/unidentified path

during the course of the machine's life expectancy.

Page 27

of 473


David R. Carpenter See comments FR 50 and FR 57

Jay Tamblingson The permission of the exception to 8.2.2.1 was removed from the 2007 NFPA

79 for reasons that included alignment with IEC 60204 1 in accordance with

the July 23, 1998 letter from the Standards Council which read in part:

"Concur with the efforts of the NFPA 79 Committee to harmonize the

technical requirements of NFPA 79 and IEC 204, where feasible and where in

concert with the NEC and its related codes and standards." Further, the "in

concert with the NEC and its related codes and standards" part of the

permission from the Standards Council was then deemed to be met, as cited

by Lynn Saunders in his Comment, in that the removal of the allowance to

substitute machine members for an equipment grounding conductor met the

requirements of Article 300.3(B) of the NEC. It required that the equipment

grounding conductor be contained in the same raceway with the other

conductors of the same circuit. The proposed exception is, in effect, ignoring

the agreement to align with IEC 60204 1 and the NEC 300.3(B) requirement.

It has been proposed on the basis of Article 250.136(A) which permits a

grounded metal rack or structure provided for the support of electrical

equipment to, in turn, ground the electrical equipment that is securely

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed change

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 28

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky NFPA Staff's name incorrectly appears as the submitter. Removing the

parenthetical terms is a good change and should improve clarity. In addition

replacing the phrase "equipment grounding circuit" with "equipment

grounding conductor", "bonding conductor" or "equipment bonding jumper"

might be more appropriate.

Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 30

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter correction needed

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

FR 59, Sections 9.2.5.3.1, 9.2.5.3.2, See FR 59

Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 1

Page 31

of 473


Mark R. Hilbert I agree with the recommendation to change the word “where” to “as”

however, no action should be taken on the remainder of the proposed

revisions. By removing 9.2.5.3.1 there is no longer a mandatory requirement

to provide a Category 0 stop. I do not agree that 9.2.5.3 is redundant with

9.2.5.3.2. Section 9.2.5.3.2 only requires the Category 0, 1, or 2 stop(s) to be

provided and located as required by the risk assessment. There is no

mandatory requirement for a Category 0 stop to be provided. That

requirement is in 9.2.5.3.1.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 25, Section No. 9.2.5.4.2.1, See FR 25

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter gives needed guidance

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 32

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter different nomenclature is used to be consistant

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter improper annex note

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23

Page 33

of 473




Paul Dobrowsky During the meeting there was considerable discussion about the necessary

provisions for software and firmware based controllers used in safety related

functions. Some indicated that the existing conditions cannot be met. Listed

products are available that supposedly meet these provisions. If the

provisions are not accurate they need to be modified but they need to

remain in the standard and not only determined by anyone's risk assessment

with no specific stated method.

Page 34

of 473


David R. Carpenter annex note which was incorrectly referenced has now been corrected

Jay Tamblingson The annex note revision was correct, but the committee action to reject the

changes proposed in Public Input 47 by the NFPA 79 Control and Technology

Task Force was not. Most of today's safety relays and controllers use

software or firmware, and the existing language essentially prescribes a level

of safety control system performance that may not be appropriate or

achievable for the level of risk identified. Functional safety solutions are

given in probabilistic terms. They are based on the theory that any electronic

component can fail at any time. This is quite different from the deterministic

approach used for electromechanical devices that have B10 life

characterizations where it is very improbable that a well designed redundant

system will fail during the derated B10 life of the devices. In addition, the

committee discussed the listing requirements in 9.4.3.4.1 for software and

firmware controllers. As it is not clear at this time if NRTL's are approved for

listing to appropriate functional safety standards, the language in this section

needs to be addressed in conjunction with 9.4.3.4.2 during the comment

stage to align with approval methods.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23




Page 35

of 473


Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter removed non applicable reference

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter This guidance is needed

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky The term "NEMA" should be removed from this section. The NEC simply uses

the term "Type". leaving the term "NEMA" can infer that something different

than the NEC Type rations are intended.

Page 36

of 473


David R. Carpenter clarification makes the principle easier to apply

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed reference

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 37

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky The additional text submitted in PI ? Log 114 needs to be added to this

section. It is my understanding that the NEC working spaces requirements are

applicable for the enclosure that contains the supply conductor. This is

supported by NEC 670.1, Informational Note 2. During the meeting there was

considerable discussion and disagreement about this issue. Clear direction

needs to be provided regarding which working space requirements are

applicable.

Drake A. Drobnick I agree with the submitter's substantiation (PI#96). Required equipment

working spaces shall be flat in both the entire depth and width dimentions.

David R. Carpenter This clarification needed

Negative 1

Page 38

of 473


Mark R. Hilbert I voted negative as I do not agree with all the proposed changes. I agree with

the recommendations in PIs 104 & 56 to revise the metric measurement, the

recommendation in PI 55 to clarify Exception No. 4 by changing “and” to

“where” and the recommendation in PI 10 to relocate 11.5.1 to a new

11.5.1.4. I do not agree with the recommendation in PI 56 to add “opening

into the” in front of the words “control cabinet” in 11.5.1.2. The

requirements of this section are necessary to provide adequate space for

personnel to perform adjustment, examination, maintenance and servicing

tasks on the outside of enclosures as well as the inside. The proposed

changes only consider tasks that are performed inside of the enclosure when

in fact there are tasks performed on the outside of enclosures as well. For

example repair or replacement of the operating handle for a disconnecting

means mounted on the outside flange of a control cabinet. As revised

adjacent machine equipment could be placed in front of a control cabinet as

long as the cabinet opening is clear and I can operate the disconnecting

means operator. This will compromise the access to components mounted

on the outside of equipment and will significantly reduce the likelihood of

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15

Page 39

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Paul Dobrowsky The term " derating" should be replaced with "adjustment" related to

"numbers of conductors" and "correction" relating to ambient temperature.

This cange has been made in the NEC and NFPA 79 should be consistent to

avoid confusion.

Jay Tamblingson Given that 4.4.3 states that the ambient operating temperature of the

equipment shall be betweeen 5c and 40C, it would be useful to update the

correction factors and ampacity tables based on 40C rather than requiring

users to always adjust from 30C ambient values and would improve

harmonization with IEC 60204 1.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Difference between ampacity and current in the sentence structure is

needed to keep definitions consist to application...Ampacity defines the

capability of a circuit to handle current.. Current Rating is the ability to

produce... This term is now consistent with other motor related standards

such as the DOE..

Page 40

of 473


Daniel R. Neeser Class CF fuses which have the same performance requirements as Class J

fuses should be added to the list of acceptable fuses in 1(c)iii, 2(c)iii, and

3(c)iii. In addition, Class CF fuses should be added to Table 7.2.10.1. So it

should say "Class J or CF".

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 41

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter see FR 10 comments

Daniel R. Neeser Class CF fuses which have the same performance requirements as Class J

fuses should be added to the list of acceptable fuses in 1(c)iii, 2(c)iii, and

3(c)iii. In addition, Class CF fuses should be added to Table 7.2.10.1. So it

should say "Class J or CF".

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter revised language clarifies the intent

Mark R. Hilbert This revision also meets the intent of PI 103, Log #59.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter revised language clarificaton is needed

Page 42

of 473


Daniel R. Neeser The term "supply circuits" should be better defined in the standard. Is it for

the supply to the main industrial control panel of a machine? Does it also

apply to industrial control panels downstream of the main industrial control

panel? I would think the requirements for downstream industrial control

panels, may not necessarily have the same requirements.

Stephen W. Douglas Is it the intent of the committee to prevent these supplies to be installed in

separate cables? Provide each supply is installed in a separate cable I believe

the intent of this requirement will be met. I recommend we add “or cables”

after the word raceway to read: Where the equipment is supplied from two

or more sources of power or from two or more independent disconnecting

means, the power wiring from each supply source or from each

disconnecting means shall be run in raceways, or cables and shall not

terminate in or pass through common junction boxes.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 1

David R. Carpenter See comment FR 50

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 43

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Page 44

of 473


Paul R. Warndorf This item should be harmonized with FR 90 NFPA 79 2012 and delete the

word "separate" from "separate raceway".

Stephen W. Douglas Is it the intent of the committee to prevent these supplies to be installed in

separate cables? Provide each supply is installed in a separate cable I believe

the intent of this requirement will be met. I recommend we add “or cables”

after the word raceway to read: Where the equipment has two or more

sources of power or two or more independent disconnecting means, power

wiring from each disconnecting means shall be run in separate raceways or

cables and shall not terminate in or pass through common junction boxes.

Negative 1

Jay Tamblingson This section should have been deleted as it is redundant with 13.1.4 which

applies to all conductors, including motor circuits.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15


Eligible to Vote:23






bonding jumper" might be more appropriate. The parenthetical terms

(plug/sockets) should also be deleted.

Negative 2

Page 45

of 473


Drake A. Drobnick I agree with the submitter's substantiation (PI#1) for removing 20 ampere

receptacles.


Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

FR 88, Section No. 16.2.3 [Excluding any Sub Sections], See FR 88

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter Sign must be durable

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed to stop confusion

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Page 46

of 473






Negative 1

David R. Carpenter This change does not stop or clear up confusion when Industrial Machine

design is based on IEC standards. See FR 50.. Removing the term "protective

ground" does not explain how it (the term "Protective Ground")is to be

applied when referred to within specifications and wiring diagrams of IEC

based equipment. When the engineer or installer encounters the IEC Wirng

Diagram they are not aware that this in reference to the US equivalent of the

equipment ground... some think it is referring to the neutral....

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 47

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 1

David R. Carpenter See comments FR 50 & FR 80

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Page 48

of 473


Eligible to Vote:23







Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter This clarification is long over due. However, there is still work needed for this

section concerning existing applications with no manufactures guidance

concerning SCCR. This must be compliant with the manufactures testing

results for application.

Daniel R. Neeser It would be beneficial to clarify that the branch circuit overcurrent protective

device is really only providing short circuit protection. Recommend the

standard refer to the branch circuit short circuit and ground fault protection

be changed to branch circuit short circuit protection. In addition, it would be

beneficial to define the term in Chapter 3, such as Short circuit (fault). A

short circuit is a type of overcurrent condition where current flows outside of

the normal path. The fault can be line line, line ground (ground fault), line

neutral or combination.

Page 49

of 473


Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 55, Section No. A.3.3.9, See FR 55

Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman Delete the parenthetical references: Conduits, cable trunking systems (see

3.3.15), and underfloor channels are types of duct. (See also 3.3.80,

Raceway.)

Page 50

of 473


David R. Carpenter needed editorial change

Negative 1

Paul Dobrowsky This section and the definition of "Duct" in Chapter 3 should be deleted. The

term "Raceway" is defined and is the correct term. Adding information in the

proposed annex related to the term "duct" is appropriate.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter needed change

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

FR 8, Section No. A.4.1, See FR 8

Eligible to Vote:23

Page 51

of 473




Palmer L. Hickman The Correlating Committee should review this action. It may be beyond the

scope of NFPA 79 to address static electricity.

David R. Carpenter needed reference

Negative 1

Daniel R. Neeser Adding this standard is not appropriate since the text does not address static

electricity (only in the annex material).

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

Page 52

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman Recommend removal of the parenthetical reference: The selection of other

means is dependent on many factors, taking into account those persons for

whom its use is intended. (See ANSI B11.0 and ISO 12100.)

David R. Carpenter Needed Reference

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 47, New Section after A.6.2, See FR 47

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter best language for intent

Mark R. Hilbert Continue to accept the revisions. See my ballot comment on FR 46.

Negative 1

Daniel R. Neeser There are not currently UL 50E enclosures that are available as arc resistant,

only some low voltage and medium voltage equipment (switchgear and

motor control centers) is currently available.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

FR 56, Section No. A.6.3.1.1, See FR 56

Eligible to Vote:23

Page 53

of 473








Jay Tamblingson This is the only place where the term "equipment grounding system" is used.

The term "equipment grounding circuit" is used in Chapter 8 and elsewhere.

Negative 1


Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

Page 54

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 2


Jay Tamblingson The annex note should be retained but revised to point to the new Annex J

containing details on grounding and bonding terminology.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 61, New Section after A.9.2, See FR 61

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman The first sentence does not appear to read correctly. Also, it is recommended

to remove the parenthetical reference: For removal of power it can be

sufficient to remove the power needed to generate a torque or force. This

can be achieved by declutching, disconnecting, switching off, or by electronic

means (see 9.2.5.4.1.4). When stop functions are initiated it can be necessary

to discontinue machine functions other than motion.

David R. Carpenter annex needed

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 55

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23




Jay Tamblingson The term "emergency stopping" should be changed to "stopping" as it

generically applies with the other items listed. As described in A9.2.5.4,

"emergency stop" is a complementary protective measure.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 56

of 473


FR 60, New Section after A.9.2.3.3, See FR 60

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman This sentence does not appear to read correctly: The supply circuit

disconnecting means when opened achieves a Category 0 stop.

David R. Carpenter nedded

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17


Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter corrected reference

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18


Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 57

of 473



Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 58

of 473


FR 72, Section No. C.5, See FR 72

Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 1

Mark R. Hilbert Adding “conveyors and conveying machines” to the examples of industrial

machines is not necessary and will likely add more confusion than

clarification from an inspection standpoint. For example would a conveyor

with a manual start/stop arrangement and loading that is permanently

installed between grade level or the 1st floor and the 2nd floor storage area

of an industrial or commercial facility be an considered an industrial

machine? The large complex types of “conveying machines” recommended in

the recommendation can be considered under C.5 (2) and (3) transfer and

sortation machines.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 91, Section No. D.1, See FR 91

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman It is suggested to remove the parenthetical information: Figure D.1(a)

through Figure D.1(q) are not intended to be (design) guidelines. They are

included only to illustrate documentation methods.

David R. Carpenter Agree that output and input are wrong in existing text

Negative 0

Page 59

of 473


Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 92, Section No. F.2, See FR 92

Eligible to Vote:23



David R. Carpenter compliance and clarity

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

Page 60

of 473


FR 104, Section No. F.5.3.1, See FR 104

Eligible to Vote:23




Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 18

FR 31, New Section after F.5.4, See FR 31

Eligible to Vote:23



Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 19

FR 43, Section No. H.2, See FR 43

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman It is suggested to remove the parentheical references.

David R. Carpenter consistent terminology

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

FR 49, New Section after H.5, See FR 49

Eligible to Vote:23

Page 61

of 473




Mark R. Hilbert Continue to develop this Annex. See my ballot statement on FR 50.

Negative 1

David R. Carpenter The IEC terms and definition should be compared to NFPA to help the reader

understand how to apply.

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 62

of 473


FR 7, Section No. J.1.1, See FR 7

Eligible to Vote:23



Palmer L. Hickman The Correlating Committee should review this action. It may be beyond the

scope of NFPA 79 to address static electricity.

David R. Carpenter Needed reference

Negative 2

Drake A. Drobnick If we didn't accept any public inputs concerning static electricity there is no

need to reference this publication.

Daniel R. Neeser Adding this standard is not appropriate since the text does not address static

electricity (only in the annex material).

Abstain 0

Affirmative 15

FR 30, Section No. J.1.2, See FR 30

Eligible to Vote:23



Drake A. Drobnick I agree with the submitter of PI#60. The dates for ISO 12100 and 13849 1

should be updated.

David R. Carpenter ISO information needed

J. B. Titus According to the PI 60 and FR 30 statements for my submittal on J.1.2.5, the

recommended action was approved. Yet, the date for ISO 12100 was not

changed from 2003 to 2010 and likewise the date for ISO 13849 1 was not

changed from 1990 to 2006.

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 16

Page 63

of 473


FR 94, Section No. J.1.2.8, See FR 94

Eligible to Vote:23



Drake A. Drobnick The UL publication dates within this FR do not agree with dates for the same

publications found in FR#30.

David R. Carpenter the best reference available

Negative 0

Abstain 0

Affirmative 17

Page 64

of 473




2.3.1 IEC Publications.

International Electrotechnical Commission, 3, rue de Varembé, P.O. Box 131, CH-1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland. IEC documents are available through ANSI.

ISO/IEC Guide 65, General Requirements for Bodies Operating ProductCertification Systems, 1996.

ISO/IEC Standard 17020, General Criteria for the Operation of Various Types ofBodies Performing Inspection , 1998.






CommitteeStatement:

The TC deletes 2.3.1 in its entirety because these referenced standards are notmandatory references used in the body of NFPA 790. This complies with the MOS(1.6.2.1 and 1.6.2.2).

ResponseMessage:

FR-1-NFPA 790-2012


of 473



First Revision No. 2-NFPA 790-2012 [ Section No. D.2 ]

D.2 Informational References.

The following documents or portions thereof are listed here as informationalresources only. They are not a part of the requirements of this document.

ISO/IEC 17000, Conformity Assessment – - Vocabulary and General Principle,Nov 1, 2004.

ISO/IEC Guide 65, General Requirements for Bodies Operating ProductCertification Systems, 1996.

ISO/IEC Standard 17020, General Criteria Conformity assessment - Requirementsfor the Operation operation of Various Types of Bodies Performing Inspection,1998 various types of bodies performing inspection , 2012 .






Committee Statement: This reference is updated to the latest version and title.



of 473

National Fire Protection Association

1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471 Phone: 617-770-3000 • Fax: 617-770-0700 • www.nfpa.org

M E M O R A N D U M

To: NFPA Technical Committee on Electrical Equipment Evaluation

From: Richard Roux, Staff Liaison

Date: October 24, 2012

Subject: NFPA 790 First Draft TC FINAL Ballot Results (A2014)

According to the final ballot results, all ballot items received the necessary affirmative votes to pass ballot.

17 Members Eligible to Vote 3 Not Returned (J. Hamilton, S. Paulsen, and J. Whipple)14 Affirmative on All (w/comment: A. Szende)0 Negatives on one or more First Revision0 Abstentions on one or more First Revision

The attached report shows the number of affirmative, negative, and abstaining votes as well as the explanation of the vote for each first revision.

There are two criteria necessary for each first revision to pass ballot: (1) simple majority and (2) affirmative 2/3vote. The mock examples below show how the calculations are determined.

(1) Example for Simple Majority: Assuming there are 20 vote eligible committee members, 11 affirmative votes are required to pass ballot. (Sample calculation: 20 members eligible to vote ÷ 2 = 10 + 1 = 11)

(2) Example for Affirmative 2/3: Assuming there are 20 vote eligible committee members and 1 member did not

return their ballot and 2 members abstained, the number of affirmative votes required would be 12. (Sample calculation: 20 members eligble to vote – 1 not returned – 2 abstentions = 17 x 0.66 = 11.22 = 12 )

As always please feel free to contact me if you have any questions.

of 473